Home

care of supplies in storage

1. SIZE NO 34 1 BIN NO BOXES quA CULTU EM BRE MEER I I C ERES i NOTE The shelf box arrangements shown above are examples of only some of the layoutsthatcan be used Thenumberofsmalloriarge boxes or whole shelves to be used depends upon the physical characteristics and volume of bin Stocks to be stored The main principles to be followed are Use shelf boxes extensively for 3 Place heavy large items toward ease of inventory and stock the bottom with most inactive relocation items on lowest shelves Place small lots in the center so Place light large items toward that the majority of items are in the top with most inactive items chest high position for easy on highest shelves picking Figure 5 7 Shelf arrangement 5 12 VAN STORAGE LAYOUT Use the mobile van only for those items that are critical to the unit mission Plan your layout so that you use all possible storage space Store fast moving items near the entrance Store slow moving and pilferable items in the rear of the van Figure 5 8 shows a van storage layout Note that the van has preassembled bins and extended sides This type of space is not reportable under the guidance related to storage space manage ment reporting described elsewhere in this manual FIELD STORAGE LAYOUT When your
2. 114 Maintaining Materials Handling Equipment 2 11 6 UPLOADING AND STORING THE COMBAT ASL Overview PULP OSG eant M 12 1 Combat UE cn 12 1 Special Considerations 12 1 Location and Storage 146 0 0000000 101 12 1 Location System Ho ert ver a to bebe ER D Eo Pese 12 1 We pO VAM EP IM 12 1 Computation and Configuration of Usable Storage Capacity annii Mm 12 2 Ee 12 2 PT 12 2 LOGISTICS HOT 5 A 1 SOP FOR CENTRAL ISSUE FACILITY eerte B 1 INTERNAL SOP FOR QUICK SUPPLY STORE C 1 E F GLOSSARY REFERENCES INDEX C1 FM 10 15 JULIAN DATE CALENDAR 2 2 222 2 2 4 E 1 QUALITY CONTROL ASSURANCE PROGRAM F 1 Mr e M O Glossary 1 ER ERES References 1 1x C1 FM 10 15 PREFACE PURPOSE This field manual provides supply support activity officers with a handy guide It covers critical mission task common to SSA officers This manual is only a guide It does not present all the information you need However it cites sources of additional information SCOPE This FM gives specific guidance on planning organizing directing
3. 2 11 Supervise Issue and Shipment of Supplies 2 007 2 11 Perform Night Delivery Operations sscsssssssssssssssssssecsscsssssccarsensaceserssescssecevens 2 12 Set Up a Class I Distribution or Supply 04 444000441 2 12 Monitor Class I Storage ERN 2 12 Check Excess Class I Stocks 22 20 2 4 2 13 Supervise Water Point Operations sscscsssssssssssssecsesecsssseosssssesececeresescecssesssenss 2 15 Monitor Water Requirement cscsssssssssssssesssesssssssssesssssssesececesesscatacscacaracararaces 2 15 Review Water Supply Summary Reports 0 2 16 Supervise Rigging of Water Drums for External Sling Loads ita iiie et ee re ultr cec 2 16 Set Up Class II IV and VII Distribution 5 2 17 Supervise Class II IV and Support Operations 2 17 Monitor Class VII Issue 15 2 0 2 18 K Direct Helicopter External Air Transport Sling Load or Request Airdrop Support 2 20 2 18 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 4 Establish a Map irre ede a dees eid Maintain Security of Classified Maps Establish a Salvage Collection
4. CEPS E Y SOLA RA C1 FM 10 15 dicit EIE Code for sensitive gig AA 88179 gg or pilferable items Code changed to show 818 S6 S CO issue of items KNOX KY 49121 e 1974 99 mar QUANTITY 83 fum Serial numbers of supplies added to document WAREHOUSE LOCATION XYZ Customer s signature showing that serial numbers are correct and that items were received 13 TRANSPORTATION CHARGEABLE TO 14 ANE OR RECEIVERS PONATUR AND PATH 15 RECEIVERS DOCUMENT NUMBER TCNW22ABC32050992 3317 Ondo reel EDITION OF 1 jam MAY 06 SINGLE Lind IPEM MEL EASE OOCUMENT meum Code changed I to show om 9th MAINT BN issue of items 81st 5 6 S CO FT ADAMS AL 9954 FORT KNOX KY 46121 gt ror rr prr DOC Bana Bana greeny NUM a Serial numbers Ue pen added to document 3284 Earum MENT mre mem 4 71 Code for sensitive 7 or pilferable items MTOE 6 15338 3486 REQUEST OR Tuner Customer s signature showing that serial numbers are correct and that items were received Figure 8 4 MROs showing issue of sensitive or pilferable items 8 9 C1 FM 10 15 0008 bk anes 2 LEVXBZNSII2h41 _________ fe ia marry
5. NO OF CONTAINERS TOTAL CUBE WAREHOUSED BY DATE WAREHOUSE LOCATION 3 17 5 DISPOSAL FIRST DESTINATION ADDRESS DATE SHIPPED EL E 3 7 13 TRANSPORTATION CHARGEABLE TO 15 RECEIVERS DOCUMENT NUMBER 10rTION OF 1 84 UBED DOD SINGLE ITEM RELEASE RECEIPT DOCUMENT UNTIL EXHAUSTEO Figure 9 8 and disposal release order completed by shipping clerk 9 12 FM 10 15 SHIP TO POE W62G2T SHARPE ARMY DEPOT LATHROP CA 95330 Pravious editions are obsolete 7 Approved OME No 0704 0188 7 5 SHIP TO POE E eh 3DK MILITARY OCEAN TERMINAL OAKLAND CA 66666 7 UC2 FOREIGN CITY FOREIGN COUNTRY 99999 HEN 4015 USA ASCOM DEPOT FOREIGN CITY FOREIGN COUNTRY Previous editions are obsolete Figure 9 9 Military shipment labels for CONUS and oversea shipments 9 13 FM 10 15 Section IV Using Pallets DESCRIPTION A pallet is a portable platform on which supplies are placed to facilitate handling and trans portation This platform is generally a two deck structure which permits mechanical handling and tiering of unit loads of supplies and equipment TYPES OF PALLETS Pallets are classified as expendable and perma nent Permanent pallets are also classified as general purpose and special purpose Expendable Pallets Expendable pallets generally are de
6. ET n TIM 99092 44 203N ZNI t Figure 8 19 DA Form 2765 MRD for partial issue completed from data on an MRO 8 18 10 15 2003 204022 apo QUANTITY STOCK NUMBER QUANTITY EIE 1880 FUND Transaction DOLLARS iCENTS or NG NUMGER O SERIAL NUMGER DISTRI gt BUTION SUF DOC A 3 23 Tots m i WHOS VO os UNIT OF SUE QUANTITY DOCUMENT R e REQUISTTIONER 9 0 DISTRIBUTION PROJECT T 7 1 LL 1 1 1 15 SUIT LEMENTAMY ee COST DETAIL ACCOUNT NUMBER ESS i i Ld UNIT PRICE TOTAL PRICE OESCRIPTION MO INSSI 16530034 PUSLICATION DATA DATE POSTED Y 031 3 11V SNH LIOI M 74 T T 1 5 QUANTITY aider ue DATE AVAILABLE u oare RECEIVED SIGNATURE waa 11 990 7014 esl SS eas ET STS war mansana jc We ied uals NEN Figure 8 20 Complete denial add any MROs and MRDs that are not on the list and return the list to the
7. EXCEPT hanva 33 AMOUNT VERHIHD Commer POR DATE ash TYLA oF OFF IORA F DD PER 1155 PREVIOUS EOITION OBSOLETE Figure 7 4 DD Form 1188 completed as a receipt document with the item Use the information on the main tenance request to make a DD Form 1348 1 receipt document so that the item can be issued If your DSU receives supplies with documents different from the ones listed check DA Pamphlet 25 30 This microfiche pamphlet lists all forms used by the Army It gives the number of the publication that explains how to fill out and process each form See Figure 7 5 for an extract of a page from DA Pamphlet 25 30 As storage supervisor you need to set up a e to help your soldiers Keep track of the supplies and receipt documents your section receives The best way to do this is to set up a suspense file Make a file folder for each day of the workweek and an extra one for delayed action receipts Use these folders to keep track of receipt documents and to help you decide in what order you should send the supplies to the storage Section After you receive the receipt document from the locator section where the code was checked put it in the file folder for that day Each day check your folders before you decide which s pplies to process first If there are any receipts in the delayed action file they mu
8. 06 51206 9NILHOd3H 550 1 101 9681 9 00 9500 9000 00 909 31VH 3SnOH3HVM 318VUuVd3H NSA 1v101 0 08 9600 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 01 0 8 320 3 17101 s3nn 0832 SINN ISV 0 0 0 964 54 9600 0 96 St 901 88 59 STVIN3IO NOILOVISILVS QNVWIG 157 1 101 39NVWHOHH3d AlddNS LN3WN3D9VNVIN AlddNs OQ M 1V8 Ou32 LV 1sv sann1sv 01 NOISIAIG 0 0 15 LE 0 0 0 0 Ot 01 9 99 S3NI1 53 17101 19101 NOISIAIG 0 0 02 OL 0 0 08 08 vL 94 1 19101 19101 SSv12 06 435 LO Figure 1 4 Sample supply performance report 1 10 illustrates sample status cards and explains how to process them Your tasks are listed below Research to determine if request is a late status Has it already been filled Is it still pending Review the net asset position to determine if the items are still required FOLLOW UP ON OUTSTANDING REQUISITIONS If you desire follow up on outstanding requi sitions 054 will automatically prepare requests to the next higher supply source after the number of days for follow up has passed and status has not been received However you may prepare follow up requests manu
9. 9 11 Adjustment documents 2 19 ADP Run schedules 1 3 Security 1 5 1 6 a 4 6 Allowable loss or gain 3 3 ARIS VIP Ua 1 2 7 14 ARI codes Lp rA Rx 1 11 1 12 ASL Change list 4 3 Change list recommendations 4 2 111 Stockage criteria 1 1 As required processes 1 4 Augmentation 2 1 Automated system procedures 2 11 Automatic stockage level 4 2 Aviation and missile repair parts 1 2 Basic floor plan 5 6 Batteries Dry cel 4 12 RR meni 4 12 Battery storage requirements 4 12 BH status code 7 10 8 4 4 eas 5 17 Bin cubic capacity 5 18 Bin storage layout 5 9 5 10 Blockage parameter card 1 11 Breakbulk semitrailers 9 16 Bulk fuel operations 1 13 Bulk petroleum 3 1 Inventory eue Rav CIE RR ERES 3
10. 10 21 Loose 10 21 Packaged vecta Rd 10 21 Palletized roD 10 23 Picking sce oe ei hla ni LI MT 9 7 Stock 4 2 Stock location change card 6 11 10 9 Stock location 6 1 6 3 Stock 2 8 4 6 Stock locator code 2 9 Stock locator file system 2 18 Stock locator system 6 1 6 5 Stock 4 7 Stock record 10 14 Stock status sees 2 12 Stock status report 1 5 1 7 2 20 Stockage objective 1 12 Storage aids 5 14 through 5 16 12 1 12 2 Storage checks and inspections 2 8 Storage 5 3 Storage layout 5 3 9 55 gallon drums 3 10 500 gallon collapsible drums 3 10 li 5 9 5 10 Bull iita LEE URN 5 11 Field 5 13 Floor plat eroe vete 5 2 Open 5 8 owe ECRANS 5 6 afi i rese 5 9 eS 5 13 Storage layout drawing 5 4 Storage layout plans 2 4 5 2 Storage operations
11. Establish and Operate a 4222 2 7 eene teniente Review CIF Property Records and Adjustment Documents Manage a Self Service Supply Coordinate Laundry Bath and Renovation Operations Decontaminate Clothing and Textiles ees Manage Unit Graves Registration Operations PETROLEUM PLATOON LEADER Review Your Responsibilities eee Establish a Class III Supply Point eere Supervise Bulk Petroleum Receipt and Distribution Inspect Petroleum Tank Trucks and Tank Semitrailers Verify Accuracy of Bulk Petroleum 1 Supervise Helicopter Refueling eere Establish Mobile Filling Stations eene Supervise Hose Line Operations Supervise Pipeline Operations eene Control Pipeline Corrosion Control Environmental Pollution eene Supervise Packaged Petroleum Storage and Distribution Perform Quality Surveillance eren Monitor Storage and Handling of Compressed Gases Coordinate Local Purchase eese nennen Maintain Returnable and Refillable Cylinders
12. Returning Retrograde Cargo Using Pallets DESCHDHOE curas var etant Types of Using Cargo Containers Responsibilities Description cited rome nec iie PERFORMING PHYSICAL INVENTORIES Overview The Location Survey Preparing for Survey RD Ee n Performing the Survey Using Handmade Location Survey Work Cards Processing Manual Location Survey Work Cards Using Preprinted Location Survey Work Cards Using SARSS Location Survey Listing Correcting Location Survey Problems and Storage Errors Comparing Survey Results With Stock Records Manual Procedures Preinventory Procedures Setting Up Controls cos aene pater Setting Cutoff Controls on Setting Cutoff Controls on Materiel Release Orders Getting an Inventory Voucher Number Preparing Inventory Count Cards Preparing Inventory Count Card Control Listings Preparing Stored Items for Inventory seet9ossses ceco00000000000900000000000
13. 2 16 Weekly 1 4 Weekly stock status 1 5 Zero balances 4 2 FM 10 15 12 DECEMBER 1990 By Order of the Secretary of the Army CARL E VUONO General United States Army Chief of Staff Official THOMAS F SIKORA Brigadier General United States Army The Adjutant General DISTRIBUTION Active Army USAR and ARNG To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12 1 I E requirements for FM 10 14 4 Handbook for the Supply Support Activity Officer Qty rqr block no 0862 FM 10 15 Loading Container Inserts and Cargo Transporters Qty rqr block no 0863 and FM 38 741 Direct Support Unit Storage Operations Qty rqr block no 1157 U S GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1996 338 421 41242 PIN 023679 001
14. 7 12 eu eee 12 1 5 4 t eri oT 1 2 Overag s EDD ER ELE e UNES 7 13 Perishable 5 4 5 2 5 3 1 11 Selecting 8 7 5 2 5 3 Shel hfe ener 6 8 8 2 7 18 7 10 8 4 b ERRORI 7 13 Layouts CEB operations 2 23 Laundry and renovation operations 2 22 ppc isha Rt aed Gh CEDE 4 1 Light signals 2 14 Loading v RAT eh Ue teen 9 16 Location Additions 10 7 12 1 Chang s 25 xu I 6 9 10 7 Deletions 10 7 Error eee etre 2 8 10 8 Markings 6 5 6 6 Site forms eed ete beet tt nets 6 12 Location survey Problems and corrective actions 2 10 10 9 MUERE NU MR 10 10 Location survey work cards Handmade vul 10 5 10 6 Preprinted 10 8 Locator 2 8 10 5 10 9 Location system 12 1 Location Deck iu cnc E etse ebbe
15. PEE y 3 4 3 8 3 10 4 x 4 4 6 4 8 4 10 6 10 6 12 7x9 8 8 BTO 8 12 8 10 12 14 16 18 Board feet Board feet Board feet Board feet Board feet Board feet NOTE This table should be copied and placed in the lumber storage area It can be used computing board footage if the number of pieces needed is known Thus 1 000 2 x 45 12 feet long would contain 8 000 board feet of lumber FM 10 15 um um IPTE z 82 LUMBER 2 a rome Sui MMC S F 45 FT als coii occa oc s NUMBER oF TOTAL QUANT Stern Nes E B EET m ZN BoARb o 3 37 205 cdi e1502273 2 el RECORDER AND DATE IH 3 3 138 2 DE Se SAQUE oe icon ul 56 Jesoes s s s o INN 8 JUNITPRICE ane 4 89 meee _
16. 34 3 J M n M 3 4 n m n n n H mW HU M n H Wi Sj w Ww Ww 4 3 4 14 oeo o ofo o ofo ooo ofo o ofo c oo o 0 ao ofo o ojo o o afo 00 0 olos 0 n sapor e rnm aos ijo ve pm n oe a mr m o 8 re n aafaa an asl nunpen nin pr f TIEI iiyrpripttttg 222222 2222222222 2222222 222 2222222222 2222222222 21222 2 2222 22 2121222222222 3331333333313 3313333133313 33333 33313 3313333333333 3333133333313 3333313313333 444444144444444444444444444 1444444 4444444444 44444444444 4444444444444 E 1 55595555555555555555555555555 5555555155 5555555555555 5155515135 55551555 5555555555 130080000 5565666 666 i Gi ULL 130000 Two THREE FOUR savan RIGHT T t 2 IAT 317 137 17 2 13 2 7 771777 ERILE EIIE EIEN ESI 0 09229 95 5199 9199919 999999993599 91939993 1 9 9 9 59999 915 3 31989 99999 999 9 99 999 sgala sad pabulo sober ce nont ani nios ala anl sa nino ciue ad In ostia n oseo Figure 7 9 Materiel receipt card made from information on rece
17. CURES 2 18 Glass VIDI 2 18 Survey lots UR 2 8 Survey work card 2 10 Systems DSS eee Ave aei elei Rel 7 6 DSS AOC Coe aA 7 6 055 eee E EUR 7 6 Tally 7 1 Technical supply officer 4 1 Tent storage layout 5 9 Threat monitoring 1 6 Tire storage 4 11 Transportation Installation brav PERSE dials be 9 11 Organic nues eos ein RD IN 9 11 Transportation discrepancies 7 13 Turn ins Found 7 13 EA DH DLE E CP 7 14 Serviceable s IS 7 18 1 7 13 Types 10 4 Unidentified stock 2 10 10 7 Unscheduled spot inventory 2 11 Usable storage capacity 12 2 Index 5 FM 10 15 Van storage 5 13 Vertical 5 7 Vertical 5 18 Warehouse denial 2 12 Water consumption planning factors 2 16 Index 6 Water 2 15 Water requirements 2 15 Water supply summary reports
18. m SIZE NO 12 aes d i SIZE NO 24 SIZE NO 3X 1 BIN NO BOXES Place light slow moving items on the highest shelves Store small items in the center at chest high position to aid in picking Place heavy large items and slow moving items on the lowest shelves Figure 4 6 Sample bin and shelf box arrangement CHANGE STORAGE RECORDS AND STORAGE AIDS TO AGREE WITH MONTHLY CROSS REFERENCE LIST Each month as a result of the catalog update pro cess the MMC will send your DSU a cross reference list for each supported unit The list shows changes of stock number units of issue or both identified by the catalog update process You must make sure that storage personnel use the information on this list to update bin tags placards and parts identification Failure to make these changes could result in incorrect quantity fills delays in supply fills and MRDs MRDs require a special inventory NOTE This change deletes Figure 4 7 MAINTAIN OR MANAGE RMA Using units turn in unserviceable items and request serviceable items from their supporting supply activ ity There is no longer an exchange of items Every thing must be formally turned in and requested to include those items previously exchanged AR 710 2 paragraph 3 18 DA Pamphlet 710 2 2 Chapter 11 and TM 38 L32 12 give details on how to manage an RMA Stockage selection is based on demand history maintenance repair dates
19. lon Bolen Doren er 09251 16746 TCOUNT QUANTITY m M S 66M V WW nmn nr n vw a ee EE KON 2 5 QUANTITY 4 16 INSSI HOS 1537096 DATE POSTEO 5 4 a AVAILABLE us 4 warme mueren OOLLARS 98092 4H 293N 2 07 MV Figure 10 7 Preprinted and manually prepared inventory count cards 10 16 they must put them in location order and number them Be sure they also number some blank cards for the inventory teams to use After the inventory count cards are completed and numbered you must give the stack to the inventory supervisor He will check them and then issue them to the inventory teams to use to record the supply count PREPARING INVENTORY COUNT CARD CONTROL LISTINGS At the same time they make the inventory count cards the or 5 5 of your DSU will also make two separate control listings from the information on the count cards If your DSU does not have ADPE available your ADP and SCS personnel must work together to prepare two listings manually One of these listings will go to the inventory supervisor for controlling the inven tory The other will go to the accountable officer for accountability adjustments and budget report
20. 10 1 Scheduled cyclic inventory 10 8 Scheduled wall to wall inventory 10 3 Special 223 5255 ied as 10 4 Physical location survey 10 1 Pilferable 2 6 Pipeline corrosion 3 6 Pipeline 3 6 Planning issue shipping activities 9 1 Planning the shipment 9 6 5 19 6 1 PLL change 181 4 4 4 10 Postpost 1881 8 2 12 Preinventory procedures 10 11 Prepared storage layout 5 6 Preparing release 9 5 Preventive maintenance checks 3 5 Priority designator 1 3 Procedures Automated coepere CRI 6 10 Manual os vss aedes icu e 6 9 10 11 Processes As required ue ere ee 1 4 Daily jee Lope petites 1 4 Monthly at CERA 1 4 Semimonthly 1 4 Weekly ues Vota es dei 1 4 Processing times DSS see 7 7 DSS ALOC va cre gw RR 7 7 1 3 2 12 Proposed command controlled items lists 1 13 Pulling items from stock Progressive Method 8 9 Selective Method
21. 2920 002943892 EA 09006 122502 3068 9002 271 2 1 13 47 SHIPPED FROM SHIP TO MARK FOR PROJECT 21st MAINT BN 75th SUPPORT CO REC 81017 KNOX KY 40120 FORT KNOX KY 40120 D6S Required DSS 0900282 WAREHOUSE LOCATION or werant FREIGHT RATE eem MAT QUANTITY 53 981 91 C49D3 29 01 1 5 1 07760 12546 LTL 67 00006 PLC2 F G H 1 P K L M 5 DOLLARS SUBSTITUTE DATA ITEM ORIGINALLY REQUESTED FREIGHT CLASSIFICATION NOMENCLATURE T Stock Fund ITEM NOMENCLATURE x Spark Plug SELECTED 8Y AND DATE OF CONTAINERIS TOTAL WEIGHT RECEIVED BY AND DATE INSPECTED 8Y AND DATE E c 1 2 3 7 8 PACKED BY AND DATE NO OF CONTAINERS TOTAL CUBE WAREHOUSED BY AND DATE WAREHOUSE LOCATION R s 1 1 4 9 REMARKS MATERIEL RELEASE FIRST DESTINATION ADDRESS DATE SHIPPED ORDER 11 12 13 TRANSPORTATION CHARGEABLE TO 14 B LADING AWS OR RECEIVER S SIGNATURE AND DATEI 15 RECEIVERS DOCUMENT NUMBER DO FORM 1348 1 EDITION OF 1 JAN 44 MAY BE USED DOD SINGLE LINE ITEM RELEASE RECEIPT UNTIL EXHAUSTED DOCUMENT Figure 9 3 DD Form 1348 1 MRO FM 10 15 EREEREER EEEE EER PET EP e ble lel Y QUANTITY ADO 2 IDENT show FSC NIIN 3 z oare 5 2920 002943892 SHIPPED FRO
22. 5 20 20 20 20 20 2222222252252 weno o Z eur wig pue ann pasedaid 15 10 002 7919 061 00 0767 1 89229 SOvtv 061 00 028S 88229 061 00 0289 16 SOvb 061 00 078S SOtt 061 00 0278S 00221 8068 681 00 O S 10 00221 L068 681 00 01 S L89 9EZ 00 SZ0LV 10 919 681 00 8201 02 00220 81989 681 00 0169 002 610 681 00 0 10 68 1 00 0 7 900221 941 681 00 90 8 02 9048 881 00 0964 ld 00221 124 881 00 0165 02 S9SE 88 00 096S 915 881 00 0 7 02 88 1 00 0 17 122 192 ON 2015 181 395 d NOWNOO XI 55712 06 8336 S v e L Figure 1 3 Sample stock status report 1 7 FM 10 15 SCHEDULE AND COORDINATE INVENTORIES Inventories determine the actual quantity and status of stocks on hand AR 710 2 requires that all items be inventoried at least annually You may schedule cyclic inventories to fulfill the annual inventory requirement You must schedule an inventory when pilferage is suspected when an MRD occurs or when directed by higher HQ During wartime inventories w
23. 5 7 Hose line 3 6 Identifying incorrectly stored items 8 5 Initial provisioning items 1 2 Inspection checklist 3 11 Installation transportation 9 11 Interchangeable 1 2 In transit 2 8 In transit data cards 7 9 Invalid 2 4 Inventory Completing 10 26 10 29 Evaluating performance 10 29 Issuing items 10 20 Key 10 20 Lumber 10 21 Performing 10 21 Special E UV 2 11 Inventory adjustment report list 2 11 Inventory count cards Control Listings 10 17 through 10 19 Preparing oes WEE ue 10 14 iui Mm 2 11 Inventory voucher number 10 13 Issue Control lists 2 18 9 1 9 2 3 3 Items Automatic 1 11 Classified Bh ee ean eee 5 4 Combat ASL erect 12 1 Damaged iocos etes EI 7 13 Demand supported 1 2 Eragile uet eco Pot 5 4
24. 8 10 4 11 QSS stockage criteria 4 12 Quality 3 13 Index 4 Quarterly PLL change list 4 2 4 4 Rack cubic capacity 5 18 Radiacmeters 2 23 RailGars eae Re E 9 16 Ration breakdown 2 12 Receipt documents 7 1 through 7 4 Receipt not due in listing 1 8 Receipt operations 2 2 Receiving cutoff control register 2 11 10 11 Receiving reports 2 3 Receiving supplies 7 1 Recommended stockage level 4 2 Recounts tees bue E sies 10 26 Recoverability codes 2 20 Reimbursement 7 18 Release denial 9 7 Release order 9 10 Relocating stored supplies 8 6 Remote terminal access 4 1 Remote terminal security checks 1 6 Replenishment requisitions 1 11 Reports of 4 2 4 Requisition demand history 4 1 Restrict access 2 6 Returning retrograde cargo 9 11 Rewarehousing 4 11 2 18 Rigging suppl
25. Line out A5 on the original MRO Write A6 above the A5 Write the quantity denied in the quantity denied block Use an annotated copy as input to the denial process If partial MRDs occur attach a copy of the original A5 to the item of supply and then forward the 5 to the issue section ISSUING A MATERIEI RELEASE DENIAL An MRD is a supply failure It reflects an account ing mistake a misplaced item an incorrect stock locator deck or stolen items Your personnel should search all areas carefully before they pass the MRD on to the next level Some of the mistakes they should look for include duplicate receipt records and wrong items listed on receipt records They should check the 8 12 stock locator cards for mistakes in NSN location or name of item They should also check for changed NSNs that were not recorded and a listing with part number or service stock number in place of the NSN As soon as your section issues an MRD your DSU has only 48 hours to find out the reasons for the denial Conduct an inventory and correct the stock records that are involved As storage supervisor you coordi nate the actions of your sections with those of other sections of the DSU during the inventory and the following adjustments You will be the first supervisor notified of the MRD When you find that an MRD needs to be issued you should take the following steps Order the receiving sections to freeze all incom
26. STRINGER TOP AND BOTTOM DECKBOARDS FOUR WAY PARTIAL Figure 9 11 Construction of four way pallets 9 15 FM 10 15 Section V Using Cargo Containers RESPONSIBILITIES As a storage supervisor you are responsible for ensuring that your shipping personnel make the best use of the space within the cargo containers They must take extreme care to safeguard the equipment and supplies that are to be shipped and to load the container correctly so as not to exceed the loading limitations DESCRIPTION Your shipping section will be provided with many different types of containers into which they will load equipment or supplies The following are a few of the many types that will be available to them MILVAN MILVANS are 231 inches long 92 inches wide and 87 inches high The gross weight rating for each 20 foot container is 44 800 pounds When the double doors are closed properly the MILVAN affords waterproof protection SEAVAN SEAVANs vary from approximately 20 to 40 feet in length The standard length used by the military is 40 feet SEAVANs are 8 feet high and 8 feet wide They have a maximum gross weight capacity of 67 200 pounds SEAVANs can be moved by motor and rail and may be stored for shipment on specially containerized ships They may be transported on a semitrailer chassis or railcar and are lifted easily minus the chassis by the 50 000 pound rough terrain container handler or a commercial eq
27. WILL BE MADE BY Finance and Accounting Division Bldg 1200 Fort Blank NJ 07891 AMOUNT RECHTV RNS UE ir E rtm SIGNATUAE OF AUTH GOVT REP ir Signifies acceptance of supplies listed Figure 7 3 DD Form 250 completed as a receipt document FM 10 15 ron no 994064 on 06 QUOTE ORDEA SAK DO Fram 1135 COATED POR Tioma Con Rat unt 2 D4CYVARY ganin 1 OF 4 ME dar TIONTUP CH ANQUETT MG DABC 03 81 2001 23 Jul 83 11650001 w T 7 AOMIMUT A40 BY HP other then 0 npo DELIVERY Purchasing and Contracting Office qur Bidg 222 O eran Fort Artillery NM 80111 Bie if Pr T atn ro rou FORT RTT 60 7 15 Aug 83 7 Whimsey Gadget Dco coon 800 Petrified Blvd Net Burnt Sands NM 84116 14 INYCICUB See Block 15 TR PAYMENT POLL MARR ALL 1094th Supply amp Service Co Finance sud Accounting Office PACKAGES Bidg 1000 Bldg 44 pressus ORTRAET OR Fort Artillery NM 84111 Fort Artillery NM 84111 commen This delivery order it abject w instructions contained on tits de of form only aad is anothe
28. 2 6 Storage problem troubleshooting chart 2 7 Storage space 5 1 5 18 n EE 5 17 Management report 5 21 5 18 Open Wed exer nee 5 1 Status 5 21 Survey work 5 20 Storing incoming supplies 8 1 Storing 8 1 FM 10 15 Supplies TSsuin gc c Reb IE 9 2 Packing eb ru ieu 9 10 eet 9 2 SHIppin diei v seeds 9 5 ju E 10 4 Supply discrepancies 7 13 Supply mission control element 1 1 Supply operations officer 1 1 Supply performance indicators 1 8 1 9 Supply performance report 1 10 4 2 4 5 Supply 1 1 Supply platoon leader 2 1 Supply points 2 18 Class IT i kb ake ne 3 1 Class IV St 2 18 Class VIL eb M 2 18 Supply point distribution 2 15 Supply point 3 1 Supply responsiveness 1 2 Supply support of deploying units 1 8 Supply status 1 9 Support operations Class LEER CEU 2 18 Glass eges
29. Have your storage personnel check the storage section for mistakes and the missing items e Have your personnel check the trouble shooting procedures listed in Table 8 2 to find out why the supplies are not in stock Have your personnel take a physical inven tory of the missing item after they have thoroughly researched the MRD Physical inven tory procedures are in Chapter 10 Notify the stock records section personnel that you need to conduct an inventory and tell them the NSN involved You will need to get an inventory voucher number from them before you begin Use the inventory voucher number on all adjustment documents you use to make any changes to the stock records Give this adjustment document to the SCS so that they can make all changes necessary 8 19 FM 10 15 DS4 SUPPLY MANAGEMENT REPORT AGL CO4 MRO LIST MROS PICKED UI QTY DOCUMENT NUMBER PROJ RECEIVE DSU DATE QTY INITIALS COMMENTS EA W340VT 3051 0001 02 3061 VOR 5 DEB16 6625 00 264 8011 W340VT_ 3051 0004 02 6 Ok 6444 4120 00 618 1802 W340VT 3051 0006 306 VOA 2920 00 259 1688 W340VY 3051 0002 306 4 VOR S EA DENIED 14 2520 00 617 7631 x NOA44 3120 00 618 1802 7 4530 00 00 STAT EA W340VT 3051 0005 3 voe W34VCE 3051 0007 326 4 84402 305 00 0 306 1 1 1 7 x 5143 3040 00 260 4012 1 340 3051 0003 VOR
30. Report reasons which make the turn in unnecessary For example report an increase in stockage level or the fact that the items were lost or destroyed and reported in a report of survey Request premium transportation for ARIs coded E for expedite Disposition instructions are not needed SSAs that do not report excess directly to a wholesale supply source will ship ARIs to their supported SSA Those that report excess to a wholesale supply source will ship ARIs to the closest area oriented depot COORDINATE RECEIPT STORAGE AND ISSUE TM 38 L32 12 describes receipt storage and issue procedures Your office receives requests 1 11 FM10 15 Table 1 6 Automatic return item codes CODE DEFINITION E This item is currently in a low stock position fast return of this item is required Use return PD 03 D This item has been removed from previous ARIL Automatic return is no longer required because item is in long supply Report this item using normal excess reporting procedures when it is excess to retain retention level outlined in AR 710 1 Chapter 6 from supported units and MROs from your sup porting MMC or SCS Your tasks are listed below Notify platoon HQ of arrival times type and uantity of supplies to be received or issued and the time they are due to arrive at the loading or off loading site Check to make sure you have space to store incoming supplies The MMC provides a printout listing
31. showing a partial denial 8 17 FM 10 15 Zn sage her rer ES boe eer E ATE Se Er Oe x i Wt LERRA es _ t M N ITEM DESCRIPTION PARTIAL RELEASE NNI MANUALLY PREPARED MRO DATE POSTED INIT NC NU INSSI 1530038 AVAILABLE DATE RECEIVED SIGNATURE i lt ip F R S909 7 012 pASAANSB 2530 gd 0009 WK 436430640307 WK4GE4LEVKB 2080 coe ee zl maii INN PI ur NAT Pedir Ww satt nbl emt nto DEL 5 88 HEN UNIT DOCUMENT ROUTING STA OF QUANTITY SILC LADING NUMBER OR i ISSUE SHIPMENT SERIAL NUMBER 441 m mu DOC IDENT Een NOMSER OF TI T TT UNIT LH TOTAL x IV oe 14 3855 1530034 DESCRIPTION vus omnem on on FREE EAM EI MRD DATE POSTEO INIT AND nl on nn DON E D D Da a aaa T DUE DATE AVAILABLE INIT RECEIVED DATE RECEIVED SIGNATURE 6 om 1 ea OUANTITY area m eT ara rere T 4
32. 10 15 BASIC DOCTRINE MANUAL FOR SUPPLY AND STORAGE SUPPLY OPERATIONS OFFICER SUPPLY PLATOON LEADER PETROLEUM PLATOOK LEADER TECHNICAL SUPPLY OFFICER Headquarters Department of the Army DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is uniimited C1 FM 10 15 HEADQUARTERS CHANGE DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY NOI Washington DC 30 September 1993 BASIC DOCTRINE MANUAL FOR SUPPLY AND STORAGE FM 10 15 12 December 1990 is changed as follows 1 New or changed material is identified by a star 2 Remove and insert pages as indicated below Remove pages Insert pages i through viii i through x 2 3 and 2 4 2 3 and 2 4 2 17 and 2 18 2 17 and 2 18 4 1 through 4 12 4 1 through 4 9 5 through 5 6 5 through 5 6 6 7 through 6 13 6 7 through 6 11 7 7 and 7 8 7 7 and 7 8 8 1 through 8 20 8 1 through 8 13 9 3 and 9 4 9 3 and 9 4 10 1 through 10 12 10 1 through 10 12 1 and 2 1 2 Glossary 5 References 7 3 File this transmittal sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes Post these changes per DA Pamphlet 310 13 By Order of the Secretary of the Army GORDON R SULLIVAN General United States Army Official T Chief of Staff MILTON H HAMILTON Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 05017 DISTRIBUTION Active Army USAR and ARNG To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12 11 E requirements
33. DATE 90630 STORAGE SPACE ES MANAGEMENT REPORT FREQ INSTALL CODE A HGQH NENT A NAME OF INSTALLATION fort Post exchange and supporting storage space Installation civil or post engineer and sup porting storage space Clothing sales stores and supporting storage space Commissary and supporting storage space Bench and backup stocks in shops Transit sheds and open areas at terminals or depots used only for cargo throughput operations Figure 5 14 shows a completed DD Form 805 Check AR 740 1 Chapter 6 for instructions on how to fill out the form for your type of unit CITY NAME STATE COUNTRY Petersburg VA COVERED SPACE OPEN SPACE ITEM of Measure sn Thousands TOTAL Ge fei fei FLM HAZ SHED OTHER IMPROVED UNIMPROVED CHILL MAGAZINE FREEZE GLOO AND 1 fti th SECTION GROSS STORAGE SPACE 34 7s PRIOR 30 JUNE REPORT THIS REPORT UNUSABLE 9 33 3496 1519 7817 3490 eel I STANOBY OUTGRANTEO TO NON DOD USERS 6 OUTGRANTED TO DOO USERS 7 USED FOR STORAGE OPERATION Line 2 Minus Linea J 4 3 and 6 8 AISLES STRUCTURAL LOSS SUPPORT SPACE 817 3490 99 1786 SECTION NET STORAGE 9 TOTAL SQUARE FEED Line 7 Minus Lone 8 718 1704 3697 10 TOTAL CUBIC FEEO 17 ATTAINABLE CUBIC FEED
34. directs There is no standard format for these reports You will need to contact the activity requiring the report to find out what information is needed This report is basically the current record of how much space your unit is assigned and how much space it uses To prepare one of these reports you need to know the types of material your unit stores the types of storage used bin area tank space or ammunition space and the amount of space you are assigned You also may be required to report how many gross and net square feet of storage space you control Most of the data you need to prepare the storage space status report can be taken from storage layouts To save time and effort when you prepare these reports keep the layout and work sheets updated with changes as they occur SPACE RECAPITULATION RECORD TOTAL SQUARE POET 110 nu _ 3 36 ME NUBE kp 7 mies i MEN EE 5 2 2 2 e S 47 0044 500 10 15 SPACE RECAPITULATION RECORD The space recapitulation record is a locally designed form which you use to report your unit s storage space data It lists all storage information including building number section number gross and net square feet type of space type of storage and type of facility You should use this record with the storage space status report to complete DD Form 805 Stor
35. 2820004449618 2821001162213 4718001821419 32180019618 0861 0862 2736002198736 0863 6119001963745 0864 7536002011918 0865 8210001962222 DOCUMENT NUMBER These outstanding material release orders must be processed or accounted for 0006 11260000028 before the inventory nd 00Q 32010001 83 32190001 32200001 DATE TO SHIPPING PICKUP QUANTITY POINT 3EA 4 OCT 83 2 5EA 4 OCT 83 4 83 4 83 4 83 32020001 32190001 21 83 23 83 Figure 10 5 MRO cutoff control register When you and the inventory supervisor get the inventory count cards and the machine listings you will find this number on each card and on each page of the listing You will use this number later when you make stock record adjustments with DA Form 444 Inventory Adjustment Report and DA Form 4697 Department of the Army Report of Survey Figure 10 6 shows entries on a DA Form 272 PREPARING INVENTORY COUNT CARDS When your DSU accountable officer receives the cutoff dates he tells the section or the SCS to make inventory count cards These are preprinted DA Forms 2000 3 for the inventory teams to use to record the supply count during the 10 14 inventory Figure 10 7 shows preprinted machine prepared and manually prepared inventory count cards The SCS will make a card from each item listed on the stock record to be inventoried
36. Are stocks rotated so that the oldest products can be issued first Are stocks with similar filling dates stored together Have all packages which were opened for spot checking been marked to show that they had been opened Are stained cartons marked to indicate that leaking containers have been removed This will prevent reinspection Are drums stacked too high Table 3 7 Serviceability inspection checklist for 5 cans ALLOWABLE CONDITION OF METAL SURFACES EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS DENTS ALLOWED ALLOWED Chime Flange Vent tube Handle assembly Dents be moved if the metal will not be weak ened Contaminants must be removable by cleaning Asphalt tar or similar sub stances cannot be removed Threads must not be crossed stripped rusted or worn Use only in an emer gency if tube is brok en or bent Use only if it can be carried without hurt ing hands Discard if badly smashed or broken No more than six less than 1 2 inch deep Less than 1 2 inch long Rust on outside Must be removable by buffing or sand blasting Rust on inside Must be removable by cleaning with solvent or caustic washing 3 11 FM 10 15 Hoops Side Weld 3 12 Table 3 8 Serviceability inspection checklist for 55 gallon drums EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS DENTS ALLOWED Numerous small dents are accept Condition of paint of no importance Shou
37. Check with the stock records section to see if a computer or accounting error occurred Check the receipt section Sometimes documents are backlogged in the section When this happens a receipt document for the item may have been forwarded to the stock records section before the items were placed in stock Check the quality assurance and technical inspection sections In some cases the missing items may be field turn ins that have been logged in as received but that are being inspected before they are sent to storage 8 13 FM 10 15 lu Perr N TO 815 t 65 IT KNOX KY 49121 puppe Serial numbers of supplies e DATE t added to on x PACKED BY AND DATE UME is D WARFHOUSE LOCATION XYZ Customer s signature showing that serial numbers are correct TEE and that items were recieved n 166 13 TRANSPORTATION CHARGEARLE TO 14 WLAD arra ACTU EA 4 0NATUACIANO DATT 1 RECEIVERS DOCUMENT NUMBER TCNW224BC32959992 3277 976 m OP FORM 1940 8 OP S MAY 4 LEAD WOLE INE ITEM AL FARE RECHT OOCUMENT NTA Beat EAMUS Hed ek CED EE a A WO REQUTET OW 9th MAINT BN 8146865 CO Ft ADAMS AL 99547 FORT KNOX KY 40121 EIE 4171 7 f WM ce em eyed Pr A 41035 Ab Seria
38. 4909 4909 709 000V 0 0 0 0 0 2010N V 9916 1209 60245 00070 O 1 2 6t 6 9199 V 8709 8909 8909 O00vO 0 0 0 ANI 150 dNON Ad ALD ALD ALD ALD ALO NOT is 1591 JNS Hi 1 91S N UN 15 1HOd3H 511 18 12015 v3 v3 v3 v3 v3 v3 v3 v3 v3 v3 QH v3 v3 in VNN31NV VNN3INV VNN3JINV 13595 J U3HSVM Sv HShu8 12 4 4 Id MO813 3uH1 qOU 449018 N3WON 1HOd3H LN3N39 VNVIN PSA H6 96 96 96 96 16 16 H6 H6 16 86 986 16 16 86 28 2 X X X X X x X x x x NN N N N NIWON apoo jauajew jo Aiddns 2 25 epoo syuawaunbes gt Ajnenuass3 23 apoo 238 1011002 DIY apos Did 828914 743 play apoo 112 015 jo uoninquisig 2 epoo 154 2016 275 epoo 172 LWW epoo JW Play 32016 HASGWNAN 2018 p84J9j9J4d 16 Wid 1304334 511 15 72015 3111 130434 21312345 NOWWOD 31114 153931 1712345 XI SSV1O SSVI
39. GROSS SQUARE FEET GROSS SQUARE FEET NET SQUARE FEET NET SQUARE FEET BEFORE AFTER Figure 5 2 Samples of a basic floor plan and a prepared storage layout 5 6 FM 10 15 Table 5 2 Recommended aisle width for MHE TYPE OF MHE RECOMMENDED AISLE WIDTH 2 000 pound capacity forklift truck 3 000 pound capacity forklift truck extensive reach Q00 pov 10 feet O inches 6 000 pound capacity forklift truck 11 feet 6 inches 8 000 pound capacity forklift truck 6 feet O inches narrow aisle Stock selector truck 9 feet 6 inches 7 feet O inches 30 to 36 inches Table shows width for standard 40 load For every 8 inches added to load width add approximately 6 inches to aisle width Aisle width is determined by turning radius required for MHE NOTE Common types of MHE are described and illustrated in Chapter 11 of this FM Table 5 3 Recommended vertical and horizontal clearances for storage areas Vertical and horizontal clearances are normally required in all storage areas because of floor load capacities and fire or safety regulations The following list contains the most common clearances required in storage areas Additional safety clearances are listed in DOD 4145 19 R 1 Chapter 6 VERTICAL CLEARANCES An 18 inch vertical clearance is required between all lighting and heating fixtures and the top of all stacks of nonhazardous supplies In storage areas with sprinkl
40. Section CHAPTER 9 Section I Section II Section III vi Page Selecting Items From Storage Choosing Items for ISSUC scscsssscsssssscscssccsessecssessesesssceesesssssesesesscacensaseceucnessenses 8 5 Sorting Materiel Release Orders by 8 5 Sorting Materiel Release Orders by Storage Location 8 6 Pulling Items From Stock 8800 8 6 Processing Supplies for Issue Processing Materiel Release Orders 2 2222 8 6 Processing DA Form 2765 Materiel Release Order 8 7 Processing DD Form 1348 1 Materiel Release Order 8 7 Processing SARSS Produced Materiel Release Order 8 8 Processing Materiel Release Orders for Sensitive and Pilferable Items csccccsssssssssssecscesssssseccssssssscssscscesessacssaccesencares 8 8 Processing Materiel Release Orders for Partial Issues 8 8 Processing Materiel Release 5 8 11 Processing Materiel Release Denials for Partial Issues DE 8 11 Processing Materiel Release Denials for Complete Denials oe eene rts eser t c b e ie UAE 8 11 Processing Materiel Release Order List Supply Management
41. These teams consist of a counter and a checker or recorder Because wall to wall inventories are so large and must be completed within five working days you may need six or more teams working at the same time Normally they may not be assigned to your storage section If you do not have enough personnel to help with the inventory you can borrow the teams from other supply and local activities such as your DSU 5 5 or the SSSC The teams come under the direct control of the inventory supervisor Stock Control Supervisor The stock control supervisor is one of the most important persons you work with in setting up and conducting the inventory His section is in charge of making all inventory count cards the control listings and any other automated documents you may need Section personnel are also responsible 10 20 for numbering the cards and listings with the inventory voucher numbers and serial numbers needed for control purposes You work closely with the stock control supervisor when you set the cutoff dates and when you verify and post the inventory counts to the stock record He helps you figure and prepare the inventory adjustments and budget information for the accountable officer ISSUING ITEMS DURING THE INVENTORY If at all possible your storage section personnel should not make issues during an inventory since the chance of making errors increases when issues are made while counting is in progress However you mus
42. United States Army AMC Cata log Data Activity commander clothing exchange and bath Code of Federal Regulations changed Central Issue Facility controlled inventory item code can count in care of company Colorado collect on delivery communications zone communications security condition container express continental United States corps support command care of supplies in storage captain cross reference list current combat support combat service support common table of allowances cubic Department of the Army District of Columbia Department of Defense December delivery due in document identifier code Glossary 1 FM 10 15 DISCOM div DLA DLSC dmd DO DOD DODAAC DOL DS DSA DSC 054 DSS DSU dz ea EAC EC EOD EOQ EPA ERPSL estab FAO FARE FC Feb fld FLEX FM frz FSC FSSP ft FT FWT gal GBL GPM GRREG GSU HEMTT Glossary 2 division support command division Defense Logistics Agency Defense Logistics Services Center demand due out Department of Defense DOD activity address code Director of Logistics direct support division support area distribution of stockage code Direct Support Unit Standard Supply System Direct Support System direct support unit dozen each Echelons Above Corps essentiality code explosive ordnance disposal economic order quantity Environmental Protection Agency essential repair part stockage list est
43. genii Mens S Prepare or Update POL Safety Program Control Pilferage and Sabotage eene TECHNICAL SUPPLY OFFICER Review Your Responsibilities and Review Mandatory Parts Lists and Determine Impact OEE ALS i eno aite dien rl d e etn bucina copiis ad qt nM Ta Reo ud Use LIF to Determine Supply Status esee Determine Size of Class ASL Incorporate ASL Change List Recommendations Analyze Impact of PLL Change List on ASL Size and eds eed ec Monitor Demand Satisfaction and Other Supply Indicators C1 FM 10 15 Page iii C1 FM 10 15 PART TWO CHAPTER 5 Section I Section II Section III iv Page Verify Critical Equipment Deadlined Due to Zero Balances 4 2 Monitor Stock Control 22 4 444 000 4 2 Set Up Card File for a Part or Reference Number 4 3 Use of STANAG and QSTAG 4 3 Monitor ADP S ppOit 4 3 Standardize Receipt Storage and Issue Procedures 4 3 Monitor
44. Perform inventory recomputations Resume normal operations Turn in excess according to AR 710 2 NOTE Workdays required will vary according to size of inventory and transaction volume 10 12 DATE STOCK DOCUMENT RECEIVED NUMBER NUMBER 2820002824466 2910001642232 FM 10 15 DATE POSTED TO STOCK QUANTITY RECORD 3 OCT 83 3 OCT 83 These floating reciept documents must be located and posted to stock record cards before LT the inventory 784000926 1492 24 OCT 83 9695000382197 Figure 10 4 Receiving cutoff control register SETTING CUTOFF CONTROLS ON MATERIEL RELEASE ORDERS You and the accountable officer need to decide on a cutoff date for processing MROs They are described and explained in Chapter 8 After this date the stock record section must post only for high priority PDs 01 02 and 03 requisi tions or for nonstocked items You also need to decide if the SCS will use an MRO cutoff control register during the inventory This register helps keep track of all MROs and shows you which ones have been filled There is no set format for the register manual procedures only Figure 10 5 shows a sample MRO register that includes all the information you will need to list If you decide to use a register the stock control supervisor must ensure that personnel number and date all MROs they receive daily Your personnel must list by serial number all MROs sent to the pickup po
45. Report obvious operational deficiencies for cor rective action Material Requiring Special Handling Give careful attention to items subject to rust corrosion fungus or mildew Make a 10 percent check on such material to determine its quality You must open the checked packs If the preser vation is not adequate the item may deteriorate even if the outer packaging is correct Special instructions for inspection and handling of material such as lumber and hazardous materials are in DOD 4145 19 R 1 PROTECTION OF MATERIAL FROM ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE The supply quality control inspection makes biweekly checks of storage buildings holding areas and other facilities to ensure that supplies are protected from the weather rodents and insects At the same time it determines the suitability of each storage site for the items stored there Premium storage space reefers dehumidi fied areas and heated areas is not used for material that does not need such protection Report deficiencies to the storage officer or his alternate PRESERVATION AND PACKAGING The initial care and preservation of material at the source and the supplemental care and prepara tion before storage at the supply unit are followed FM 10 15 by periodic inspections DS units have a fairly quick turnover of supplies This helps to prevent long term deterioration but it does not relieve the supply officer of his responsibility for the con dition o
46. These entries are made by DETER 17 8 y the inventory team the stock control section 28 Pr c8 015 851 t im oe ERTS baler nien orm REE SE EERE TT 16746 COUNT UHMUMNUMEPS n TIHNT YX N N 1 Change number of pallets to number of pieces 2 Change packages per pallet to length in feet 3 Change quantity per package to board feet per length 4 Change total quantity to total quantity in board feet Figure 10 10 Inventory count card relabeled for lumber Palletized stock the supplies to be counted are stored in boxes on pallets the counter calls out the number of pallets the number of packages on each pallet and the number of supplies in each package The recorder writes this information in the correct columns multiplies the figures and writes the total in the Total Quantity column If an inventory team has a preprinted count card with a location listed make sure that the team checks all storage areas for missing supplies before it marks the quantity as zero Figure 10 13 shows a count card prepared for palletized stock Completing the Count After the team writes all the information on the count card both the counter and the recorder should sign and date the card Figure 10 14 shows a completed count card signed by the counter and recorder They must place the card on the location where it can be easily seen Then they go to the
47. Verify that the correct part has been ordered If not have the unit reorder Verify that NMCS request had been received processed and if necessary transmitted to the MMC Have soldiers check the for an inter changeable or substitute item when using manual op erations SARSS automation considers relationships with interchangeable and substitute items Coordinate with your MMC on possible lateral issue Consider cannibalization to obtain the part MONITOR STOCK CONTROL During the initial stages of deployment of a DSU stock control will be decentralized Although the MMC often deploys a small element as early as pos sible there may be only limited capability to manage stocks Fewer than 1 000 lines maybe managed In the future the DSUs that are authorized a dedicated auto mated system will be responsible for routine stock control and stock record accounting The MMC will perform supply and stock control on an exception basis Therefore as the technical supply officer you must be able to check on and edit requests before submitting them to 054 SET UP CARD FILE FOR A PART OR REFERENCE NUMBER Part model and type numbers are listed in alphanu meric order on the MCRL This list on microfiche is updated semiannually It lists all unclassified manu facturers part and reference numbers recorded in the Federal Catalog System and the NSN of each You must maintain a DD Form 1348 6 DOD
48. Your storage activity must mark the appropriate manufacturer control number on vendor owned containers Supported units must turn these con tainers in to your stock control activity when the units are transferred permanently 3 13 FM 10 15 Table 3 9 Bulk petroleum sampling and testing requirements WHEN TO SAMPLE Before filling railcars and tank vehicles Before discharge of railcars or tank vehicles Daily from all working tanks and from railcars and tank vehicles Monthly from all working tanks Overseas areas Every 6 months for aviation gasolines every 12 months for jet fuels automotive gasolines and diesel fuels when fuel is dormant or suspected of being off specification CONUS Every 6 months for aviation gasolines every 12 months for automotive gasolines jetfuels and diesel fuels when fuel is dormant or suspected of being off specification TYPE OF SAMPLE Discharge hose sample Refueler all level sample Collapsible tank bottom drainage outlet Refueler sample Collapsible tank bottom drainage outlet Refueler sample Upper middle and lower level sample Upper middle and lower level sample TYPE OF TEST REQUIRED Visual check for appearance water and sediment Visual check for appearance water and sediment Visual check for appearance water and sediment Aqua Glo test of all aviation fuels Laboratory analysis for water and sediment Aqua Glo test o
49. and maintenance capabili ties Table 4 1 lists criteria used to select the DS repair items which will be issued from your RMA Your tasks are listed below Ensure that unserviceable are job ordered within three workdays of receipt You must send DA Form 5504 Maintenance Request with UND C with the item to maintenance DA Form 5504 replaces DA Form 2407 for those units supported by an automated system Follow the instructions of your automated system as they are printed in facsimile maintenance requests materiel release orders and location tickets Check that there are no excess SIMS X items or ARIs and no excess stock of items with an RC of D H or L each day activity occurs on the line other items will be reviewed for excess on a monthly basis In CONUS there is no retention limit above the RO OCONUS may retain twice the RO Ensure that all excess stocks above the RO and OST are turned in within 10 days after determination that they are excess Review stockage level computations C1 FM 10 15 Table 4 1 DS repair items package criteria Class IV or reparables Automated to repair at DS level Recoverability code must be D L STORE BATTERIES Batteries are perishable items Their storage life will depend on storage practices and the climate Proper storage can extend battery life ensuring that the battery is charged and ready for issue when required Table 4 2
50. as applicable Monitor and compare monthly gains and losses to determine patterns C1 FM 10 15 CHAPTER 4 TECHNICAL SUPPLY OFFICER REVIEW YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES AND CONCERNS In general your responsibilities and concerns will be similar to those of a supply platoon leader You need to review the responsibilities of the supply platoon leader especially in the operation of Class II IV and VII sections However your concerns are multiplied due to the number of repair parts which your 55 must maintain Almost 92 percent of the total Army inven tory consists of repair parts lines Estimates are that each soldier may consume as many as 4 83 pounds of repair parts each day during theater operations in an intense European conflict Even this figure may be too low Older items in the Army s inventory will still need repairs and repair parts must be stocked for newer and more complex items You will be concerned mainly that your Class IX ASL contains enough lines and has enough depth to support the maintenance of critical equipment in supported units during wartime You also will be concerned with filling NMCS and high priority requests for parts to fix critical weapons systems and end items Your SSA must be able to transport these essential repair parts in organic repair parts vans You may be tasked to supervise RM and QSS items X REVIEW MANDATORY PARTS LISTS AND DETERMINE IMPACT ON ASL As the technical supply officer you sh
51. been approved Figure 4 8 lists QSS stockage criteria Screen carefully any candidates for deletions which have a UI other than each The prorated cost of items in the unit pack may be less than the amount specified in DA Pamphlet 710 2 2 Establish an effective date when ASL items are to be converted to QSS or QSS items are to be returned to detailed accounting Do not stock QSS items in other sections 4 8 Submit change cards for automated processing Ensure storage sections have completed rewarehousing using storage item data change cards Check that the ROP quantity has been physically segregated placed in a plastic bag paper bag or small box and that the QSS reorder point card has been attached Monitor the number of QSS lines at zero balance Your objective is to have no more than 10 percent of all OSS lines at zero balance Submit inventory count cards showing new loca tions to the MMC or SCS for processing Distribute quarterly QSS listings to supported units These listings will not be processed during wartime Forward QSS reorder point cards to the MMC or SCS when the ROP has been penetrated NOTE The 054 will recompute the RO and Stockage list code SLC must be except for EC G items see 9 below Unit price must be 10 or less except where the unit of issue contains more than one item How ever the cost of an item in unit of measurement quantity must
52. condition code expiration date and from the receipt document or the item con tainer Use AR 708 1 or the to find the correct SEC and the shelf life code Write U in the block for the physical security classification and O in the block for the shelf life code if none apply Copy the stock location code from the location site Give the completed location placard or loose issue label to storage personnel to place at the location You may also work with other location site forms A label and some of the forms and the ways they are used are listed below See TM 743 200 1 for detailed use of these forms DA Form 3780 DA Form 3780 Pallet Count is put at the end of each pallet row It shows the total number of pallets and the total number of items in that row 6 12 The placard makes taking inventory easier by showing these totals DA Form 3781 DA Form 3781 Check Unit of Issue Notice is used when an item could be issued in the wrong quantity because of an unusual UI An example would be a set of boxes with each as the UI In this case each means the whole set DA Form 3782 DA Form 3782 Suspended Notice is used when an item is suspended and cannot be issued List the reason on the notice DA Form 3783 DA Form 3783 Stock Change and or Physical Security Change Notice shows that an item UI or stock number has been changed It is placed on a storage site to show that the item has more than one location due to
53. delivery is slow erratic and inadequate Air is leaking into the pump or connections Tighten all connections Replace gasket Pump has lost prime or has not been primed Prime pump Clogged line strainer or lines Clean strainer or lines FM 10 15 Table 3 4 Preventive maintenance checks for petroleum tank vehicles ITEM PROCEDURES Auxiliary engine Battery Filter separator Filter separator dump valve or manual water drain valve Fire extinguisher Grounding assembly and nozzle bonding wire Hoses hose reels and nozzles Line strainers Manhole and filler cover assembly Meter instrument panel and pressure gages actions The operating SOP outlines the pro cedures for emergency issues while the inventory is being conducted Normally the inventory is scheduled customers notified and operations discontinued until the inventory is completed SUPERVISE HELICOPTER REFUELING The FARE system was designed to refuel helicopters in forward combat areas FM 10 68 Chapter 4 and FM 10 69 Chapter 5 describe Inspect for leaks and cracks in fuel oil and exhaust lines Check for unusual noises Check the level of oil and fuel Inspect fuel shutoff valve and sediment bow for leaks dirt and damage Inspect for tight connections and corroded terminals Check the electrolyte level Inspect for leaks and damage Check pressure differential each time you
54. follow during short term less than 72 hours and long term outages During deployment and redeployment operations the best backup is other ADPE Identify all outstanding requests and those re quests which must be filled Direct your soldiers to process NMCS requests manually on a postpost basis Have soldiers hold low priority requests until the end of the expected short term outage Determine availability capability and compat ibility of host nation ADPE assets Transfer operations to alternate or replacement ADPE in floats during long term outages STANDARDIZE RECEIPT STORAGE AND ISSUE PROCEDURES Figure 4 4 page 4 4 shows a standard method for issuing items Have your section supervisors prepare pages similar in format to the page shown Such pages can then be used to train new personnel in standard efficient procedures You may use performance mea sures from soldier s manuals and trainer s guides This would serve not only to train storage personnel in standard methods but it would help them to pass their SDT also Emphasize that they should make as few moves as possible Each move increases time and costs Additional handling also increases the chance for damage MONITOR STOCK LOCATIONS AND STORAGE PROCEDURES Incorrect storage locations can cause MRDs and prolong critical equipment deadlines As the technical supply officer you should periodically spot check the locations of 5 to 10 items Figure
55. ing receipts with that NSN Order the stock records section to freeze the stock record This will keep that section from issuing any more for the NSN involved Collect all MROs with that NSN that have not been processed Have your storage personnel check the storage section for mistakes and the missing items Have your personnel check the troubleshooting procedures listed in Table 8 2 to find out why the supplies are not in stock Have your personnel take a physical inventory of the missing item after they have thoroughly researched the MRD Physical inventory procedures are in Chap ter 10 Notify the stock records section personnel that you need to conduct an inventory and tell them the NSN involved You will need to get an inventory voucher number from them before you begin List the inventory voucher number on all adjust ment documents you use to make any changes to the stock records Give this adjustment document to the SCS so it can make all changes necessary C1 FM 10 15 Table 8 2 MRD troubleshooting procedures Search the locations listed on the MRO and all locations as above below and next to them Check the locator deck to see if there are any other locations listed for the items that are not shown on the MRO Examine the history of past location changes and NSN changes for clues to other storage locations Search the entire storage and receiving areas for misplaced items
56. should bring them to you at once You and the stock control supervisor must work together to cancel these old MROs and issue new MROs under the current date After all inventory changes are made the SCS sends the control listing to the depot that supports your DSU Section personnel compare the inventory counts with their stock accounting record totals If they find any major problems personnel at the inventory control point can request a recount of all items in question After the balances are checked the inventory control FM 10 15 point makes a special report on the inventories for all supported GSUs or DSUs This report goes to the major Army commander so that he will know the status of supplies in his command EVALUATING INVENTORY PERFORMANCE You need to set up a checklist of required inventory procedures so that you can tell how well your section personnel performed during the inventory and how well they understand their inventory duties Table 10 9 is a checklist of performance standards for a properly conducted inventory Use it to train your personnel in inventory procedures You can also use it to set up inventory guidelines in your storage section SOP This checklist gives you formulas to use when you figure inventory accuracy You must furnish the accountable officer with these figures for his inventory reports When you make up a checklist be sure to leave room to write comments about some of the problems found during
57. 1 5 __ TOTAL MROS THIS UNIT 8 END PAGE 1 n e Figure 8 21 list after update by storage personnel Table 8 2 MRD troubleshooting procedures Search the locations listed on the MRO and all locations as above below and next to them Check the locator deck to see if there are any other locations listed for item that are not shown on the MRO Examine the history of past location changes and NSN changes for clues to other storage locations Search the entire storage and receiving areas for misplaced items 5 Check with the stock records section to see if a computer or accounting error occurred Check the receipt section Sometimes documents are backlogged in this section When this happens a receipt document for the item may have been forwarded to the stock records section before the items were placed in stock Check the quality assurance and technical inspection sections In some cases the missing items may be field turn ins that have been logged as received but that are being inspected before they are sent to storage 8 20 FM 10 15 CHAPTER 9 ISSUING AND SHIPPING SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT Section I Planning Issue Shipping Activities RESPONSIBILITIES The issue shipping section is an important part of the DSU storage operation Your personnel must c
58. 2510002340481 5310002378633 2530002389139 2530002389139 5305002398038 OPTIONAL 1205 Serviceable count cards produced 40 Unserviceable count cards produced 1245 Total count cards produced 200 Blank count cards produced 1446 Next count card number for voucher number 350 Minimum entries for an automated system Figure 10 9 Inventory supervisor s inventory count card control listing 10 19 FM 10 15 Section IV The Inventory WORKING WITH KEY INVENTORY PERSONNEL You work with many people when you set inventory controls and when you conduct the inventory You need to know the duties of the major inventory personnel They are described in this paragraph Inventory Supervisor The inventory supervisor is assigned to the DSU accountable officer for the entire inventory period He is in charge of the inventory and the inventory count teams The inventory supervisor may not normally be assigned to your DSU However he will be attached to your unit until the inventory count is posted to the stock record It is his job to instruct and train inventory count teams in the correct inventory procedures He is responsible for controlling and checking all inventory count cards and control listings before during and after the inventory to ensure they are complete and without errors You will need to help him with any storage problems or mistakes which the teams find and with any inventory difficulties Inventory Count Teams
59. 3 Receipt 8 1 Bulk storage layout 5 11 Camouflage techniques 5 14 Candidate cancellation cards 1 2 Captured and unwanted material 1 2 Cargo 9 16 CIP chien sere cfe 2 19 CIF property records 2 19 Class I gt oe UI 1 12 Storage etes etie Seeds 2 12 Class II Supply 2 18 Support operations 2 18 Class supply point 3 1 Class IV Supply 2 18 Support operations 2 18 Class Issue controls 2 18 Supply point vdd UVP GS US 2 18 Support operations 2 18 Class ELE A d 4 1 Classified uos t Ae E REOR 5 4 a 2 18 Mat riall 2 16 Clearances Horizontal 0 5 7 Vertical icc oet ee ed dy 5 7 Combat ASL Items aD RH a8 12 1 Location system 12 1 Storage aids ee ER ee 12 1 Compressed gases Handling Dey 3 13 Storagesc eO ORE ERU 3 13 Condition 6 8 Consolidated opera
60. 3 2 6 C MU 90 9 0223 02 03 2 05 9 00 123 9092 99 93 2 9 90 929 9 9209 0 aie s s tiui aia as andar oa anisa p salaa sa nad oa nale nuhi nin n BAG Figure 7 8 DSS air in transit data card DIC TK6 7 9 FM 10 15 Materiel Receipt Card These are computer printed cards that carry the same ordering information as the DD Form 1348 1 receipt document These cards like the in transit data cards have a special DIC in the top left corner materiel receipt card has a DIC of 069 Therefore they are sometimes called 065 cards Your soldiers need to know how to process these cards so that the necessary information can be sent back to the Defense Automatic Addressing System Each 065 card shows the quantity of supplies that was shipped If the container is damaged or if some of the items are missing your receiving and storage personnel must conduct an inventory They must report all damages and shortages Follow the guidelines given in AR 735 5 Notify the SCS of any mistakes so that a new 065 card with the correct quantities can be made If your unit does not work under an automated system send a list of all the infor mation to be entered on each 065 card to the data processing center that supports your unit The center will keypunch this information onto the D6S card and return
61. 32 rows and 32 columns divide the storage area into two separate sections and label them separately If there are more than 32 rows and less than 32 columns use two letters or numbers for example AA or 11 to label the rows Do this only if there is just one compartment or section in each level to label as in bulk storage there 32 or less rows and more than 32 columns or stacks use two letters or numbers to label them Do this only if you have just one compartment or section in each level Step 8 You have now given a stock location code to every storage space shown on your planograph The stock location code should look like this KHE36 This number will help you find the location of an item by reading the special address code Figure 6 5 shows a sample five character location code The following steps show how a location code is assigned The first letter or number is the area building van tent or open storage space where the item is stored O The second letter or number is the row of storage aids or the aisle between two rows of storage aids where the item is kept O The third letter or number is the column in the row where an item is stored The fourth letter or number is the level of the storage column where the item is stored The fifth letter or number is the compart ment or section of the level where the item is stored The system you have just used to give every storage space a s
62. 4 5 page 4 5 shows how the five character stock locator code can be used to locate an item in a repair parts van Most repair parts will be stored in bins and on shelves in a warehouse or in bins which are truck or van mounted See Figure 4 6 page 4 6 for some basic guidelines for bin and shelf storage Items stored in bins must be truck or van mounted according to policies in AR 710 2 For more information on stock locator codes and bin storage see DOD 4145 19 R 1 and Chapter 5 of this manual C1 FM 10 15 ISSUE METHOD DESCRIPTION Select Bin Material Warehouse Bin Area Stock Picker s Cart and Conveyor Line Hand Pick from Bin Opening Procedures 1 Documents a Stock picker proceeds to document pick up point and obtains sorted issue documents Issue documents have been sorted into proper picking sequence If any documents are found to be out of sequence sort and place into proper picking sequence 2 Prepare for issue operation a Receive instructions as required b Travel to designated locations and obtains stock pickers cart sufficient bags and or tote pans as required C Push stock pickers cart to location of first item to be selected 3 Perform selection operation a Check and select the quantity ordered on the MRO s from the designated location b Annotate the issue document Attach or place the annotated document with the selected material Move to next locations with cart and repe
63. 5 COUNTER AND DATE c825c92c8 2c02c0 5c8 0 NUMBER PACKAGES QUANTITY OF PER TOTAL QUANTITY 1 1 PALLETS PACKAGE ers es ogee Lg eee Ugo 4 15 AR 711 16 102202272 x 2261252 RECORDER AND DATE IX 35032 3 lt 42 lt 4204204204 4 3 INSTALLATION INVENTORY COUNT CARD ACCEPTED RECOUNT SUSPEND C 2c 275 52087 5 o soreo ECORDEO BALANCE PRICE QUANTITY 19 12 71157272 QVER of polci ipi bl 89085 QVER 9209 222 9 22929 T E LOCATION rra os PT 16745 QUANTITY 4 9 v1 RS 6 12 0 44 0 06 0 M 90122 4009 08089 Figure 10 12 Count card for packaged stock 10 24 DA FORM 2000 3 1 OCT 63 FM 10 15 PALLETS PACKAGES QUANTITY PER PER PALLET PACKAGE B COUNTER DATE TOTAL QUANTITY lt CIDCIDCIDCIDCIDCIDT 12 1D c22c22c22c22c12c2562 s 4 RECOROER AND DATE 1 2 14 ACCEPTED RECOUNT SUSPEND C325c32c3 25cC32C3 2c3273 c3 2 lt 4204204204264 2642642042 gt 2 2 2 52 52252 02 INVENTORY COUNT CARO IECORDED SALANCE mr PRICE dC 6266258208 208
64. 6 Documents DSS shipments 7 8 DSS ALOC shipments 7 8 cocer DEI E NIE E eons 7 9 9 11 DGS eard 7 8 084 Catalog update process 4 6 Inventory listings 2 11 DSS Shipments 7 6 7 7 Systems 7 6 058 ALOC Shipments 7 6 SYSLOIS 4 opos 7 6 D nnb age oos era 2 13 Dust respirators 2 23 Index 2 Emergency issues 3 5 Environmental pollution 3 8 Equipment maintenance records 2 6 Excess report 1156 1 2 Excess stocks 1 2 External sling loads 2 16 eee 3 7 FARE system 3 5 Field 1 2 Field storage layout 5 13 Field supply and storage point 5 14 Forklift handling 2 5 Frustrated shipments 2 3 Graves registration operations 2 23 Gross storage space 5 17 Hazardous material 5 8 Helicopter refueling 3 5 Horizontal clearances
65. After all the cards are turned in the survey supervisor checks the cards to see that they are filled out correctly He then sends them to the locator section The locator clerk puts the cards in the same location order as the active locator file He compares them to see if any locations are missing or if there are differences in entries such as nomenclature NSN or condition code If there are differences between the cards and the locator file the locator clerk must notify the storage supervisor of the problems The supervisor sends a survey team to the location to check the card to see if any of the information was copied wrong If no mistakes were made the storage supervisor must have storage personnel make the necessary corrections to the locator deck so the data on the deck will match those given on the stock location survey cards Chapter 6 explains how to make location additions deletions and changes The storage supervisor must also have storage personnel correct any problems found during the location survey such as mixed stock unidentified stock open containers and items in more than one location After checking all cards and correcting all problems the survey supervisor will send the stock location cards through the storage supervisor to the SCS The SCS will make the necessary additions deletions and changes to the stock records and return the cards to the storage supervisor The storage super visor should file the survey
66. DSU operates in a field environ ment you must work with the accountable officer or supply platoon leader to set up the supply point You will help choose the best places to store each class of supply You must have room at the supply point for all supply sections and activities For example you will have to stock hundreds or even SIDE SIDE TOP VIEW ENTRANCE FM 10 15 thousands of items to meet the needs of the units you support Your DSU will be handling clothing canteens lumber barbed wire generators vehicles and hundreds of other kinds of supplies and equipment As storage supervisor you have to provide storage areas for them Before the supply soldiers set up the new supply point you and the supply platoon leader should make a layout plan To do this make a sketch of the area and then draw your layout onto the sketch You should be able to pick out general locations for each section by looking at the drawing Remember to show the direction of the traffic flow and the locations of parking areas for customer units Figure 5 9 shows how a field supply and storage point layout looks for Classes IV and After the supply platoon leader approves your layout make sure your soldiers set up the sections correctly Put soldiers at the entrance and exit areas to control the flow of traffic If you can setup a parking area EXTENOEO BIN FIXED INSIDE VAN PILFERABLE ITEMS FAST MOVING I
67. EDITION OF 1 MAY USED UNTIL EXHAUETEO 14 W LADING AWB OR RECEIVER S BHGNATURE LAND DATEL PROJECT pend Tei 1 TOTAL WEIGHT RECEIVED BY AND DATE INSPECTED BY ANO DATE PACKED BY AND DATE TOTAL CUBE WAREHOUSED BY AND DATE WAREHOUSE LOCATION DISPOSAL 8 RELEASE ORDER 15 RECEIVERS DOCUMENT NUMBER 000 SINGLE LINE ITEM RELKASE RECEIPT DOCUMENT Figure 9 7 DD Form 1348 1 completed as a disposal release denial PACKING THE SUPPLIES Your issue shipping section is responsible for packing marking and loading the supplies to be shipped When the supplies arrive from the warehouse have personnel move them to a central area where they can prepare and combine them before they are crated As storage supervisor you must set up controls to keep your personnel from doing any unnecessary preservation packaging or packing They should try to consolidate ship ments to save packing material and to reduce shipping costs Combining shipments will also help protect the supplies However do not combine shipments that have high priorities or short due dates unless you can ensure that the supplies will arrive before the closest required delivery date To 9 10 further reduce costs your personnel should use reusable shipping containers if possible Refer to TM 38 230 2 for guidance in selecting the appro priate packing container As storage supervisor you will need to make arrangements w
68. Hit _________ M oe se ee fo ae 1 37 1 re ane NUn1 VO BOs 159034 z x gp ee m om eelam _ amt aim o P a PERE ost sofa _______ pur E LI ss i np BTE e Seien an EG accoun MUT Wr ufu 3093 005 701 MY Figure 8 5 MROs corrected to show partial issue of requested 8 10 PROCESSING MATERIEL RELEASE DENIALS An MRD also known as a warehouse denial is a written notice your storage section makes when all or part of the requested supplies is not on hand This notice goes to the issue section and SCS You need to make sure your personnel are careful when they check for the supplies When they issue an MRD they are signifying that the supplies listed on the stock record account as being in storage are not on hand Sometimes your personnel might issue an MRD by mistake when there are supplies on hand Some of the causes for these mistakes are listed in Figure 8 6 Your personnel must check for these before they make an MRD PROCESSING MATERIEL RELEASE DENIALS FOR PARTIAL ISSUES When only part of the supplies is available for is
69. MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS AMDF Army Master Data File C RL Consolidated Master Cross Reference List CDA Pamphlet 18 1 Code Reference Guide for the ARMS Monthly AMDF Above publications available from Chief US Army Materiel Command Catalog Data Activity ATTN AMXCA BTM New Cumberland Army Depot New Cumberland PA 17070 5010 CFR 40 Protection of Environment Code of Federal Regulation available from Superintendent of Documents US Government Printing Office Washington DC 20402 SOLDIER TRAINING PUBLICATION 10 76V24 SM TG Soldiers Manual Skill Levels 2 3 4 and Trainers Guide MOS 76V Materiel Storage and Handling Specialist STANDARD FORMS 344 Multiuse Standard Requisitioning Issue System Document 361 Transportation Discrepancy Report 364 Report of Discrepancy ROD SUPPLY BULLETINS 11 30 FSC Class 6135 Primary Battery Management Data 740 series Storage of Supplies and Equipment TECHNICAL BULLETINS 55 46 1 Standard Characteristics Dimensions Weight and Cube for Transportability of Military Vehicles and Other Outsize Overweight Equipment In TOE Line Item Number Sequence 55 46 2 Standard Transportability Characteristics Dimensions Weight and Cube for Military Vehicles Equipment In NSN Sequence 380 41 Procedures for Safeguarding Accounting and Supply Control of COMSEC Material References 5 FM 10 15 MED 576 Occupational and Environmental Health Sanitary Control and Surveillance
70. PLATOON LEADER Review Your Responsibilities scscscsssssscscssssessssscsesesssesssessscsrsesesesessseseessesessces 2 1 Improve Customer Support csssssssssssssssssccsssssscecsessssssecsccesessasesescacerstesssassosesesens 2 1 Monitor Materiel Release Denials 2 2 1 Monitor Receipt Operations ssssssssssesecsssesessssosssssssssscsesesecesecsssesssacacaesesersvscessens 2 2 Supervise tiis eda eel 2 2 4 Review Reports of Discrepancies 0 000 0 2 4 Review Storage Layout Plans and Use DOR A 2 4 Monitor Storage Operations ssssssssssssssssesscccsorssscesssssessssecsccasscseasecessesssssscesavecees 2 6 Maintain Security of Pilferable Tools scscsssssscsssssssssssescsosesscsssececesseseceserscseceees 2 6 Safeguard Classified and Sensitive Material cessere 2 8 Perform Storage Checks and Inspections 70 09 2 8 Spot Check Stock Locations eee eene teta tata tata tn 2 8 Monitor Location Surveys ccssssssssssosssessssssssscscssssssesarssessosssseseasssssacsssussesvevevesees 2 8 Coordinate Inventories a aac iV te pone a Ru 2 11 Compute Location Accuracy and Inventory Accuracy
71. Report of Class I Supplies COORDINATE CLASS II IV AND VII OPERATIONS Requests for Class IL IV and VII items first come into your office Your materiel control and accounting specialists post the requests to stock accounting records transmit the requests to the MMC or SCS and process the MROs Your tasks are listed below Prepare support plans and schedules to regulate incoming and outgoing supplies Ensure your soldiers review all requisitions for old document dates and questionable prices and quantities Review critical supply directives Ensure that your office personnel check lists of regulated or command controlled items for costly scarce or critical Class IV and VII items The command that made up the command controlled lists must approve the release before your office personnel can approve the request and the MMC can process an MRO Review proposed command controlled items lists for repair parts required to maintain Class VII items so they are ready for issue to include in storage maintenance services Review all postpost request fills or delegate this task MONITOR BULK FUEL OPERATIONS Supported units send their daily forecasts for bulk petroleum to your office Your soldiers total FM10 15 the amounts required daily They notify the MMC or SCS of bulk fuel requirements and of total fuel received issued and OH in Class III supply points Your tasks are listed below Make sure all pet
72. Single Line Item Requisition System Document Manual Long Form when the manufacturers part numbers have more than 15 digits Automated systems cannot accept such numbers Also have soldiers set up a card file of non NSN items requested by supported units This will reduce time needed to search the MCRL USE OF STANAG AND QSTAG AGREEMENTS The United States Federal Supply Classification System STANAG 3150 and QSTAG 680 was adopted as the NATO Supply Classification System The NATO Supply Classification System and the NATO Item Identification System STANAG 3151 and 5 642 form basis for the NATO Codifica tion of Equipment System Procedures for the NATO Codification of Equipment System are published in the NATO Manual for Codification The United States Federal System of Item Identification is explained in DOD 4130 2 M MONITOR ADP SUPPORT Sustained Class IX supply depends on ADPE sup port This support includes a solid backup and a Continuity of Operations Plan The COOP is a formal agreement between two facilities to use computer hardware This plan ensures support provided to an organization is consistent with mission requirements while under emergency conditions Keep in mind that backups must be in compatible formats For more details on a COOP see AR 380 19 Your tasks are listed below Incorporate backup automated procedures in your SOP Refer to TM 38 L32 13 for DS4 procedures to C1 FM 10 15
73. These units request services through your office If necessary you coordinate with them to ensure that they provide you any needed manpower tentage space or water You must maintain account ability for the float stock of clothing that is exchanged on a one for one basis for dirty BDUs 1 13 FM 10 15 CHAPTER 2 SUPPLY PLATOON LEADER REVIEW YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES As the supply platoon leader you are respon sible for ensuring that supported units receive supplies on time in the quantity requested and in good condition This chapter lists specific tasks and responsibilities You may have to supervise direct and coordinate the receipt storage and issue operations of a Class I section a water section or Class II IV and VII sections Pay particular attention to the tables which list causes for MRDs and which suggest ways to correct storage problems so that there is less delay in supply fill Your platoon may also have to operate a map point a salvage collection point and an SSSC or a CIF in peacetime Upon augmen tation your platoon may also provide such ser vices as rigging supplies for air delivery and graves registration This chapter includes CEB laundry and renovation which may be elimi nated as a result of the new AOE concept IMPROVE CUSTOMER SUPPORT 5545 may process from 5 000 to 9 000 demands per month for ASL items and 1 000 demands for nonstocked items As the supply platoon leader you will be co
74. Your tasks are listed below Have personnel review requests for excessive quantities questionable prices and old document dates Review supporting document files for reasons for rejections from higher supply sources Make it SOP that personnel classify work by priority of request Ensure that your office personnel com paring requests against the ASL SSSC RX OSS and controlled item listings Monitor MRO processing times see Table 1 2 Review reasons for MRDs Ensure that inventory count cards controlled e Ensure that stock location data are kept current FM 10 15 Table 1 2 MRO processing times PDs 01 through 03 and NMCS PDs 04 through 15 NMCS items Based on a 24 hour day 7 day workweek Del Date block for these items SCHEDULE ADP RUNS You need to schedule ADP runs to provide timely supply and services to supported units Table 1 3 lists various ADP runs and gives their frequencies Your tasks are listed below Identify daily weekly monthly semiannual and annual program runs Identify cyclic and as required runs TM 38 132 13 describes daily cyclic and periodic processes under 154 Analyze the interrelationships between required program runs NOTE Request and issue documents should be entered into the system before supply status documents Cancellations should be processed before follow up documents Schedule those s
75. a clas sified operation AR 380 5 describes how to prepare classified map requisitions Setup a lock and key control system Monitor the system regularly Require frequent inventories Reduce in transit exposure Load vehicles in secure areas Distribute from secure areas Apply stringent escort or visual controls during preshipment processing and movement ESTABLISH A SALVAGE COLLECTION POINT Recovery and evacuation operations can reclaim military equipment for reuse and they may aid our intelligence efforts You may be tasked to set up a salvage collection point to receive identify classify and process serviceable unserviceable abandoned captured and scrap items When the tactical situation permits the owning or finding unit is responsible for recovering the items and evacuating them to the collection point In NBC environment the owning unit must first decontaminate the items or arrange for them to be decontaminated prior to sending them to your collection point Your tasks are listed below Ensure that collection point soldiers have a list of critically needed items and components that can be taken from the end item They should screen all items to determine if they are on either list Report all materiel to the MMC for dis position instructions Send reparable items to supporting main tenance units Table 2 d lists RCs and related disposition actions Send serviceable clothing and canv
76. a computer failure Figure 1 3 shows a sample report More information on this report is in TM 38 L32 13 Your tasks are listed below e Monitor increases and decreases in total lines and total dollar values Note ASL items with no location e Note date of last inventory Note ASL lines with zero balance and DOs Note ASL lines with DOs and no Note ASL lines with SLC other than Z and RO quantity of zero e Investigate causes of conditions listed above and mark necessary corrections 1 5 FM 10 15 1 6 Table 1 4 ADP security list CAUTION Do not use this list as a sole basis for determining your security needs Use it to assess current ADP systems security ACCESS CONTROL Do you have a photo badge system for positive identification of personnel 5 access restricted to selected personnel Have you established visitor control and escort procedures Are keys and locks changed at regular intervals or after dismissal service separation of personnel EQUIPMENT USE AND AUDIT CONTROLS Do you have backup equipment available or access to other ADPE Do you spot check output listings for possible misuse of the system Has equipment been tested for emanations Are computer use and production controls employed ELECTRICITY Do you have backup generators Has backup power been tested at regular intervals REMOTE TERMINAL SECURITY CHECKS Do you employ keywords or passwords to identify
77. a specific terminal or user NOTE Change file or systems passwords at a minimum on reassignment or separation of any persons having knowledge of the password when the password is known to have been compromised or annually Doyou employ software scrambling techniques or hardware cryptographic devices during transmission of vitai data SOFTWARE SECURITY Have you provided backup files at a secondary location Doyou have contingency plan covering destruction of classified material in the event of evacuation Do you perform periodic checks on access codes Are the retention cycles for data files reviewed regularly Are program changes controlled and recorded Do you store files in fire resistant containers THREAT MONITORING Do you maintain a monitor log of those who have access to data banks or sensitive files Do you use software security routines to monitor access to sensitive files or data records Do the routines provide a printout record at the end of the day of all illegal access attempts pequosag v pex2ois s uoi NSA 8219 LINN epoo euiS 254 ANI ISV131VO 1 u 152 Jg v 3120 1SV131VO 151 2016 aeg 9NHO 21S 31VG auin Buiddius pue 9901105 aui Burddrus 1 0 150
78. assigned to them have been checked thoroughly To make the MRD storage personnel should do the following Line out the DIC A5_ the DA Form 2765 or the DD Form 1348 1 MRO Write in the A6_ code for an MRD AR 725 50 lists and explains the MRD codes Send the MRD through the storage sect ion s chain of command The storage supervisor will send the MRD to the SCS so that the missing supplies can be ordered Special inventory required Delay or failure in supply fill Additional manpower or paper work requirements Materiel release denial Figure 8 6 Extract from DOD 4145 19 R 1 showing shortcoming in quantity record 8 11 C1 FM 10 15 PROCESSING MATERIEL RELEASE ORDER LIST SUPPLY MANAGEMENT REPORT As storage supervisor you may have to check and update the MRO list The storage activity uses the list to verify MROs Storage activity personnel use the list to show the quantity date pulled and the person who pulled the item They also annotate the list to indicate denials for full or partial quantity The storage activity manager returns one annotated copy of the list to the MMC and 5 5 and retains his copy for one year PROCESSING MROS FOR PARTIAL ISSUE OR DENIALS IN SARSS When only part or none of the supplies requested are on hand or available for issue your personnel must change SARSS produced MROs to MRDs To change an MRO to an MRD You must take the following steps
79. block for the shelf life code if none apply Copy the stock location code from the location site Give the completed location placard or loose issue label to storage personnel to place at the location You may also work with other location forms A label and some of the forms and the ways they are used are listed below See TM 743 200 1 for details on their use DA Form 3780 DA Form 3780 Pallet Count is put at the end of each pallet row It shows the total number of pallets 6 10 and the total number of items in that row The placard makes taking inventory easier by showing these totals DA Form 3781 DA Form 3781 Check Unit of Issue Notice is used when an item could be issued in the wrong quantity because of an unusual UI DA Form 3782 DA Form 3782 Suspended Notice is used when an item is suspended and cannot be issued List the reason on the notice DA Form 3783 DA Form 3783 Stock Change and or Physical Security Change Notice shows that an item UI or stock number has been changed It is placed on a storage site to show that the item has more than one location due to the change If you use this card you do not have to move all items to one location You can issue from two locations until the quantity is low and the items can be combined in one location DA Label 141 DA Label 141 Open Box is placed on open boxes in the loose issue or bulk sections It points out which box is open so that you issue from it Y
80. c 10 10 10 700 4 m lt 00 o 000 o0 vio 99 86 c60 86 180 180 56 66666 66 66666 960 66 66666 n S LINN 4 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 5 3 SEO S 3 S 3 3 S d Amuenb jurod 303 NIN uonisinbes unuitulw jaaaj AJI JVS sapsoay ALO dOH Ainuenb aanoalqo Buiuonisinbeg ALO Ayquenb jno ang AIO OQ Amuenb ur ang ALD 1 AIO HO epoo 101 NOT 91 gt uonipuo anssi jo wun IN 99 9 6509 1608 O O 9 v l 991 91 421 01 zz 6 01 cc l 6 V 6915 0609 E207 01 ZZ 9 vt ES V 1916 8916 1601 OL zz 6 2 vi 8 11310 6919 2 0 0 Ot BHI ZZL O 0 OSL V 9915 6024 1608 000 0 0 S 81 544 v 897179 9916 1109 202 O Z ZL 64 0 55958 991 9709 l 13959 V 9916 9709 1608 000 o tz v l 0 0916 0915 09 5 000v 0 0 0 2010ON V 0016 0018 0019 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 3010N V 9916 0509 657 000 0 0 04 4 4 163429 V 6 76 SLES 67 000 O OZ 05 101 61 1400 V Lv09 4909 709 0007 O 0 O 0 V 9916 2825 0609 0009 62 Vv Sb 90 198022
81. civiiian sources DA Form 2407 Your DSU may sometimes receive homemade or fabricated items from a maintenance support activity If this happens check to see if there is a copy of DA Form 2407 Maintenance Request 7 1 FM 10 15 7 2 6 l wes mave OT PIKE DAYTON 4544 VOGA NON 4 8593 M entm To FREIGHT RATE e pe zin eo R76 88 130 13398 g55 BATA Yu Y FREIGHT CLASSIFICATION NOMENCLATURE SELECT O gv AND GATE 1 SC BY AND DATE v ITEM NOMENCLATURE x SHAFT DROOP COMPENSAT Or TOTAL RECEIVED AND 04 CMT AMAA TOTAL WAR SSQUECED AY AND DATE 25 DATE SHIPPED 6 27 Figure 7 2 DD orm 1848 1 completed as a receipt document HO PISI 404 1938036 INR 74 SAMMU AWE Coi a CXCYER TUAE ANO 15 RECEIVERS COCUMCNT NUMAEA TCNW34AF 661219991900 PORTION OF Y MAY 14 impo mme DOO bata LINE LL ABURICHPT BOUT 1 PROC INSTRUMENT IDEN CONTRACT MATERIAL INSPECTION AND RECEIVING REPORT 3 DATE SHIPPED 4 Wt 30 Mar 83 9 CONTRACTOR Johnsons Chemical Company Distribut on an
82. coordinating and controlling supply support and field services It highlights DA requirements and provides time and personnel planning factors on which to base supervisory logistics decisions This manual will be more useful to you if you adapt the information in it to your duty position and local policies and procedures The task checklists are in chronological or logical sequence You may find it helpful to enter a number in the task box to identify the priority you or higher headquarters places on that task Also you may want to darken those boxes next to the tasks performed by the materiel management center or those assigned to your section chiefs or platoon sergeant Appendix has a hotline of logistical agencies and activities RECOMMENDED CHANGES The proponent for this publication is HO TRADOC Submit changes for improving this publication on DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms Key your comments to the page paragraph and line of the text in which the change is recommended Provide reasons for each comment to ensure understanding and complete evaluation Forward the DA Form 2028 to Commander US Army Quartermaster Center and School ATTN ATSM SPT I Fort Lee Virginia 23801 5036 Unless otherwise stated whenever the masculine gender is used both men and women are included FM 10 15 PART ONE SUPPLY OFFICERS AND LEADERS CHAPTER 1 Supply Operations Officer DETERMINE YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES
83. duties are much the same Your tasks are listed below Conduct a reconnaissance of sites proposed by higher HQ Site selection may be constrained by local host nation policy Recommend point location Table 3 2 lists recommended distances between FSSP components FM 10 69 Chapter 11 describes required terrain features Request engineer support to prepare the site Depending upon the situation and availability of equipment your unit may be required to perform this task Review the flow of product and vehicles through the supply point Ensure a one way traffic plan is maintained Determine if you can safely cut out some steps or combine some of them NOTE The FSSP can handle two of fuel when properly divided and manifolded SUPERVISE BULK PETROLEUM RECEIPT AND DISTRIBUTION Bulk petroleum accounts for over half the total tonnage moving into theaters of operations To supervise receipt and distribution operations at Class III supply points refer to FM 10 69 Chapter 13 Your tasks are listed below Notify section chiefs of tank vehicle arrival times Prepare delivery and distribution schedules to avoid delays Vehicle backup increases the danger of being a target Ensure that soldiers use DA Form 3857 Comm ercial Deliveries of Bulk Petroleum Products Checklist to receive petroleum from commercial sources Total the quantity received data listed on DA Form 3643 Daily Issues of Petroleu
84. he needs to compare his records with the records of the finance and accounting office during the annual audit PREPARATION You and your personnel must ensure all inventories are thorough and conducted step by step Keep in mind that your total inventory period must not exceed five workdays This does not include the time that you and your personnel spend getting ready for the inventory or taking corrective actions after the inventory As storage supervisor you must publish an annual inven tory schedule Be sure to show the date of each inventory and list the types of items to be inventoried Distribute these schedules to all of your customer units Table 10 3 lists inventory frequencies Before you can decide what type of inventory to conduct you need to know the number of transactions your DSU processes quantity of items your DSU stores kinds of supplies your DSU stores and the mission of your DSU You also need to know what coordination with other sections you will need before you begin the inventory The three basic types of inventories at the DSU level are described below Scheduled Wall to Wall Inventory In this type of inventory you count all items in the entire storage section as of a certain date During the inventory you will not process receipts and you will not issue stockage items unless they have PDs 01 02 or 03 or are NMCS transactions You can continue to process and issue nonstocked items not listed in y
85. is no input to 054 as a result of the change deletes Figures 6 13 and 6 14 location maintenance process The operator also has E Cap PP oe LESSE TI mug mare oe Figure 6 11 DA Form 2765 completed a new location card Figure 6 12 DA Form 2765 completed as a location change card C1 FM 10 15 MAKING LOCATION SITE FORMS As storage supervisor you must be able to show your soldiers how to make location placards for new bulk supplies and how to replace location placards that are missing at the location site You must also be able to show them how to make loose issue labels for new bin supplies or make labels to replace those missing from storage bins Loose issue labels are sometimes called bin tags or bin labels Use DA Form 3779 Location Placard and DA Form 3778 Loose Issue Label to make these location markers Make out the location form when you receive the item Take it with the item when you put it into storage This will help you avoid making more than one trip to anew location Figure 6 15 shows how to fill out DA Forms 3778 and 3779 using data from the receipt document To com plete these location markers copy the item s stock number condition code expiration date and UI from the receipt document or the item container Use AR 708 1 or the AMDF to find the correct SEC and the shelf life code Write U in the block for the physical security classification and Q in the
86. is sent to the SCS The note should state what kind of data card TK4 TK6 or TK9 is missing so that the SCS can make a new one Check the top of the TCMD to find out what kind of card is missing The words SURFACE or AIR should be printed on the form on oversea shipments If the word listed is SURFACE a TK9 card is missing If the word AIR is listed a TK6 card is missing All shipments within the US have TK4 cards only CC 69 72 JULIAN DATE RECEIVED AT APOD Dep u api wo w nTaIp d IEE OLL Th i BRCIRETSCRE 8 Cre E 133 sree honorary ry 9 0 9 5 n Hn x alee aan salia ala tafs a CC 1 3 DOCUMENT 23 29 PALLET CC 30 46 FOR PALLET CC 77 80 JULIAN INDENTIFIER CODE 6 1 SERIAL NUMBER OR OTHER AIR SHIPMENT DATE RECEIVED AT SSA 2 22 2222122 2 2 2 2212 2212 222 22272 2212 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 212 2 2122212 2 5920 25 3331333 33313133333333333333333333133333333313133313333333 444444444 4444444444 4444444444 44 4444 4 444 44 444 444 44 4 55 5555 5 555 555 555 5 555 55 55 5 5 55 55555551555 5 55 5 5 55 5 owm 60818881668 80988669666 6 666 6 GEO GL TPIT TIT EEE nmn e ram 8
87. it to the SCS Under some systems the materiel receipt card may be coded DWA instead of D6S Follow the guidelines below and process the DWA card the same way as you would a D6S card Figure 7 9 shows how a D6S card can be made from the information on a receipt document If no D6S card was received with the materiel and the DSU is operating under 055 procedures enter No 065 in block AA of the DD Form 1348 1 Verify the entries on the DD Form 1348 1 If there is a change in the primary storage location or a new location is established no location previously assigned for the stock number enter Loc Chgd or New Loc in block AA of the form and the prime location code in the Supplementary Address field Also mark the warehouse locator file to show the new prime location Send an annotated copy of the DD Form 1348 1 to the SCS If there is no documentation with the materiel but the receipt can be identified as a receipt against an established due in prepare a materiel receipt card DIC 065 on DA Form 2765 with all available information Include at least the stock number UI quantity received document number assigned storage location DSU code and condition code NON DSS SHIPMENTS As storage supervisor you are also responsible for setting up procedures for processing non DSS 7 10 shipments Your soldiers will be handling supplies such as local purchases fabricated items and supplies from overseas reserve stocks and other DSU
88. item is to be ordered or issued at a time Before your personnel can issue these special items the installation commander must authorize the use of the form Use DA Form 3161 to order and issue or more line items of supplies normally provided by SSSC This is authorized only when no SSSC is available Five or more line items of packaged Class III items Expendable medical items within medical facility or for issue to satellites ISSUING SUPPLIES As storage supervisor you must make sure your personnel issue the correct supplies on time and in good condition Under your direction the chief of the issue shipping section is responsible for seeing that these actions are carried out Steps personnel must follow in issuing supplies are described below Check to see if the supplies have the correct documents with them and that the documents are filled out correctly Check the documents for NSN nomen clature and quantity Make sure you are issuing the correct item in the correct amount Report any errors found in the supplies or on the issue documents to the chief of the issue shipping section If you find errors in the supplies move the supplies to a temporary holding area so personnel will not issue them by mistake Make all corrections while the supplies are in this holding area 9 2 Place the supplies to be issued in the correct customer bin at the pickup point Make sure that the DODAAC on
89. item to the correct unit OVERAGES OR SHORTAGES AND DAMAGED ITEMS The type of problems your personnel find when they unload and inspect materiel determines the kind of report they must send to the SCS They will not have to decide who pays for the damages when they make the report They will list only the damages and other related data Transportation personnel usually decide who is responsible for the cost of the damages Photographs of the damages are very helpful when details of the problem cannot be explained easily These photos can also be used to document claims Supply Discrepancies AR 735 5 establishes the policies and procedures prescribing the methods and conditions under which supply type packaging and parcel post shipment discrepancies are reported Supply type or packaging discrepancies which are the respon sibility of the shipper are reported on SF 364 The purpose of the SF 364 is to determine the cause of the discrepancies have them corrected and prevent recurrence Transportation Discrepancies AR 55 38 provides procedures for reporting various transportation discrepancies SF 361 Transportation Discrepancy Report is the form used Do not prepare an SF 361 until shipment status has been received Each consignee is respon sible for preparing his reports on multistop shipments Reimbursement AR 37 111 Chapter 3 provides instructions governing allowance of credits for the return of any stock fund mater
90. number to agree with locator card Same as above Verify with AMDF If stock record card is correct change locator card bin tag and material If stock record card is not correct change stock record card Same as above Same as above Verify with AMDF 1f stock number is changed correct locator card bin tag and material then match to stock record card If stock number is valid and no match to stock record card prepare new stock record card Section III Preinventory Procedures SETTING UP CONTROLS The actions you must take before the inventory begins are as important as the counting of supplies You must work with the other section chiefs to setup reasonable cutoff dates On these dates you must stop 10 10 all incoming receipt documents and related actions so the inventory records can be caught up to a specified date You decide on a specific beginning date for the inventory and a date for reconciling balances It is a good idea to know these dates at least 30 days before the inventory cutoff time so you can notify all sup potted units that will be affected by the inventory Table 10 7 shows all the actions you will need to coordinate when you plan an inventory You can use this as a checklist SETTING CUTOFF CONTROLS ON RECEIPTS You will need to work with the accountable officer and the stock control shipping storage and receipt section chiefs to decide on a cutoff date for receipts You must decide if
91. of 80 knots and the CH 47 six drums at speeds of 110 knots 2 LOAD DESCRIPTION a Drum fabric water 250 gallon capacity LIN G68998 b Weight 1 Drum empty 210 pounds 2 One drum 2 210 pounds 3 Two drums 4 420 pounds 4 Three drums 6 630 pounds 5 Four drums 8 840 pounds 6 Five drums 11 050 pounds 7 Six drums 13 260 pounds Weight is based on 2 000 pound 250 gallon drum as planning guide percent of fill of drum s will normally be less than this planning figure 3 MATERIALS Sling set 10 000 pound capacity two additional 10 000 pound capacity sling legs chains and grabhooks and 25 000 pound capacity apex fitting are required for five or six drum configuration 4 PERSONNEL One man can prepare and rig one drum in 5 minutes add 5 minutes for each additional drum 5 PREPARATION Align all drums side by side if appropriate and rotate hubs of each drum so that a clevis is at the top Route sling legs so that the odd numbered sling legs are to one end of the drum s and the even numbered sling legs are to the other end s 6 RIGGING a For one drum 1 Route one outer and one inner leg 1 and 3 to one end of drum and other sling legs 2 and 4 to the other end of drum 2 Loop chain end of each sling leg through the clevis at the top of the hub of the drum and insert link 3 of each chain in its own grabhook 3 A single drum may be transported by only two sl
92. of paper plates divide the dollar value by cubic feet of storage space 7 874 576 cubic feet 13 67 per cubic foot Once you know the dollar value per cubic foot you can figure approximately how much room you need to store an incoming shipment of the same item To determine the cubic feet needed to store a certain dollar amount of an item divide the total cost of the incoming items by the dollar value per cubic foot of the same item you have on hand For example you have an incoming shipment of paper plates which costs 3 922 The dollar value of the paper plates you have in storage is 13 67 per cubic foot To find approximately how much room you will need to store the incoming shipment divide the cost of the shipment by the dollar value per cubic foot 3 922 13 67 286 9 cubic feet VERTICAL SPACE IN USE To find the percent of vertical space you are using divide the actual storage height by the potential storage height Your answer will be expressed as a percentage For example a survey shows that cases of batteries can be stacked safely to an average height of 14 feet under most condi tions However you can stack them only 12 feet high in your warehouse due to overhead beams To find what percentage of the available vertical space are you using divide actual storage height by the potential storage height 12 feet 14 feet 86 percent FM 10 15 Section IV Reporting Storage Space RESPONSIBILITIES Storage of
93. office for high priority PD 01 or 02 requests only Notify supply elements of new routing address for deploying units 1 8 Ensure that items on which delivery status has been received are shipped directly to the unit if possible Direct supply elements to fill as many DOs as possible Provide supply cancellation notices to the supported units Cut off transactions pertaining to the deploying units Higher commands may cancel all outstanding requisitions Ensure that the MMC will produce a copy of the demand history file for forwarding to the gaining DSU Extract unit demand history data if long term support is to be provided by another DSU COMPUTE AND MONITOR SUPPLY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS As the supply operations officer you must con tinually review supply support Supply per formance indicators help you to determine trends isolate deficient areas and correct deficiencies Table 1 5 lists DA objectives and acceptable management levels prescribed by AR 710 2 for a number of supply performance indicators Areas which do not fall within acceptable ranges should receive intensive review and management 054 produces a supply performance report which lists demand data needed to compute supply per formance indicators Figure 1 4 shows a sample of Class II support provided by DSUs in a division A separate page would be printed for packaged Class and Class IV support Note that the automated system ha
94. page 4 8 lists storage requirements for vehicle and dry cell batteries For more information see DOD 4145 19 R 1 SB 11 30 and TM 11 415 Your tasks are listed below Consider the lead time required to obtain replace ment batteries Monitor storage Dry batteries should be stored at 35 degrees Fahrenheit or less CTA 50 909 autho rizes refrigerators for storage at unit and activity level Request refrigerator transportation Monitor shelf life expiration dates Require that lot samples be inspected and tested when the issue date exceeds the expiration date Ensure unsuitable dry batteries are disposed of Continuing corrosion can create health and safety hazards Check with the defense reutilization and marketing office for disposal instructions MONITOR TIRE STORAGE You must rotate stock and issue oldest stock first This will prevent deterioration of tires and inner tubes Ensure that soldiers follow proper storage precautions and stock control measures Your tasks are listed below Store tires in a vertical position when possible Require that tires stored horizontally be reversed each six months so that the tire that was on the bottom is on the top Ensure stacking limits shown in DOD 4145 19 R 1 Chapter 5 are not exceeded Ensure tires are stored away from direct sunlight when possible Make sure that no unmounted tires and tubes are stored in the open for more that 90 days C1 FM 10 15 Table 4
95. pallet is the general purpose pallet It is the standard one for procurement and use within DOD The standard dimensions of this pallet are 40 by 48 by 5 1 2 inches Box pallet This is the standard pallet with a frame mounted on it There are several types of box pallets in use The box pallet is used to hold supplies that are difficult to stack such as mops brooms and bagged items It is also used to hold partial pallet loads and loads which require addi tional support Safety pallet The safety pallet is used for placing materials into or removing them from storage It has special safety features raised edges to keep small items from falling off a metal back guard mitered corners a handrail and safety chains around the pallet area The safety pallet is generally painted yellow for easy visibility Pallet rack The pallet rack is used when the quantity or physical characteristics of supplies do not permit full pallet stacks when small lot items are stored back to back in retail areas and when small lot items are stored in the end zone in bulk storage areas Pallet support set The pallet support set is used for the same purpose as the pallet rack An FM 10 15 advantage of this set is that it can be disassembled and broken down for storage when it is not needed Steel Shelving Steel shelving is used for storing small quan tities of items for retail issue The material can be stored either loosely on the shelves
96. pickup point you must set time frames for the pickup of supplies Be sure to include these time limits in your storage SOP It is also a good idea to make a handout that lists these time frames for each of your customer units After putting the supplies in a unit s bin your personnel should telephone personnel in the unit supply section to let them know they have supplies to be picked up Your personnel will need to keep track of any calls they make to units in a customer unit notification log Procedures for setting up and maintaining this log are discussed later in this chapter If the unit does not pick up the supplies within five days after the unit was first notified call the unit supply officer or NCOIC Try to set up a specific date for the pickup of the supplies Be sure your personnel enter this information in the notification log also If the unit has not picked up the supplies after three days have passed since the second call send the supplies back to the storage warehouse with a copy of the issue document Write on the document the reason you are sending the supplies back Send the other copy of the document to the SCS Telephone the unit to tell the supply officer or NCOIC that the supplies have been turned back to the storage section because the unit did not pick them up If the unit still needs the supplies it must reorder them Be sure to enter the information from the last phone call in the notification log The only time
97. priority 8 7 Sorting by storage location 8 8 Multiple stock locations 2 10 Negative balance 2 11 Net storage space 5 18 NMGS 4 2 Non DSS Shipments dt Ao es 7 10 Systems ioe EN 7 6 Numbers Control tes LUCI a 9 11 Shipment s osse ve 9 11 Off line requisitions 1 11 Open containers 10 7 Open storage 5 8 Open storage 5 1 Operational rations 2 15 Operations Hose liner eer ERI Ves 3 6 Pipeline SIR irre 3 6 Operating stock 1 12 ORF voe eei 1 2 Organic 9 11 Index 3 FM 10 15 Outages Short Term 1 4 amp 1 4 Pallet rack ue E Rn 5 17 Pallet support set 5 17 Pallets 5 17 Four way esie recs des ace rne 5 16 Safety oh Gay Li don DA VT 5 17 TWO WAY Rte Cut is 5 16 creme ntt 9 14 12 6 Petroleum platoon leader 3 1 Physical inventories Performing
98. priority request which cannot be filled by the QSS section 055 clerk must instruct the unit to request the item through the SSA on a DA Form 2765 1 Request for Issue or Turn In d When supported units return serviceable items to the QSS section the QSS clerk should identify the items and return them to QSS stock 1 OSS personnel do not need to notify the SCS each time they accept a turn in 2 055 personnel must notify the SCS when the on hand count is larger than the RO limit because of turn ins e QSS section personnel must review QSS stock at least twice a month to determine RO and ROP for ih item f At the end of the review 055 personnel should request any items below the reorder points following the procedures in DA Pamphlet 710 2 2 Chapter 12 When the requested items are received from the SSA the 055 clerk should process them for stockage following the instructions in DA Pamphlet 710 2 2 Chapter 8 C4 FM 10 15 h QSS personnel will work with the SCS to make QSS catalog that lists all the items stocked by QSS section The catalog will contain the NSN nomenclature UL and unit price for each item stocked The cover of the catalog must include the hours of operation and the location of the QSS section The catalog will be issued to each supported unit The 055 clerk will also maintain a 3 by 5 inch data card on each item The cards will list the NSN noun QSS location TM data and stockage and reorder
99. recommended change to a PLL may cause a change in that ASL You should review the ULLS listing on an as required basis to determine the impact of any PLL changes After completion of your review analyze the impact on the size or depth of your Class IX ASL You may need to add or delete line items You also may need to adjust stockage levels to correspond to increases or decreases in the PLL stockage levels of supported units NOTE The update of the unit PLL is a semiannual requirement within the USAR and ARNG 4 2 MONITOR DEMAND SATISFACTION AND OTHER SUPPLY INDICATORS Supply performance reports are used to measure support of customer units The reports alert managers to problem areas These areas include warehouse denials overuse of high PDs number of ASL lines at or below safety level or at zero balance with due outs and number of lines frozen due to inventory The reports will provide balance on statistical data for common repair parts aircraft repair parts and missile repair parts The forms will vary depending on the STAMIS used VERIFY CRITICAL EQUIPMENT DEADLINED DUE TO ZERO BALANCES Major weapons systems and critical end items can be deadlined due to a zero balance zero balance may result from inadequate depth of ASL RM or 055 items or inadequate safety levels It may result from a lack of inventory accuracy delinquent deliveries on contracts or problems with cancellations Your tasks are listed below
100. shipments in good condition depends to a large extent on the manner in which the truck or trailer was loaded and on the care which was taken in preparing it for loading Tight Loading The most important way you can prevent damage in truck and trailer loading is tight loading Rarely do the items to be shipped fit a closed truck van or trailer without side slack or end slack In most instances you can take up slack with bulkheads or dunnage Refer to DOD 4145 19 R 1 for guidance in using bulkheads and dunnage Difficulty of Tie down The construction of closed trucks vans and trailers makes tight loading blocking or bracing more difficult The shells of most commercial closed trucks vans and trailer bodies are made of FM 10 15 aluminum plywood or other thin metal shells designed to protect the items from the weather Your personnel must use good judgment in loading items in closed trucks vans and trailers Balanced Load Figures 9 12 and 9 13 show methods of dis tributing weight correctly Table 9 2 Loading checklist Are sideboards and floorboards present and are they serviceable Do doors close properly providing a waterproof seal Is the container large enough for the cargo or equipment to be shipped length height width and load limitations Are there enough tie downs and are they serviceable Is the roof leakproof or is serviceable canvas cover available Are tire
101. the NSN Determine if package or container data were not changed to show new NSN or Ul Delay in placing items in storage location Check with receiving section for backlog documents Check for receipt documents which may have been sent to the stock records section before items were placed in stock Search storage and receiving areas for the misplaced items Check with technical inspection sections Items may be field turn ins logged in as received but awaiting inspection before being sent to storage Postpost transaction or walk through filled prior to pulling all MROs Check the next morning cycle output MONITOR RECEIPT OPERATIONS You must check on receipt operations to make Have soldiers put up signs identifying where sure they are efficie iidance on receiving different supplies should be unloaded This will operations is found i Your tasks are help to avoid delays in unloading listed below Monitor tally in operations Periodically Ensure that MHE is available at the spot check the checker s count unloading site Require that soldiers verify quantities con Have soldiers lay dunnage before supplies dition description and markings of items received arrive against shipping documents 2 2 C1 FM 10 15 NOTE If DD Form 1348 1 has a customer s docu NOTE You may also want to add a column labeled ment number card columns 30 through 43 supplies Issuing Prior
102. the card with the same serial number as that on the original count card You will also need to mark the number of the recount such as 2 3 or 4 in the Cnt No block of the count card This shows how many times you have counted the items The inventory supervisor gives the remade count card to a different team from the one that originally counted the items The second team recounts the items and fills out the count card When it has finished the count the team gives the card back to the inventory supervisor He will check it to make sure it is filled out correctly If any two counts agree the stock record officer accepts the recount If the totals still do not match the inventory supervisor will have a third inventory team recount the items and remake the cards until the total agrees with the control listing or until two recount totals match Each time a recount is made make sure each stock n umber is checked for multiple locations Stock placed in a separate location can cause the difference in quantity and can be corrected easily Figure 10 17 shows a completed recount card with recount quantity accepted FM 10 15 AZAR BE 05 169 4 mew Ies EN S os lem NUMBER PACKAGES TOTAL QUANTITY CIDCIDCIDCIDCE MDT ID Voc VD PALLETS PALLET TCARD 711 16 C22C22C225 2902002222028 ag Ag DATE 2 4 ad C32Cc32c32C32C32C32 73 5c 358 13
103. the issue document matches the DODAAC on the unit bin Notify the unit by telephone that the supplies are ready to be picked up Enter the call in the customer unit notification log Preparation and maintenance of the log are covered in this chapter Before you issue the supplies to the unit representative check the signature card file to see if he is authorized to pick up supplies for the unit These subjects are covered in this chapter When you issue the supplies make sure customer signs and dates all issue documents correctly as follows DA Form 2765 Customer enters the amount received in block S and the Julian date and his signature in block V DD Form 1348 1 Customer enters Julian date and signature in block 7 Form 3161 Customer writes quantity received in the Supply Action column then enters date and signature in block 15 Attach a copy of the issue document to the supplies The unit needs this receipt for its property records Send all completed documents through the chief of the issue shipping section to the SCS each day PICKING UP SUPPLIES The number of times a unit will pickup supplies from your DSU during a week depends on the distance the unit has to travel and how often it can arrange for transportation Some nearby units will pick up supplies two or three times a day Other units will pick up supplies once a week To keep supplies from piling up in the customer s bins at the
104. the number O are not used You begin labeling with the letters If you have 32 or less rows or columns to label use steps 3 and 4 below If you have more than 32 rows or columns use step 7 below Step 1 Get a planograph for each major storage area To make sure you have all the rows and aisles running in the right direction label the bottom of the planograph BOTTOM before you begin Write the name of the storage area or the building number across the bottom of the planograph for identification Step 2 Use TM 743 200 1 as a guide and sketch in the aisles rows and columns in each storage area The size of the bins shelves and storage aids should serve as a guide for the layout Step 3 Label the storage rows If the rows on your planograph run across the page label them in ascending order from bottom to top If the rows run up and down label them in ascending order from left to right Figure 6 1 shows how to label storage rows Step 4 Label the columns or bins of the rows The columns are the sections of the rows that start at the floor and go toward the ceiling Label the columns the same way you labeled the rows from bottom to top and from left to right Figure 6 2 shows how to label columns Figure 6 3 shows a planograph with rows and columns labeled correctly Step 5 Label the levels of each column from bottom to top 6 1 FM 10 15 ETT L M L M ROWS ROW ROW ROW HJ K K EXI
105. the receipt section will begin using a receiving cutoff control register on the cutoff date This register makes it easier to keep up with the status of all documents your DSU receives during the inventory period There is no set format for the register Figure 10 4 page 10 13 shows a sample register Actions you need to take when you receive documents before the cutoff date and those you need to take when you receive documents after the cutoff date are described below Documents Received Before the Cutoff Date Once the cutoff date is set the receipt section must mark or stamp all incoming documents BE FORE INVENTORY This helps separate those C1 FM 10 15 receipts from the ones received after the cutoff date On the cutoff date the receipt section must hold all new documents until after the inventory By keeping the stock record and the locator deck frozen until after the inventory is completed you will keep the inventory count the same throughout the inventory period The day before the inventory begins you must check to ensure all documents marked BEFORE INVEN TORY have been posted Compare the receiving control register with the stock record items listed on the register should also be listed on the stock record Also check the storage section to ensure all supplies received before the cutoff date have been moved from the receipt section into storage locations Your receiv ing section will process all nonstockage l
106. they are signifying that the supplies listed on the stock record account as being in storage are not on hand Sometimes your per sonnel might issue an MRD by mistake when there are supplies on hand Some of the causes for these mistakes are listed in Figure 8 17 Your personnel must check for these before they make an MRD PROCESSING MATERIEL RELEASE DENIALS FOR PARTIAL ISSUES When only part of the supplies is available for issue your personnel must prepare a manual for the amount that is not on hand Then they issue the supplies on hand using the MRO that was received from the SCS Then storage personnel must make an MRD for the quantity denied To do this they do the following e Line out the A5 on the original MRO Write A6 in the DIC in block 1 AR 725 50 lists and explains A6 codes Write the quantity denied in block 8 on the original MRO a manual on DA Form 2765 duplicating the original MRO but showing the quantity issued and write partial release in block O Storage personnel then place the manual MRO and the supplies in the customer s pickup bin They send the to the 5 5 and Figures 8 18 and 8 19 show how to make an MRD for partial issue using the information on the 6 5 PROCESSING MATERIEL RELEASE DENIALS FOR COMPLETE DENIALS When none of the requested supplies are on hand your personnel must change the MRO to an MRD Figure 8 20 shows how to do th
107. were made The SCS will need this information to check the stock record and to make sure that these items are listed as part of the stock Completing the Inventory The inventory supervisor must account for all count cards by serial number He can use his control listing to check off the cards as he gets them He should also check each card to see if it has been filled out correctly Once all corrections are made he should put the cards into location sequence He can use his location listing to help determine the order in which they should go After the cards are in order he should give them to you to take to the accountable officer ACCEPTING THE COUNT After the accountable officer receives the count cards he checks off their serial numbers on his control listing Once he is satisfied that no cards are missing he writes the unit price and total quantity from the control listing onto each card After he writes this data on the cards he compares the total quantity the inventory team counted with the quantity that he wrote on the card If the quantities match he check marks the Accept box He does the same for each card in the stack Figure 10 15 shows sample cards with matching and different totals that have been accepted If the count of the inventory team is different from the total listed on the control listing the account able officer must take the following steps Figure the amount short or over that the inventory t
108. 0 square feet total space Step 2 Find area of unusable space 12 x 8 feet 96 square feet unusable space Step 3 Subtract unusable area from total area 2 100 square feet 96 square feet 2 004 square feet of gross storage space 5 17 FM 10 15 NET STORAGE SPACE The net storage space of an area is the gross storage space minus the space taken up by aisles structural losses and support space It is expressed in square feet For example if your storage area has 2 004 square feet of gross storage space two aisles that are each 10 feet wide by 40 feet long 10 posts that measure 1 foot in diameter by 2 feet high each and a latrine that measures 5 feet wide by 10 feet long What is your net storage space The steps below show you how to complete net storage space Step 1 Aisle area two each x 10 feet x 40 feet q 800 square feet Step 2 Post area 10 each x 1 foot x 2 feet 20 square feet Step 3 Latrine area one each x 5 feet x 10 feet 50 square feet Step 4 Subtract support space structural loss and aisle areas from gross storage space 2 004 800 20 50 1 134 square feet of net storage space COVERED STORAGE SPACE Find the capacity of covered storage in cubic feet by multiplying the amount of net storage space of an area by the highest stacking height permitted by safety regulations For example your storage area has 1 134 square feet of net storage space Under perfect c
109. 04 734 3690 4110 Activity Sacramento Army Depot Catalog Data Activity US Army Quartermaster Center and School US Army Quartermaster Center and School DOES AMC FM 10 15 APPENDIX B SOP FOR CENTRAL ISSUE FACILITY SUBJECT SOP for CIF TO Using Activities of the CIF 1 REFERENCES AR 240 series AR 710 2 AR 735 5 CTA 50 900 DA Pamphlet 710 2 1 2 PURPOSE The purpose of this SOP is to prescribe policies and procedures pertaining to the operation and organization of the CIF 3 APPLICABILITY This SOP applies to all units organizations activities and individuals involved with the CIF for the issue turn in and exchange of OCIE 4 MISSION The mission of the CIF is to provide a facility that issues OCIE to personnel in units and activities supported by the CIF and maintain a property book for CTA 50 900 items of OCIE The CIF a Receives stores issues exchanges and turns in all CTA 50 900 OCIE items b Receives and processes statements of charges cash collection vouchers or report of surveys for lost or damaged items c Documents individual clothing records for items issued or turned in 5 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION OCIE the CIF issues will be serviceable and clean and will meet standards of appearance established by the command Clothing and equipment turned in to or exchanged by the CIF must have been cleaned maintained and used for their intended purpose Items which have not been cleaned p
110. 12 1 this would be 1497 89 cubic feet Subtract from this any unusable storage space Next determine what type of storage aid would make the best use of this storage capacity Use the procedures below to determine the number of storage aids you will need For each type of aid that is used you must determine its cubic feet For the 129 2 van example use aids 36 inches by 18 inches by 75 inches To determine the capacity of this storage aid in cubic feet multiply its length by its height by its width as shown below For convenience first convert inches to feet Length x Width x Height 36 inches x 18 inches x 75 inches 3 feet x 1 5 feet x 6 25 feet 28 13 cubic feet e bin has 28 13 cubic feet of storage capacity To determine how many of these bins Y E FM 10 15 Figure 12 1 The 12 ton M129A2C semitrailer van can be dated in one row in the M129A2C van divide the length of the bin into the length or adjusted length of the van and round down as follows 29 72 feet 3feet 9 9 9 aids rounded down At least one row of nine aids will go into the van Can two rows of nine aids fit into the van Take the width of the storage aid multiply it by two the number of rows desired and subtract this amount from the van width to determine if the remaining aisle width will permit two rows of bins Remember aisle width must allow access to load and u
111. 1653 26670 7348 26670 12 OCCUPIED SQUARE FEED 1704 11040 1489 2667 13 OCCUPIED CUBIC FEET Line 130 135 1489 REPORTING COMPONENT S MATERIEL b COMMON CROSS SERVICEO 11 DOO MATERIEL 2 000 MATERIEL 14 VACANT SQUARE FEET 15 VACANT CUBIC FEET Line 11 13 16 UNOBLIGATED SQUARE FEET 17 UNOBLIGATED CUBIC FEET 18 RECOUPABLE CUBIC FEET THROUGH REWAREHOUSING From Line 13 SECTION STORAGE SPACE ANALSIS Ne Cubic Foor Line 9 12 19 REQUIREMENTS Precat Yoon 23 ATTAINABLE 24 REQUIREMENTS 25 EXCESS DEFICIT FY COVERED OPEN 26 RECOUPABLE WITH ADDITIONAL RESOURCES 1 Line 02 Column e Decrease of SF result of transitory shelters being erroneously reported as sheds on prior report DD 805 PREVIOUS EDITIONS ARE OBSOLETE Figure 5 14 Completed DD Form 805 5 22 FM 10 15 CHAPTER 6 SETTING UP AND MAINTAINING A STOCK LOCATOR SYSTEM USING THE SYSTEM A storage facility receives stores issues and ships thousands of items of all shapes and sizes These items must be stored in specific places so that they can be located quickly and easily when they are issued The system used to store and locate supplies is called the stock locator system A stock location is simply a
112. 2 Battery storage requirements GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Store batteries on pallets in bins or on racks Never pile batteries on top of one another CAUTION Batteries removed from containers must never come into contact with steel shelving This can cause short circuits or discharge Never store batteries in direct sunlight or beneath a metal roof Issue oldest stock first Never store batteries directly on a concrete floor Store lead acid batteries upright to prevent spillage or leakage of electrolyte VEHICLE BATTERIES Store batteries in a cool location between 60 and 80 F Maintain a continuous trickle charge or perform a periodic recharge once each month on charged and wet batteries Add water and check specific gravity every week on charged and wet batteries DRY CELL BATTERIES Store in a refrigerated well ventilated storage area 30 to 35 F is recommended Never remove batteries from sealing bags until they have been allowed to warm up to surrounding temperatures MANAGE A QSS Any divisional main or nondivisional DSC for re pair parts supply may be authorized a QSS 054 procedures are in TMs 38 L32 12 and 38 L32 13 Basic operating procedures are covered in DA Pam phlet 710 2 2 Chapter 12 Appendix C of this FM provides a sample internal SOP for a QSS Your tasks are listed below Review the quarterly ASL change list to identify those items for which QSS additions or deletions have
113. 20677855 825 2 2 C8 2C8 5c92c0 5c4 2c09 25 87 99 Figure 10 13 Count card for palletized stock Bc 3005099 E COUNT QUANTITY QUANTITY PER PACKAGE e 2 25 5 45035 4 DC HDC HDC HDC HOC 4 20420 2 rele AR 711 16 Cc 5c 25c 5c 5c 25c52575 2c5 5 CEDCHEDCHE gt 2 12 12212212 7122127 Vv INSTALLATION INVENTORY COUNT CARD 3 82 8 87 ICH 9 9 MPT 15745 7 TCOUNT QUANTITY G1 6t 6 04 09 9 12 02 26 79 09 7277 776 09 96 Figure 10 14 Count card completed by inventory team 10 25 FM 10 15 he should give a blank serial numbered card to the count team and have them inventory the location and fill in all the identification data on the card If the location is listed on his control listing he can fill in the data before he gives the card to the count team The inventory supervisor must list all missing count cards on his control listing He must also list the inventory totals of any new cards that
114. 3 OPE MCA2C42C4 2C 4 2C 4 OC amp 2C 4 4 28 w e t desocsocsocsocs 25 2 ETICE Foot ETAT E INSTALLATION INVEN 711 18 COUNTER AND DATE NUMBER QUANTITY PER TOTAL QUANTITY faiai PALLETS PACKAGE ES V INSTALLATION INVENTORY COUNT 412615515 42562251252 RECORDER AND DATE 144 _ cF pelak Sprok IDSF 3263253273 503 3677 gt se ac 4500 45204 5 20 57 750 67 J PDE DICT ODD 1x gt 8 2 82 82 9 9 eg om D Md sc Ade 859 Tre BR GER riin Figure 10 15 Inventory count cards with accepted count totals 10 27 FM 10 15 DA FORM 2000 3 1 OCT 63 Ege PACKAGES QUANTITY m Ih meu ETETETT RENE 1 gt al C122c22c122c 22C12c22c 1 5 124 C 25C3273 50C32C32C3273 5C32 C42C42C4 5CA4D2CA 0C 420426425 ak olad Soiak Jaai Sorak Jorat Sard 2 5 ON inventory CO DA 2000 3 1 10 28 E
115. 3 17 and 38 L32 12 for the pro cedures to use under SAILS and 054 when you need to issue an item during the inventory INVENTORYING LUMBER The general inventory procedures in this chapter also apply to inventorying lumber Some special inventory differences to make your job easier are described below Measuring Lumber When you speak of lumber size you are talking about its thickness and width For example a 2 by 4 inch piece of lumber is actually 2 inches thick and 4 inches wide before it is milled After it has been seasoned and milled its thickness and width will be less However it is still called a 2 by 4 This is nominal thickness and width You measure most lumber in the Federal Supply System in terms of board feet Figure the board feet of a piece of lumber by multiplying its thickness in inches by its width in inches by its length in feet and dividing by 12 If you have more than one piece of lumber the same size once you figure the board foot measurement of one piece multiply it by the number of pieces When you have a large quantity of lumber to inventory use Table 10 8 This table shows the board foot calculations for different sizes of lumber Using Stock Records You can find out how much lumber you have on hand by checking the stock records for the dif ferent types of lumber Since all stock records are kept in NSN order you need to know the NSN for each kind of lumber that you stock To find the NSN f
116. 41 AR 190 11 AR 710 2 AR 710 2 DA Pam 710 2 2 NOTE All other items are inventoried ANNUALLY Sample inventories are NOT permitted Scheduled Cyclic Inventory You conduct this type of inventory weekly monthly or quarterly In this inventory you count only a part of your DSU authorized stockage and nonstockage items within a set timeframe It is easier to conduct this type of inventory if you limit it to a specific storage area a certain type of item or a certain group of supplies The two disadvantages to a scheduled cyclic inventory are explained below Since inventory count cards are made only on those items listed on the stock record the scheduled cyclic inventory does not account for unrecorded stock items Also since the primary location is the only location recorded on the ABF you must instruct your inventory personnel to count all alternate locations for that particular item Alternate locations are posted on the location placard or loose issue label located at the primary location and also on the alternate location card for that particular stock number and condition code located in the locator deck locations are recorded on the in SARSS When an inventory on a stock number is initiated all locations will be identified on the Inven tory Count Control Document or downloaded to LOGMARS T equipment When operating with SARSS there is no need to look manually for alternate locations You m
117. 45 7009 2 2368 7007 2 EDEN E NE 2365 M FM 10 15 to fill out the inventory count cards by hand You must check the cards to make sure they have the following e DIC YDK Special interest code Supply category of materiel code Pilferable item code NSN MCN MPN UI code Voucher control code Inventory cutoff date Julian date Inventory count serial number Storage location DSU code Condition code e Inventory count code 1 2 or 3 Ensure count cards are made for all items on the stock record even those that show a zero balance When your personnel have completed the cards REGISTER OF VOUCHERS TO A STOCK RECORD ACCOUNT EOR THE USE OF THIS FORM DA 7102 2 THE PROPONENT AGENCY 18 THE OFFICE OF THE DEPUTY CHIEF OF STAFF FOR LOGISTICS EDITION OF DEC 57 1 OBSOLETE Figure 10 6 Entries on a DA Form 272 10 15 FM 10 15 PETI 4825977 9259172 EA 143 DA 5 ar psi Y AN e pmnp a jefes 226 22 NUMBER PACKAGES QUANTITY OF PER PER TOTAL QUANTITY EM PALLETS PALLET PACKAGE COUNTER ANO DATE RECORDER DATE E asas bape st A 1 MACHINE PREPARED CAOCCA AECOUNT SUSENDO C 2c855 8 x _ 1 Td
118. 455909 5000999090000 90209990999 Physical Preparation aou oc HOM vA iie C1 FM 10 15 Page Vii C1 FM 10 15 Section IV CHAPTER 11 CHAPTER 12 Section I Section II K APPENDIX viii Page The Inventory Working with Key Inventory Personnel 10 20 Issuing Items During the 10 20 Inventorying Lumber cscsscscssssovossssssssassseccessssscnssesessenseserersesesesesonsessensesseosseee 10 21 Performing the Inventory 0 10 21 Accepting the Count is erinnerte os EGRE Pee creed vac eese 10 26 Requesting a Recount Manual 10 26 Completing the Inventory 10 29 Evaluating Inventory Performance 10 29 USING MATERIALS HANDLING EQUIPMENT Determining Responsibilities 2 11 1 Choosing Materials Handling Equipment 11 1 Using Powered Materials Handling Equipment 11 1 Using Nonpowered Materials Handling Equipment 11 3 Controlling Materials Handling Equipment
119. 85 30 to make the location markings In storage areas where floor surfaces permit you should mark the aisle labels directly on the floor Make these labels with decals paint tape or stencils Be sure to put a coat of clear lacquer over them so they will last longer Put these labels as close to the row or column as possible Try to keep them out of the direct traffic areas and make them large enough so that they can be seen easily If you have an area where you cannot put the markings on the floor put them on posts or other easily seen structures When you mark the shelf levels center and place the signs that show the letter or number below the level you are coding Place segment labels directly on each compartment or section drawer LEVEL 4 LEVEL 3 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 1 ap m E BEEN 2E 20 e Ir ur z Y STACK C STACK B STACK A Figure 6 6 Warehouse with location codes FM 10 15 imm miim oun 1 1 i 1 mu 0 m muc i SECUN WATS W LEVEL D COLUMN E Figure 6 8 Placement of location markings SETTING UP THE LOCATOR FILE A stock locator file is the heart of the stock location system It is an address directory of all stored items The file is made up of a deck of car
120. AJH 101 PROCESSING MATERIEL RELEASE ORDERS FOR SENSITIVE AND PILFERABLE ITEMS Your storage section should get two copies of each for sensitive and pilferable items from the SCS DMMC or the SARSS document control section Instructions for identifying MROs for sensitive and pilferable items should be outlined in your DSU s SOP When your personnel receive an MRO for a sensitive or pilferable item use the following guide lines Check to make sure the storage location listed is correct If a storage location is not listed or is invalid enter the one listed in the locator deck or contact the storage supervisor Proceed to the storage location Make sure item in storage matches the data on the bin label and the MRO Select the quantity listed on the MRO and send the supplies with the MRO attached to the issue sec tion The issue section will place the item in the security cage NOTE DSUs without security cages should separate the quantity listed on the MRO from the rest of the supplies in the storage location They should not remove the items from the storage location 8 8 Initial and date the MRO If the supplies have serial numbers write them on the MRO where they can be seen easily Pull the supplies from the security cage or storage location when the unit arrives to pickup the supplies The issue shipping section will maintain one copy of the MRO Make sure the customer compares the serial nu
121. AND DATE INSPECTED AND DATE 3 67 PACKED 8Y AND DATE TOTAL CUBE 5 BY AND DATE WAREHOUSE LOCATION 6 9 REMARKS 1 1 DISPOSAL RELEASE FIRST DESTINATION ADORESS DATE SHIPPED ORDER 13 TRANSPORTATION CHARGEABLE TO 1 RECEIVERS DOCUMENT NUMBER DO FORM 1344 1 1MAR 74 EDITION OF 1 JAN 84 USED DOO SINGLE LINE ITEM RELEASE RECEP DOCUMENT EXHAUSTED gt Figure 9 5 Release documents filled in by stock clerk FM 10 15 aat T aov Sr DEG E 2663 E EUMINTSTOS TRO EVK BUSH 20 00 2R REGU HE ac ROUTING a DOLLARS OAM BILL OF LADING NUMBER i Seit NT SERIAL NUMER Eu R 21 114 __ ONT QUANTITY s fat TT dads o IU HA C 2 16 MENTARY J Mauris COST ser acie ACCOUNT t TOTAL o meer nno oara mme DATA DATE POSTED T OUT DATE AVAILABLE y R CEIVEO SIGNATURE D x uae SS SS SS eed a a LUGE hile d dE NENUNL BO INSSI BOs 15 GaN TIMA SNOLLI
122. ASL location even if all the items in the location have been issued However if you find you do not have enough space for incoming items you may be forced to delete the ASL location and assign that location to a new item Inform the SCS of any changes in ASL and non ASL loca tions These changes affect the storage locations that the SCS lists on the receipt document Sometimes a location is specially designed for a particular type of item such as cylinders or extra large items Other times a location may be used for storing fast moving items which are generally replenished quickly In these cases you should keep the location open even if the balance on hand is zero Be sure to make the necessary loose issue labels and location placards when new material is received and assigned to a location Take these forms with you 6 8 when you place the material in a storage location This saves you from making more than one trip to a location MAKING LOCATION CHANGES Sometimes you will need to move items to new locations or move items from two different locations to one location Since the locator files of both the automated and manual supply systems are similar the way you request these changes is also very similar However the forms you use are different Manual Procedures You should have only one storage location for each NSN If there is a change in the primary storage location or a new location is established enter Loc Chg
123. ATER PUMP 2 STREAM FLOW gt Soap Foot bath Shower Boot cleaning area Undressing area Towels Soiled clothing Shoes and valuables 250 000 BTU HEATER DRAINAGE Fuel tank on E Used soap deposit Drying area Clothing issue Medical inspection Dressing area Delousing operations Pr A CEB team can provide showers for about 500 soldiers a day Figure 2 8 Sample layout for CEB operations Request engineer support to dig a drain pit for contaminated wastewater Ensure that soldiers have set up a separate receiving point area Ensure that the laundry section has radiacmeters protective overgarments dust respirators rubber gloves and appropriate NBC markers on hand Report the location of wastewater pits to higher HQ Do not allow water to drain into the water supply MANAGE UNIT GRAVES REGISTRATION OPERATIONS You are responsible for supervising search recovery evacuation and burial of remains These tasks are performed by other than GRREG personnel Their responsibilities are described below Search and Recovery Team Leader The search and recovery team leader plans for the search and performs a map or aerial recon naissance of the search area He determines and requests additional support He also Assigns area of search and determines search pattern Contacts NBC and EOD specialists Supervises the search re
124. AYOUT You may be involved in field exercises where there are no permanent warehouses or sheds You must also be able to plan a layout for tent storage areas A typical tent layout as shown in Figure 54 includes a work area pallet support set storage area bin storage area customer pickup bins and a fire point where fire fighting equip ment is kept The number and types of storage aids the quantity of supplies that can be stored and the amount of work area space needed in the tent will depend upon the type of unit you are supporting This type of space is not reportable under the guidance related to storage space management reporting described elsewhere in this chapter In the sample layout about 300 to 350 stock numbered items could be stored Try to follow the guidelines below when setting up your tent layout WORK AREA ENTRANCE AND EXIT GROSS SQUARE FEET 36 6 FM 10 15 e Block one of the exits so that soldiers and can be better controlled Be sure the blocked exit will not be needed in case of a fire Allow room for a long table to use as a desk work counter or packing space e Store fast moving supplies close to the work areas Store slow moving supplies and pilferable supplies to the rear of the tent Store heavy items near the issue point Dig a trench around the outside of the tent to keep water from damaging the supplies Be sure that the drainage trench is sloped away from the tent so t
125. Color Code Markings and Signs 700 15 Packaging of Materiel 700 93 Processing and Shipping DOD Sponsored Retrograde Materiel Destined for Shipment to the United States Its Territories Trusts and Possessions 708 1 Cataloging and Supply Management Data 710 1 Centralized Inventory Management of the Army Supply System 710 2 Supply Policy Below the Wholesale Level 725 50 Requisitioning Receipt and Issue System 735 5 Policies and Procedures for Property Accountability References 1 FM 10 15 740 1 740 3 740 15 Storage and Supply Activity Operations Care of Supplies in Storage COSIS Storage of Military Service Owned Retail Stocks in the DLA Materiel Distribution System COMMON TABLES OF ALLOWANCES 50 900 50 909 50 970 Clothing and Individual Equipment Field and Garrison Furnishings and Equipment Expendable Durable Items Except Medical Class V Repair Parts and Heraldic Items DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY CATALOG C 8900 SL Federal Supply Catalog Stock List FSC Group 89 Subsistence DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FORMS 12 11 E 272 444 1687 1713 1713 1 R 1714 R 1714 1 R 1716 R 1717 R 1804 2000 3 2028 2060 R 2404 2407 2765 series 2765 2765 1 3161 series 3161 3293 R 3294 R 3643 References 2 Subscription Numbers Part V FMs MQSs STPs and TCs Register of Vouchers to Stock Record Account Inventory Adjustment Report IAR Notice of Delegation of Authority Receipt for Supplies Daily Water Pro
126. Distillation Stocks Flash Point Viscosity Water and Sediment by Centrifuge As limited by test capability of the petroleum testing kit 3 15 FM 10 15 PREPARE OR UPDATE POL SAFETY PROGRAM Petroleum products present unique fire safety and health hazards As the petroleum platoon leader you must review update or develop a fire fighting plan according to FM 10 69 Your tasks are listed below Ensure that flammable liquids are stored at least 100 feet from wooden structures and 50 feet from noncombustible structures Store com pressed gases separately Prohibit smoking within 100 feet of storage areas FARE or FSSP Require gate guards to collect matches and lighters from those who enter the area Ensure that the correct types of fire extin guishers are on hand and positioned ready for use soldiers should know the location of every fire extinguisher in the area Examine fire extinguishers at least twice year Monitor dates when fire extinguishers were last inspected Require that maps show critical shutdown valves location of water supply evacuation routes and reporting areas following a fire alarm Ensure that all vehicles and equipment are bonded and grounded prior to starting any opera tion TC 11 6 gives details on how to ground equipment Require that engineers construct a fire wall around each 50 000 gallon collapsible tank The fire wall should be 4 feet high and 18 inches wid
127. F Divert split reconsign or expedite items or shipments on short notice Ensure you submit standard transactions to effect these actions as well since all activities in your chain of support must also be aware of these actions 4 1 FM 10 15 Reconstruct requisitions for shipments lost in transit or damaged while en route overseas Trace requisition from the date it was submitted to the date the item was delivered Analyze requisition demand history Send re quests for remote terminal access to the LIF to Commander LCA ATTN AMXLC M Building 650 Presidio of San Francisco CA 94129 6900 DETERMINE SIZE OF CLASS ASL Maintaining large stocks of repair parts impedes mobility and increases vulnerability DSU stockage must umbrella the MPLs of supported units INCORPORATE ASL CHANGE LIST RECOMMENDATIONS Automated systems produce an ASL change list The list identifies automatic stockage level increases and decreases It also gives recommended stockage level or stockage list code changes and recommended ASL additions or deletions If an item qualifies for retention on the ASL the automated system recom putes the RO and ROP and prints the recommended quantities For more information see TM 38 L32 13 NOTE This change deletes Figures 4 1 4 2 and 4 3 ANALYZE IMPACT OF PLL CHANGES ASL SIZE AND DEPTH The ULLS maintains demand data through its de mand analysis process Each
128. F DELEGATION OF AUTHORITY RECEIPT FOR SUPPLIES DATE 30 SEPT 93 For use of this form DA 710 2 1 The proponent agency is ODCSLOG AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE S ORGANIZATION RECEIVING SUPPLIES LOCATION 9th Maint Bn AUTHORITY LAST NAME FIRST NAME MIDDLE INITIAL MC EMIT AUTHORITY HUDSON TED C GIBBS RICHARD W BRYANT WILLIAM J ors Ft Adams AL SIGNATURE AND INITIALS Tad C Hudson TCH REQ REC EIE pe EIE AUTHORIZATION BY RESPONSIBLE SUPPLY OFFICER OR ACCOUNTABLE OFFICER UNDERSIGNED HERESY DELEGATES 7 WITHORAWS FROM THE PERSON S LISTED ABOVE THE AUTHORITY TO REMARKS Installation Supply Division Receipt for Class IV and VII supplies ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY UNIT IDENTIFICATION CODE WAGZAA DOOAAC ACCOUNT NUMBER WKS ABL LAST NAME FIAST NAME MIDOLE INITIAL TELEPHONE NUMBERIEXPIRATION DATE SIGNATURE CARTER GENE T 734 2216 31MAR94 Wome 7 Caster DA sare 1687 EDITION OF OEC 57 IS OBSOLETE 1981 0 361 646 8169 2 THE UNITED STATES ACE Figure 9 2 Customer identification forms 9 4 FM 10 15 Section III Shipping Materiel SHIPPING SUPPLIES PREPARING RELEASE ORDERS To get items ready for shipment your issue Your DSU ships items to other SSAs Defense shipping and storage sections need to work Reutilization and Marketing Offices and between together You need to set up guideline
129. G This loading should never be permitted The frame bends the rear tires are very much overioaded and enough weight is taken from the front tires to make steering almost impossible WRONG This type of loading results from the use of the wrong vehicle for the job Such loading can result on rough roads in an actual pivoting of the truck on its rear wheel and taking the front wheels entirely off the road Eri Again the proper place for a concentrated load like this is just ahead of the rear axle with the longest side on the floor A tractor trailer combination is the proper vehicle for use in service like this By using the proper vehicle damage to the truck and tires and even serious accidents may be avoided Figure 9 13 Correct and incorrect loading 9 19 C1 FM 10 15 CHAPTER 10 PERFORMING PHYSICAL INVENTORIES Section I Overview RESPONSIBILITIES Keeping property records up to date is a big job One way to find out if your storage records are correct is for you as storage supervisor to conduct an inventory An inventory is the physical count of supply items on hand at your storage facility It is important that the quantity and type of items you show on hand on the stock record match the quantity and type of items you count in your storage facilities When these totals do not match it is your job to find the mistakes To help locate the mistakes and correct them you must make a complete physic
130. HANDLING EQUIPMENT Your personnel should use nonpowered MHE for all operations that do not require powered MHE You should also remind them to use nonpowered MHE if it is more economical even though it may take a little more effort Figure 11 3 shows the conveyors and Figure 11 4 shows the hand lift trucks platform trucks and other nonpowered MHE most often used in storage sections Conveyors Conveyors are used to move supplies in a fixed line of travel They are used mainly for loading and unloading trucks and railroad cars The three major kinds used in most storage operations are gravity roller roller and skatewheel conveyors The skatewheel conveyor is probably used most often because it is lightweight easy to setup and easily transported Be sure that you and your personnel know the weight limits of each type of conveyor before anyone places heavy supplies on it 11 3 FM 10 15 GRAVITY ROLLER CONVEYOR 3 Figure 11 3 Conveyors Hand lift Truck This truck is sometimes called a pallet jack or hydraulic jack It has two load carrying tracks that can be raised about 4 inches to carry pallet loads Use it to move pallet loads that do not have to be stacked and to move loads short distances It can be operated in small spaces where forklifts cannot fit Platform Truck This truck is used mainly for moving short distances with frequent stops It is used also in close areas since it is easy to maneuver i
131. If product residue pre vents the deterio ration drum will be considered accept able until it is cleaned and inspected See information for body above Exterior Moderate rusting if gasket seat and threads are not impaired interior See infor mation for body above See information for body above See information for body above See information for body above PERFORM QUALITY SURVEILLANCE You must take samples and test them if petro leum products are to be released as suitable for their intended use Minimum sampling and testing requirements from MIL HDBK 200G are listed in Tables 3 9 and 3 10 Quality surveillance specialists must test products upon receipt and before shipment They must also inspect and test all stored products for serviceability and possible contamination Your tasks are listed below Ensure that the same grade of product is kept in a tank car truck or semitrailer Plan the flow so that only one type of product is stored or distri buted by each type of equipment Make it SOP that soldiers clean line strainers and nozzle screens daily Ensure that aviation fuel flows through a filter separator before it is issued from a petro leum tank vehicle Change filters every 2 years or when changing type of fuel being used Maintain a pressure differential log See FMs 10 20 10 68 and 10 69 for more information on the use of a filter separator Drain water daily before a
132. LE TOOLS Tools have a ready resale value on the illegal market and they are especially subject to theft You must make sure they are strictly controlled and stored in secured areas Refer to ARs 190 11 and 710 2 for more information Your tasks are listed below Establish adequate inventory measures and accounting controls Make it SOP that soldiers flag locator file cards in some way to indicate that the items are pilferable Set up a materiel control system to include inspection of delivery and vendor vehicles Investigate evidence of tampering in a shipment Restrict access to areas in which pilferable items are stored Reduce in transit exposure Have storage personnel unload and package tools at the storage site SAFEGUARD CLASSIFIED AND SENSITIVE MATERIAL Sensitive and classified items require special controls when they are moved and stored To identify these items check the CIIC listed on the AR 740 1 has instructions how to store these items For CIIC items special handling codes are printed on the issue or receipt document Your tasks are listed below Restrict Access Maintain an access roster maintain a sign in and sign out register and assign responsibility for locked and sealed or restricted areas Ensure that documents per taining to classified supplies are handled by properly cleared personnel Ensure Safe Storage Maintain separate storage areas for classified and sen
133. M 10 15 is ready Be sure to provide these materials especially the items with sensitive or pilferage codes with the necessary protection while they are in the temporary location It is a good idea to keep a file on locations as they become empty This file should list the types of locations and their sizes As a new item comes in the right type and size of location can be found quickly and easily by searching the file Once a location has been assigned its card must be removed from the file to avoid assigning the same location to a different item If you do not keep a file listing empty locations send new items to the correct storage area A storage specialist will decide where to store the item After he picks a location he must make sure it is posted to the locator card If you are at DSU that has a shortage of storage space you will have to add and delete locations and make changes to the locator file to make room for incoming supplies Before assigning a new item to an empty location or before making changes to the locator file check to see if the location in question is assigned to an ASL item You should delete or change locations for non ASL items first It is easier to do this when the balance on hand of an item is zero Your local storage SOP should list the times when you must reserve certain storage locations It should also list the times when you can delete ASL locations Normally you should not delete an
134. M SHIP TO WRAPEQ 5 4 3 DATA TEM ORIGINALLY REQUESTED FREIGHT CLASSIFICATION NOMENCLATURE NOMENCLATURE x SPARK PLUG BY AND DATE PACKED 8Y AND DATE orcomrawens TOTAL CUBE WAREHOUSED BY AND DATE WAREHOUSE LOCATION 9 10 REMARKS CC FIRST DESTINATION ADDRESS DATE SHIPPEO 13 d Dc AM CHARGEABLE TO T MAR 74 fee ure MAN 14AN MAY B6 USED UNTIL EXHAUSTED SERIAL BB gt 4ooness 3 EA 000996 W22PEQ 3112 0021 LEMENTAR UNIT PRICE BUTION cr els ooLLAms crs 5 oare 0000000 47 PROJECT pOtLAns 00002 12 MARK FOR c FREIGHT RATE M TOTAL WEIGHT RECEIVED BY ANO DATE INSPECTED BY AND DATE 8 14 SAADING AWB OR RECEIVERS SIGNATURE DATED DISPOSAL RELEASE ORDER 6G 16 RECEIVERS DOCUMENT NUMBER DOO SINGLE LINE ITEM MEL EASE RECEIPY DOCUMENT Figure 9 4 DD Form 1348 1 disposal release order your storage personnel receive an MRO or a disposal release order they select the item and quantity listed and send the item to the shipping section with a copy of the release order The PD listed on the MRO or disposal release order deter mines how long your personnel have to process and prepare the items for shipping Your storage and shipping personnel need to work together to meet the deadlines as given in Table 9 1 PLANNING THE SHIPMENT Planning shipme
135. OUSED BY DATE 3412 is taken to the warehouse to issue the equipment to the unit The receipt goes to the SCS and the MMC when the SARSS 1 I close out process is done at the end of the day DOCUMENTS RECEIVED WITH DSS AND DSS AIR LINES OF COMMUNICATION SHIPMENTS Your section will receive three types of documents with each DSS shipment a receipt document an in transit data card if you also serve as 055 distribution drop point and a materiel receipt card These are usually attached to the outside of the shipping con tainer in a plastic envelope Remove them carefully The documents are used to record information that shows how well the 055 works Make sure your soldiers understand how to handle these cards to ensure the in transit data cards are returned to the v QUANTITY CORRECTION FIRST DESTINATION ADDRESS t nva 56 09014 LUI TIS DOCUIT Figure 7 7 DD Form 1348 1 showing tally count quantity NSN corrections and receiving activity entries Logistic Control Activity at the Presidio of San Francisco CA and 065 receipt card to the Defense Automatic Addressing System Receipt Documents The receipt documents received with DSS and 055 air lines of communication shipments are discussed earlier in this chapter In Transit Data Cards In transit data cards are computer cards coded wit
136. QS 9092 2 01 SHIPPED FROM MARK FOR REC 81 7 45th MAINT BN 125th MAINT CO Sim Label required APO NY 1234 APO NY 9334 NSL A 8 DDOS Required DSS WARENOUSE LOCATION FREIGHT RATE acumen mar QUANTITY 9001 K4GE4 of BUBSTITUTE DATA ITEM ORIGINALLY REQUESTED FREIGHT CLASSIFICATION NOMENCLATURE XI Pkg FCN Stock Fund e NOMENCLATURE Brake Shoe Veh Y 8Y AND DATE RECEIVED BY AND DATE INSPECTED BY AND DATE PACKED BY AND DATE TOTAL CUBE WAREHOUSED BY AND DATE WAREHOUSE LOCATION REMARKS 1 Select Code Army Stock m AA 1 cc FIRST DESTINATION ADDRESS DATE SHIPPED 13 TRANSPORTATION CHARGEABLE TO 15 RECEIVERS DOCUMENT NUMBER EDITION OF 1 JAN 64 MAY LUBED LINE ITEM RELEASE RECEIPT DOCUMENT EXHAUSTED Figure 9 6 DA Form 2765 and DD Form 1348 1 completed as MRDs 9 9 FM 10 15 ey pote fais ote 55212221122 mf STOCK NUMBER Ts rec EOD n SHIPPED FROM CARGO WAREHOUSE LOCATION 4923 FREIGHT CLASSIFICATION NOMENCLATURE T NOMENCLATURE SPARK PLUG SELECTED AND DATE REMARKS AA FIRST DESTINATION ADORESS DATE SHIPPED 1 12 13 TRANSPORTATION CHARGEABLE
137. R 1 Chapter 5 lists criteria for open sided and enclosed storage sheds Store acetylene cylinders in a separate building or within a solid wall compartment Fasten cylinders in racks or cradles when they are to be moved and brace them so they do not overturn or strike other objects COORDINATE LOCAL PURCHASE In peacetime packaged products especially acetylene and oxygen cylinders are often obtained through local purchase While local procedures may vary the request and issue flows are basically the same You coordinate requirements with the Class III item manager in your sup porting MMC The requisitions are then sent through the DOL item manager to the finance office for a check on fund availability Upon approval of the requisitions local purchase of the items is authorized The requisitions are then sent to the contracting division for purchase from an authorized source Then depending on time and distance factors your soldiers may either pick up supplies at the contractor or vendor storage area or from the installation DOL warehouse MAINTAIN RETURNABLE AND REFILLABLE CYLINDERS OR CONTAINERS Supported units should turn in an equal number of empty cylinders for full ones If the unit has no empty container it must submit a request for a cylinder or container before the gas can be issued Requests for government owned containers must show Advice Code 25 Requests for vendor owned containers must show Advice Code 2Y
138. R UM and 18 L19 AJH BUR EM Table 10 4 Reasons for a special inventory credit balance on hand occurs negative balance materiel release denial occurs A location survey finds an item in an unrecorded location or in an incorrect location There is evidence of forced or unauthorized entry The commander or an accountable officer directs that an inventory be conducted There is a change of accountable officer Section II The Location Survey PREPARING FOR SURVEY Before you and your personnel begin the inventory you must conduct a location survey to make sure all data have been posted to the records and that all supplies are in the correct locations A location survey is a check of the storage locations against the locations listed on the locator deck and stock records During the survey you compare the supplies in storage with the data on the locator cards to ensure they match If there are any mistakes in the NSN condition code quantity security code or type of item you must make these 10 6 changes before the inventory begins Chapter 6 ex plains how to make location changes As storage supervisor you must update or write an SOP covering all parts of the location survey Be sure to include Purpose and objectives of the survey Time frame outline for conducting the survey Assignment of survey supervisor and survey team Cutoff dates for shipping and receiving sections ist of areas n
139. Release Orders Percent Materiel Release Refusals 15 the percentage of inventory accuracy in the unit records 85 or above Total Items Correct Total Items inventoried Percent Inventory Accuracy NOTE Whenever an inventory is taken you must take certain precautions to reconcile count quantities with unposted receipts and unprocessed MROs Is the percentage of inventory accuracy B5 or above for the following a 100 lines inventoried from the records to the stock b 100 lines inventoried from the stock to the records Is the percentage of gross adjustments less than 20 Total Value of Adjustments Total Value of Inventory Percent Gross Adjustment Is the percentage of net adjustments less than two Difference Between Shortages and Overages Percent Net Adjustments Total Value of Inventory FM 10 15 CHAPTER 11 USING MATERIALS HANDLING EQUIPMENT DETERMINING RESPONSIBILITIES As storage supervisor it is up to you to decide when and what kind of MHE to use to move supplies within your storage section You must also teach your storage personnel how to use MHE to save time and labor Try to handle supplies as little as possible However when you must move items Plan in advance for storage problems such as weather damage breakage and safety hazards Decide on the kind of MHE you need by the number weight and size of the items Choose the right MHE for the job and stay within the capabilities of t
140. Report 2 2 4 4 00 00 8 12 Processing MROs for Partial Issue or Denials in 5 585 8 12 Issuing a Materiel Release Denial ccccssssssesecsssssscsseccecsessssssceccassacaceccecesersscsees 8 12 ISSUING AND SHIPPING SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT Planning Issue and Shipping Activities Responsibilities cuin editae Moa Nt 9 1 Issue Shippitg Section 9 1 Issuing Items Using Issue Document cscssssscssssserscssscscsersssssesoesosssscecesvecessesssessevesaseasearacerensees 9 1 Issuing 9 2 Picking Up SUPDUCS 9 2 Preparing Customer Unit Notification Log eese 9 3 K Checking Customer Identification eese eese 9 3 Shipping Materiel Shipping Supplies 9 5 Preparing Release Orders ends 9 5 Planning tlie Shipment bx be pu Fed ees eid 9 6 Picking the e 9 7 Making a Release 9 7 Section IV Section V CHAPTER 10 Section I Section II Section III Responsibilities Packing the Supplies eese Processing the Release Order Preparing Transportation Documents
141. SCS Figure 8 21 shows an MRO list that has been checked and updated by the storage section ISSUING A MATERIEL RELEASE DENIAL An MRD is a supply failure It reflects an accounting mistake a misplaced item an incor rect stock locator deck or stolen items Your personnel should search all areas carefully before they pass the MRD on to the next level Some of the mistakes they should look for include duplicate receipt records and wrong items listed on receipt records They should check the stock locator cards with mistakes in NSN location or name of item They should also check for changed NSNs that were not recorded and a listing with part number or service stock number in place of the NSN As soon as your section issues an MRD your DSU has only 48 hours to find out the reasons for the denial Conduct an inventory and correct the stock records that are involved As storage super visor you coordinate the actions of your sections with those of other sections of the DSU during the inventory and the following adjustments You will be the first supervisor notified of the MRD When you find that an MRD needs to be issued you should take the following steps Order the receiving sections to freeze all incoming receipts with that NSN Order the stock records section to freeze the stock record This will keep that section from issuing any more MROs for the NSN involved Collect all MROs with that NSN that have not been processed
142. STON STP sup TAACOM TAMMS TB TC FM 10 15 required requisition Reportable Item Control Code requisitioning objective report of discrepancy reorder point Reserve Officers Training Corps requirement reparable exchange reparable exchange activity Operations and Training Officer US Army Supply Officer US Army safety level Standard Army Intermediate Level Supply Subsystem supply and service Standard Army Retail Supply System supply bulletin supply category of materiel code stock control section commercial or government owned or leased shipping container Physical Security Arms Ammu nition and Explosives Security Risk Pilferage Code September standard form sergeant first class Selected Item Management System Expanded safety level stockage list code soldier s manual standing operating procedure support skill qualification test stock record officer supply support activity self service supply center storage location code short ton Soldier Training Publication supply Theater Army Area Command The Army Maintenance Manage ment System technical bulletin training circular Glossary 3 FM 10 15 TCMD TCN TDA TDR telecom TG TM TMO TOE TRADOC trans typ UI UMMIPS UND US Glossary 4 transportation control and move ment document transportation control number tables of distribution and allowances transportation discrepancy report tele
143. Since GSUs issue only full cases of pallet loads Class I points will gradually build up excess stocks from the full cases or pallets and the same size orders they place again and again While Class I items must never be under issued excess stock hampers mobility and increases the hours required to inventory and rotate stock Class I soldiers can best control excess by reducing orders by the amount on hand over your requirements Your tasks are listed below Keep a close check on excess shown on stock records Have Class I section soldiers maintain a running count on DA Form 3293 R Subsistence Consumption Card of excess cans or MREs in each case or pallet load Coordinate with the supply operations officer soldiers at higher HO and the MMC Class I manager to develop an SOP for handling excess Class I stock Supervise end of month inventory of subsistence supplies on hand SUGGESTION To speed up and simplify the inventory have the NSN item identification and UI preprinted on DA Form 2060 R 2 13 FM 10 15 1 Start engines The light is 2 vo Forward Move out Increase 3 Move in reverse The light is moved to describe a horizontal Speed or Doubletime The light held at shoulder level and figure 8 in front of the body is moved vertically several times blinked several times toward the in front of the body vehicles 4 Turn right The light is rotated 5 Turn left The tight is rotated 6 Stop or St
144. Stock Locations and Storage Procedures 4 3 Change Storage Records and Storage Aids to Agree With Monthly Cross Reference 148 22 227 4 7 Maintain or Manage cscssssssssssescssssssssecssssssscssecnsacsesescsescsessecsesesscscecesssessees 4 7 Stor Batteries 4 7 Monitor Tire Storage DM T 4 7 Managed OSS cenare tenen reden e ee ced otav bes imet 4 8 SUPPLY OPERATIONS CONTROLLING STORAGE SPACE Determining Space Responsibilities tarts 5 1 radio D EE 5 1 Making a Storage Layout Storage Layout CE 5 2 Storage Layout Plane e e raked 5 2 vcf die 5 4 Storage Layout Drawing cscscsssssscesssssessssessscssssssscsssssssssesesesesesesesereserscessseuenans 5 4 1 Open Storage Layout ier eite iR Tn dion 5 8 Tent Storage Layout d T 5 9 Bin Storage Layout rie cierto metus 5 9 Bulk Storage 5 11 Van Storage Layout 5 13 Field Storage Layout 5 13 Storage D p 5 14 Computing Storage Space Responsibilities dic E EE ira 5 17 Gross Storage 5 17 Net 5 Space ciso cel oves he 5 18 Covered Storage Space aee venei cat 5 18 Dollar Value Per Cubic Foot c
145. Success on tomorrow s battlefields may depend on the Army s ability to feed and clothe its fighting forces fuel its combat vehicles fortify its positions and replace its weapons systems Your office acts as the supply mission control element of your unit Depending on your unit s supply mis sion you must ensure that food water clothing petroleum barrier material and major end items are available when and where they are needed You may even determine the quantity and types of items to be stored in distribution or supply points major concern will be ASL size versus mobility requirements A supply platoon can receive as many as 5 000 demands per month for stocked items and 1 000 demands for nonstocked items You are responsible for coordinating with your MMC or SCS operating platoons supported units and higher sources of supply to ensure that demands are met While the MMC or SCS manages your supply assets your soldiers prepare and process stock accounting and stock location records for all supplies received stored and issued from your unit supply and storage elements You will need to learn how to use computer listings to monitor DIs MROs and DOs to identify problem areas You will also be concerned with the security of ADP software and hardware and contingency planning for ADPE outages DETERMINE DEMAND SATISFACTION The mission of the SSA is to supply supported units How well your unit provides this support will depen
146. T BOTTOM OF PLANOGRAPH FOR BUILDING 1385 Figure 6 1 Planograph with storage rows labeled EXIT 6 COLUMNS A eje o e r mj a BOTTOM OF PLANOGRAPH FOR BUILDING 1385 Figure 6 2 Planograph with columns labeled FM 10 15 BUILDING NUMBER P 10202 FG HJ KL ae NET STORAGE SPACE 1 440 SQUARE FEET MN PQ RS MN PQ RS PQ RS e x icizizivio e cI x iZ v ol i TT tT tT ft HJ 0 TU T T LATRINE RECEIVING AREA 32 x 32 AREA 32 x 14 1 2 SECURITY LATRINE lt lt MAIN AISLE SHIPPING AND ISSUE AREA 44 x 32 OFFICE 20 x 32 lt 1 111 lt BOTTOM OF PLANOGRAPH Figure 6 3 Planograph with columns and rows labeled Step 6 Label each compartment or section of the levels You may have more than one section per level Label each section from left to right Figure 6 4 shows how to label levels and compart ments or sections Step 7 To label more than 32 rows or columns take one of the steps below If there are more than 32 rows but not more than 16 columns label the aisles instead of each row This will give you two rows per labeled aisle If there are more than
147. TE OF ORIGINAL COUNT CARD CE2CR2CR OCA OCA OCA 7 6 125 3 Toe an KouNr QUANTITY ceras A Gm tet os msc GE Ea pa eu 0 1721 1 1 622222722 NUMBER OF RECOUNT 31 INSTALLATION INVENTORY COUNT CARD 711 161 THOT 15745 COUNT QUANTITY 4 0 M 0 06 1 04 06 09 7 725 D 76 7 N KIELE AL Figure 10 17 Completed recount card with recount quantity accepted COMPLETING THE INVENTORY After the accountable officer accepts all inven tory counts and corrects his control listing he sends the count cards and the control listing to the SCS The SCS then makes the necessary changes to the stock record at this time DA Pamphlet 710 2 2 Chapter 9 explains how the information from the inventory is put onto the stock accounting record After posting the inventory counts you and the accountable officer lift the freeze on the receiving and issuing sections They can begin processing requests and issues nor mally Your personnel should process all DOS that were placed on hold during the inventory as soon as possible Be sure to tell your personnel to watch for any new that are dated before the inventory cutoff date These are floating MROs If your personnel find any of these MROs they
148. TEMS gt lt SLOW MOVING ITEMS Figure 5 8 Van storage layout 5 13 FM 10 15 MM RN iui c eC 77 d 2 Jay COLLECTION f LR P CUSTOMER EE PARKING a r2 ENTRANCE CONTROL POINT 5 RECEIVING NER 3 pss x es FIGHTING POSITIONS t COVERED Ss 2 3 Figure 5 9 Field supply and storage point near the entrance and the loading and unloading areas to keep the roads from becoming jammed Your soldiers at the exit point need to check trucks and vehicles as they leave to make sure all sup plies for the units are authorized and signed for Do not forget to include a Class VII storage area for large equipment such as generators and vehicles when you make the layout As you plan and draw the supply and storage field layouts follow the guidelines below Make sure you have enough roads to allow supplies and equipment to be loaded unloaded and moved quickly Try to provide cover and concealment for your tents and equipment Use natural terrain to provide camouflage or use camouflage nets if you cannot use natural terrain FM 5 20 explains camouflage techniques 5 14 Make sure your area has adequate drainage This will protect supplies from damage and will allow you to use MHE in all kinds of weather Do not place tents equipment and su
149. THEM ON TOP OF THE STACK THESE MROs ARE FOR NMCS ITEMS AND MUST BE ISSUED FIRST SORTING MATERIEL RELEASE ORDERS BY STORAGE LOCATION Once you sort all MROs into stacks by their PDs you then need to sort these stacks by warehouse loca tion Look at the first letter or number of the location code on each MRO in the first stack The location code is listed in columns 46 through 50 and in block F on the DD Form 1348 1 MRO On the DA Form 2765 the code is listed in card columns 46 through 50 It is located in the upper left hand corner of a SARSS 1 D produced MRO If your warehouse locations lettered sort the MROs into alphabetical order If the locations are numbered sort them into counting order When two MROs have the same first letter or number arrange them in order of the second letter or number After you sort the MROs by priority and location give them to your warehouse personnel They will use the MROs to identify the items that are to be issued Remember high priority items must be issued within set time frames PULLING ITEMS FROM STOCK Once your warehouse personnel locate the items listed on the MROs they will use two methods to decide exactly which items in a location are to be pulled for issue The two methods are progressive and selec tive Progressive Method Your personnel should use this method for all items with a shelf life code of zero This method is also called the first in first out me
150. The data to be listed on a preprinted card and a manually prepared card are given below Preprinted Cards Preprinted cards must include the following DIC YDK NSN UL Quantity Inventory voucher number Inventory cutoff date Inventory serial number Storage location 050 code Condition code Storage location code C if location changed Inventory count code Date posted and counter s signature Date and recorder s signature The SCS puts the cards in location order They are numbered from 0001 to 9999 so you can tell how many items will be involved in the inventory This helps the inventory supervisor keep track of the cards The SCS also puts serial numbers on some blank cards so that the inventory teams can make a card for any item that does not have a preprinted card Manually Prepared Cards If your DSU does not have the use of ADPE your ADP and SCS personnel must work together PAGE NUMBER SUPPLY SUPPORT ACTIVITY 56TH MAINT BN elid 64600572553 Barreey 7 neco SIE 593500 465 7 32 5962007 6 857 rianroreste arene ro 0 4927 566 5955000037594 Cevsrae owr amp 7 Ceorem ____________ 3363 lervocoos7asss Barreev Ge RIS a 5 38
151. US government owned supplies and equipment is a huge business Millions of cubic feet of storage space are used in depots and storage facilities all over the world The cost of con structing and maintaining these storage areas amounts to several billion dollars each year To be sure that the best use is made of all storage space available storage managers at all levels need to know how to use storage space under their control To control the use of space different aids and reports have been developed As a storage super visor you need to know how to use these aids to help make the most efficient use of space and how to report your space use to higher HQ SPACE ALLOCATION MAP The space allocation map is a map of your area showing the current status of areas that are designated for storage operations and the location of other related activities Your input will be combined with that of other units until a map of the whole installation is completed This map will CROSS AISLE LATRINE LOCKER ROOM STACKING DEPTHS FOR BULK VARIED AS SHOWN BY ARROWS show the type of space the use of the space receiving shipping bulk storage loose issue storage office space or other and the type of material stored repair parts construction mate rials end items or other For easier identifi cation each of these areas may be color coded Overlays may be used to keep the map current PLANOGRAPH The planograph is the approved
152. You can double stack boxes on a bin shelf You can also relocate an item with the contents still inside the box Figure 5 7 shows how the various sizes of shelf boxes can be used to store bin items If no containers are available put retaining strips across the front of the shelves to hold items in place You should estimate the number and kinds of storage aids you need before you sketch the final bin layout When you use bins you reduce the problems with security and inven tory that arise when broken cases of bin type supplies are found in bulk storage locations BULK STORAGE LAYOUT When you prepare the layout for heavy bulk items you should increase the width of the main aisles or any aisles that are next to the bulk area to 11 1 2 feet You will need to use MHE to move most of the bulk items If your bulk items are in the same warehouse as the bin items you should move all the bin items near the front entrance Your heavy bulk items should be loaded and unloaded through the rear exits This will save time use of MHE and labor because you can issue bulk items directly from their storage location without having to move them through the issue point Refer to Figure 5 5 which shows a typical layout with bin and bulk storage areas For more on planning bulk storage check DOD 4145 19 R 1 Chapter 2 5 11 FM 10 15 E NO 3 SIZE NO 1 SIZE NO 2 SIZE NO 4 SIZE NO 5 1 BOX 2 BOXES 4 BOXES 5 BOXES 3 BOXES SIZE NO 6 6 BOXES
153. ablished Fahrenheit finance and accounting officer forward area refueling equipment fund code February field flexible field manual freeze code federal supply catalog fuel system supply point feet foot fort fair wear and tear gallon Government bill of lading gallons per minute graves registration general support general support unit heavy expanded mobility tac tical truck HI hi pri HQ IAR IL in Inf inl inv Jan JP 4 Jul Jun KIAS kw KY Ib LCA LIF LIN loc Lt MACOM maint Mar MATCAT MCC MCN mech MED MHE MILHDBK MILSTAMP MILSTRIP MILVAN MMC MOS MPDL MPL MPN MOS MRD MRE MRO Hawaii high priority headquarters inventory adjustment report Illinois inch infantry initial inventoried January jet propulsion fuel July June knots indicated air speed kilowatt Kentucky pound s Logistic Control Activity logistics intelligence file line item number location lieutenant major Army command major maintenance March materiel category movement control center management control number mechanized medical materials handling equipment military handbook Military Standard Transporta tion and Movement Procedures Military Standard Requisitioning and Issue Procedures military owned remountable container minimum Materiel Management Center military occupational specialty mission profile development list mandatory parts lis
154. ads and rail networks FMs 10 20 and 10 69 describe how to lay operate retrieve and repair the hose line Your tasks are listed below Request a crane or 5 ton wrecker to load and off load hose line flaking boxes Do NOT use forklifts to lift the boxes 3 6 Require or assign a petroleum supply specialist to monitor changes in hose line pressure at all times Changes in pressure readings or in the sound of the 350 GPM pump often indicate breaks leaks closed valves or lack of suction Schedule hose line patrols Ensure that fire extinguishers and spill control materials are available before each operation and when the system must be shut down to repair leaks SUPERVISE PIPELINE OPERATIONS If you are the platoon leader of a pipeline operating platoon you are responsible for super vising the movement of large volumes of bulk petroleum through 90 miles 150 kilometers of multiproduct pipelines for extended periods Use FM 10 18 as a format guide for preparing con sumption graphs monthly pipeline schedules and daily pumping schedules and pumping orders Your tasks are listed as follows Develop a consumption graph for each product Prepare monthly pipeline schedule Prepare a daily pumping schedule or pump ing order Establish a petroleum batching sequence Ensure line soldiers sample and test the product in the pipeline as they follow the progress and arrival time of interfaces between product
155. age Space Management Report Figure 5 13 shows a sample of a space recapitulation record STORAGE SPACE MANAGEMENT REPORT DD Form 805 is used to determine how much space is available for storage operations and how much space is currently being used Armywide From this information the DA procures assigns and controls its storage space You will complete YT Ay 22187 o n remm OF NUMBER S TOTAL GROSS SQUARE FEET IN OPUN AREA aane Om _ ee L1 2 ____ ALL 90008 UNCLABB NON DOD OR TOTAL umom oe cocum fume 00008 18 THRU 16 ITEM te Figure 5 13 Sample space recapitulation record 5 21 FM 10 15 this report once or twice a year depending on the installation to which your unit is assigned AR 740 1 Table 6 1 lists all Army installations and their reporting times To make filling out the report easier you should examine all recent storage space status reports These reports will provide most of the information you need DD Form 805 covers the total amount of your assigned storage space even if this space is temporarily being used for other purposes However you DO NOT report storage space used for Bulk petroleum oils and lubricants
156. age area is generally used for items that are too large or too heavy to be placed in covered storage areas or on shelves 5 1 FM 10 15 Section II Making a Storage Layout STORAGE LAYOUT A storage layout is a floor plan of the storage area or building that shows where the columns stairs elevators latrines and doors are located Use the layout to help you plan where to place storage and working areas shelves and offices The amount of time you need to spend in setting up the floor plan depends on the kinds of supplies your DSU stores and the types of facilities you have to use as storage areas Before you begin to plan the storage layout use your microfiche reader to check the physical security arms ammunition and explosives security and the risk or pilferage code of all of the items you will be storing This code is listed on the AMDF Check the NSN of all items to see if they fall into any of the SEC categories Sensitive and pilferable items require special controls when they are stored and moved Figure 5 1 describes some of the types of items that come under these categories You can find a complete listing in CDA Pamphlet 18 1 AR 740 1 Chapter 6 also gives instructions on how to store these kinds of items Because your DSU receives irregular demands and large numbers of different supplies the stock positions are always changing To help you move the sup plies through the receipt storage and issue sections
157. al inventory Before you begin the inventory you must take certain actions You must make a physical location survey to ensure all supplies are in the correct locations and the locations match the locator deck You must make sure all identification labels and bin placards are correct You must also post all new data before you begin the survey To do this you and the accountable officer should work with the receiving section to setup a cutoff date for posting changes to the locator file If you are operating under SARSS 1 I automated system ensure that all personnel respon sible for operating the TACCS SARSS equipment are familiar with the automated procedures as outlined in ADSM 18 L19 AJH BUR EM NOTE It is particu larly important that bar code readers be inspected for operational readiness prior to training and conduct of inventory Also ensure that you have enough batteries on hand to power the bar code readers You should develop a plan or update the written SOP for conduct ing the inventory and the location survey The plan should include the following Atime frame schedule for the location survey Cutoff dates for the receiving storage shipping stock location and data processing sections so that records can be brought up to date before the survey and the inventory Atime frame schedule for the inventory Appointment of a survey supervisor Organization and appointment ofthe survey team You should tell how
158. ally TM 38 L32 11 and TM 38 L32 13 give details on how to prepare a manual request for follow up Take emergency follow up action if the situation is urgent and there is no record of the original requisition at the supply source RECONCILE DUF OUTS WITH SUPPORTED UNITS Every two weeks automated systems produce a customer DO reconciliation list of outstanding DOs as of a cutoff date and receipt issue and cancellation actions since the last reconciliation TM 38 L32 11 and 38 L32 13 describe how to process this list Your tasks are listed below Schedule a cutoff date for validation and reconciliation of open e Have unit soldiers compare DO listings with their document register Ensure that reconciliations are performed biweekly during peacetime Have supported units confirm a continued need and either verify or cancel part of the quantity requested Provide supported units with the latest status information on their requests 054 does this automatically Identify any DOs that were omitted from the automated listing Process customer requests for cancellation DIRECT PERSONNEL TO PROCESS MANUAL OFF LINE REPLENISHMENT REQUISITIONS 054 will automatically generate replenishment requisitions to the next higher supply source and establish DIs for ASL stocks when the ROP is reached or penetrated However off line manual FM 10 15 replenishment is possible In the case of non NSN requisitions it is oft
159. ances for exterior walls The clearances dependon the types of supplies to be stored Set aside and mark storage areas for hazardous and flammable supplies FOR BIN AND BULK AREAS a0 Analyze commodity characteristics size weight and shape of supplies Determine number of line items to be stored Determine volume of items to be stored Find out what types of storage aids are available Find out what types of MHE are available Determine the amount of space needed for each bin or bulk area FOR STORAGE SUPPORT FUNCTION AREAS Determine space required for preservation packaging and packing area Determine the space required for receiving area Determine space required for assembly shipping and issue area Allocate office space Assign space for smoking area within storage facility Compute total space required for storage support functions FOR SIZES AND TYPES OF AISLES Determine need for fire aisles Determine need for main aisles Determine need for cross aisles Determine need for bin aisles Determine locations and sizes of warehouse doors and columns Determine quantities types and turnover rates of supplies to be stored Determine types and sizes of MHE to be used Sketch storage layout plan FM 10 15 CROSS AISLE OFPICE OFFICE LATRINE LATRINE LOCKER LOCKER ROOM ROOM NI VIN CROSS AISLE 4409
160. and ASL listings and on customer receipt documents e Ensure that balances recorded on the covered in TMs 38 L32 12 and 38 L32 13 Your property book page include items in laundry or maintenance as well as those on the shelves e Indicate whether each item is to be reported by NSN or size Require a 1 reconciliation of records with documented personnel losses e Conduct causative research as required e Account for overages and shortages and for lost damaged or destroyed p erty according to AR 735 5 and DA Pamphlet 102 1 Chapter 9 MANAGE A SELF SERVICE SUPPLY CENTER Any SSA that stocks low cost fast movin Class II and IV expendable and durable CT 50 970 items may operate an SSSC if the com mander authorizes one You may be assigned to manage that 555 The SRO supervises 555 operations They are described in DA Pamphlet 710 22 Chapter 13 054 SSSC procedures are 2 20 tasks are listed below e Setup a register to control issue of DA Forms 3733 R Golf Service Supply Center Account Card or plastic charge cards e Dvelop an external SOP for customer use to include such data as hours of operation and purchase procedures e Ensure_tha items meet stockage criteria Sed Table 2 10 e Review Class II and IV stock status reports and CTA 50 970 to identify items that should be added or removed from the SSSC Do this at least once every three months NOTE Selection of SSSC stocks is manual Stock control sol
161. and classified or sensitive items may need special handling or storage Follow special storage requirements explained in DOD 4145 19 R 1 and FM 10 14 Section I Overview LOCATION AND STORAGE AIDS Make sure all bin items in the combat ASL are uploaded at all times Review these items periodi cally to ensure storage space is being used properly Do not store a small item such as a l inch fuse in an area the size of a footlocker Consider size and quantity of items as you choose storage locations and storage aids Also consider the quantity of a given ASL line Use the RO quantity as a minimum when you choose a storage aid Pallets bins shelving frames unit deploy ment storage containers CONEXs and forward logistics exchange pallets are readily available through normal supply channels Many new aids are being developed and tested Your choice of storage aids will depend on what is available or authorized for your organization The storage aids discussed in this chapter are not the only aids that you might use for a particular vehicle LOCATION SYSTEM Combat ASL is maintained in a mobile or load ready configuration Use the location system the same as in any other storage area The system must allow identification of MPL stocks and command essential items and their segregation from nonessential items Normal storage func tions such as rewarehousing and location updating must be performed You must give particular attention t
162. are respon sible for storing and protecting many kinds of supplies Some of the items such as end items repair parts ammunition petroleum products subsistence and classified and sensitive items may need special handling or may require special storage facilities DOD 4145 19 R 1 and this FM explain the storage requirements for these special kinds of items You will need to keep these require ments in mind when you setup your storage areas STORAGE SPACE Be sure an area has proper drainage before you use it for storage Adequate drainage protects the supplies from water damage and lets you maneuver MHE more easily Even if you have proper drainage in a storage area you still need to use some type of dunnage when you place supplies on the ground As storage supervisor you will be working with covered and open storage space Covered Covered storage space is space within any facility that has a roof This includes buildings sheds or any other covered areas that are used for storing supplies or that are assigned for storage operations It can also include hangars Quonset huts and other stationary units Open Open storage space is any improved or unimproved open area that is used for storing supplies An improved area is one that is graded or topped with concrete tar or gravel Open storage areas should be used for supplies that are not affected by adverse weather conditions and changes in temperatures This type of stor
163. arehouse denial is a written notice your storage section makes when all or part of the requested supplies is not on hand 16 SUPPLEMENTARY SIG COST OETAIL ACCOUNT NUMBER 1 I N 1 ITEM DESCRIPTION NYNA YO 3055 1 3 lt 5 m 1 stom ROUTING 7 JOENTIFIE NUMBER Yo EGET UT __ K4FB63 6 4637 re omnes maer emt PATET L TIM SNOLLIO3 j E El Nu ma QUANTITY XE D HN temm 92664 SUPPLEMENTARY 00 E PARTIAL Mal SIGNATURE 3809 C se 0 0 0 0 0 00 REDE em lem mug mod nd DETAIL ACCOUNT NUMBER HE IM PRICE t 3755 il S052 4u223N 2 012 a das 2 Figure 8 16 MROsS corrected to show partial issue of requested 8 15 FM 10 15 This notice goes to the issue section and the SCS You need to make sure your personnel are careful when they check for the supplies When they issue an MRD
164. arried on a vehicle and the size of the storage aid you choose will dictate the number of storage aids you need for that vehicle VEHICLES You may use one or more of the following vehicles listed in Table 12 1 for storing and transporting combat ASL items You are not limited to those listed No matter which vehicle you use you must be able to compute the usable cubic feet for both bulk and bin items In com puting storage space t you must first decide whether you will use the vehicle for bin or for bulk storage As a rule vans are more suitable for bin storage Stake and flatbed trucks are more suitable for bulk items However you may use both for bin and bulk storage Three different types of vehicles are described below to show you how to make the best use of storage capacity with 122 Table 12 1 Vehicles for storing and transporting ASL items VEHICLE DESCRIPTION M750 M129 series M127 series M871 MILVAN 6 ton semitrailer van 12 ton semitrailer van 12 ton semitrailer 22 5 ton flatbed semitrailer MILVAN with chassis storage aids To make the best use of cargo capacity you must select storage aids suited to the combat ASL items 12 Ton M129A2C Semitrailer Van This van is 29 72 feet long 8 feet wide and 6 3 feet high as shown in Figure 12 1 To determine the total usable storage capacity of the vehicle multiply the length by the width by the height For the vehicle shown in Figure
165. arry out the issue shipping activities efficiently if your customer units are to receive their supplies on time in the quantity requested and in usable condition You must select an issue shipping section supervisor to help you carry out your duties Be sure to explain the supervisor s duties in the issue shipping portion of your storage section SOP Your duties are listed below See that all necessary documents are received with the supplies Make sure your personnel use these docu ments to verify the quantity condition and desti nation of the supplies Report all discrepancies and put all supplies in question in a holding area until your personnel are able to make the changes e Make sure your personnel put the supplies in the correct customer bin at the pickup point Maintain the customer notification log Consolidate and pack supplies for other DSUs Make sure all issue documents are completed correctly and sent to the SCS daily Process protect and store supplies held in the issue section until customers pick them up or until they are shipped ISSUE SHIPPING SECTION Personnel in the issue shipping section are the only part of the storage section who deal with the customer on a face to face basis They receive requested items from the warehouse with an MRO They use the MRO to determine which unit ordered the supplies After your personnel notify a unit that its supplies are ready to be picked up th
166. as items to the laundry and renovation platoon FM10 15 Send unserviceable items and scrap through salvage channels to a defense reutilization and marketing office Notify the intelligence officer of any captured items Release captured items which are of no military value to civil affairs units for distribution to civilian agencies involved in relief programs ESTABLISH AND OPERATE A CIF Upon mobilization operation and control of AAFES clothing sales stores in overseas theaters will be transferred to the military when the MACOM determines that civilians operating the sales stores should be evacuated During peacetime you may be tasked to establish a CIF According to AR 710 2 Chapter 2 only one CIF may be established on an installation Personnel to operate the CIF must be authorized by TOE MTOE or TDA Your tasks are listed below Use DA Pamphlet 710 2 1 Chapter 10 to determine CTA 50 900 items authorized for stockage Stockage may be limited to recoverable items only Compute stockage according to AR 710 2 Chapter 2 and DA Pamphlet 7102 1 Chapter 10 NOTE Stockage must be recomputed at least semiannually by CIFs supported by automated systems and annually by those supported nonautomated systems Develop a CIF SOP for supported units See Appendix for a sample SOP Develop an external SOP for supported units Schedule issue and turn in for units or individuals Supervise or coo
167. ase of fire walls around each collapsible fabric tank Absorbents adsorbents and detergents Truck vacuum pump Bulldozers Sand barrels ON WATER Floating containment booms Chemica dispersants Watercraft Containment systems Absorbents adsorbents and detergents LJLJL Lu BLOCK OF SECTIONS 180 150 SECTION SECTIONI SECTION BLOCK 30 50 BLOCK SECTION SECTION SECTION 30 Figure 3 3 Storage layout for 5 gallon cans FM 10 15 FM 10 15 BLOCK OF SECTIONS 9 FOOT AISLES t UNIT N 150 SECTION SECTION 30 30 BLOCK SECTION SECTION SECTION BLOCK lt 70 gt SECTION SECTION SECTION hi Figure 3 4 Storage layout for 55 gallon drums Ju UU UU ut BLOCK OF SECTIONS SECTION EX 10 31 19 8888 UU UL PUN LE JU LE UU 00000 252 10 1000000 00 Figure 3 5 Storage layout for 500 gallon collapsible drums 3 10 FM 10 15 Table 3 6 Inspection checklist Are drums stored on their sides This prevents rainwater from collecting and rusting container tops and seeping through bungs to contaminate the product Are the bungs positioned horizontally Do drum bungs and vents face outward This makes it easier to detect leaks Are pallets or dunnage and tarpaulins used to store and cover containers that are stored outside Are different products and grades stored separately
168. at steps 3 Place material onto conveyor system Personnel Required Stock Picker Equipment Required Stock Picker s Cart with Ladder Figure 3 Small Bags and or Tote Pans 4 After selection operation a Travel to document pick up point for next assignment b Return stock pickers cart unused bags tote pans to designated area once per day c Clean up work area once per day Special Instructions Issues can be made from drawers cartons or shelves located in the bin storage area Normally the bins are 36 x 18 x 12 or less in size Small items should be placed in bags Jiffy with the document attached wherever possible at the time of pulling stock item not at packer s work station Guidance is furnished under Chapter 21 Joint Storage and Material Handling Manual on proper utilization of bin spaces Figure 4 4 Issue method page extracted from TM 743 200 3 C1 FM 10 15 1 1 gt r i t 1 I Figure 4 5 Five character stock locator code applied to repair parts van C1 FM 10 15 SIZE NO1 SIZENO2 SIZE NO 4 SIZE NO5 SIZE NO 3 1 2 BOXES 4 BOXES 5 BOXES 3 BOXES SIZE NO 6 6 BOXES i m 0 0 m m m m E D m m mT
169. at were loaded at the supply source and were improperly packed by the cargo con signee with original seals intact ARs 12 12 735 5 and 735 11 2 explain when and how to use the form Use SF 361 Transportation Discrepancy Report to report overages shortages and lost or damaged mili tary freight due to transportation type discrepancies AR 55 38 explains how to use this form Your tasks are listed below Report all discrepancies to your supply opera tions office Ensure storage personnel have placed damaged supplies or supplies in question in a holding area Ensure the ROD is prepared within time stan dards listed in AR 735 5 Review AR 735 5 carefully to determine if the discrepancy is subject to a dollar limitation Only discrepancies valued at more than 100 per line item will be processed further However for those from contractor manufacturers or vendors regardless of dollar value you will initiate an ROD Report discrep ancies pertaining to classified materiel or protected items on SF 364 regardless of dollar value or condi tion Discrepancies involving COMSEC items must be reported on SF 153 COMSEC Material Report Adjust account records on DD Form 1487 DOD Materiel Adjustment Document REVIEW STORAGE LAYOUT PLANS AND USE OF STORAGE SPACE Plan storage area layouts carefully so that sup plies are processed efficiently through receipt storage and issue cycles DOD 4145 19 R 1 and list gu
170. ata from receipt document 6 13 FM 10 15 CHAPTER 7 RECEIVING SUPPLIES RESPONSIBILITIES supplies enter a DSU at the receiving point of the storage section They come from the next higher source of depot GSU or instal lation or from another DSU as customer turn ins Your job is to make these supplies ready for issue as soon as possible by coordinating the actions of all the sections in the storage activity Set up guidelines for your soldiers to follow as they receive and process supplies You will need to contact the SCS for information on all items clue in so that you can plan to receive and store the supplies The Sch can tell you the approximate date the supplies will arrive the type and quan tity and the security data Coordinate this infor mation with storage transportation receiving parking and inspection personnel Remember at your receiving section soldiers will also have to work with the quality assurance and main tenance sections when items need to be identified and classified Plan your guidelines carefully Your first priority will be to keep your soldiers from being injured and the supplies from being damaged or lost You must also avoid extra cost to the caused by keeping railcars or trucks past the time limits set for loading and unloading when government transportation 1s not used This holdover cost is called demurrage RECEIPT DOCUMENTS 411 supplies that come to your DSU will have s
171. atus of requisitions materiel re turns force modernization Direct Support System ac tivity performance reports commander s summaries Logistics Control Activity services New Cumberland customer complaints transportation and requisitions Policy guidance on ARs 710 2 and 735 5 DA Pam phlets 710 4 and 710 5 and TC 43 4 Procedural guidance on DA Pamphlets 710 2 1 and 710 2 2 DSN 932 4725 586 5823 5824 5825 586 5705 2354 977 6503 6192 977 6842 687 6626 6628 Telephone Number Commercial 616 961 4725 415 561 5823 5824 5825 415 561 5705 2354 717 770 6503 6192 717 770 6842 804 734 6626 6628 Activity DLSC Logistics Control Activity LCA Customer Plans and Operations Division New Cumberland Army Depot Logistics Evaluation Agency 05 Army Quartermaster Center and School 4 C1 FM 10 15 Sacramento customer com plaints Management Information Research Assistance Center Substitute NSNs item identifications pricing errors AMDF code prob lems Procedural guidance on petroleum US Army Quartermaster Center and School TAMMS DA Pamphlet 738 750 2 DSN 839 2705 977 7431 74321 7433 687 6668 1368 687 3767 5838 745 3690 4110 Telephone Number Commercial 916 388 2705 717 770 7431 7432 7433 804 734 6668 1368 804 734 3767 800 258 9440 Outside Virginia 800 552 4820 Inside Virginia 8
172. bution Requests for these publications must be submitted to Commander US Army Logistics Center ATCL SRR Fort Lee Virginia 23801 5036 TRAINING CIRCULARS 11 6 43 4 References 6 Grounding Techniques Commanders and Shop Officers Guide for Support Maintenance Management AR 380 19 DA Form 5504 DA Form 5977 R DD Form 1348 1 A Blue DD Form 1348 A Brown DD Form 1348 1A Red DOD 4130 2 M MCRL C1 FM 10 15 With this change 10 new references are added Information Systems Security Maintenance Request Data Analysis Summary LRA DOD Single Line Item Release Receipt Document With Address Label DOD single Line Item Release Receipt Document Used to identify PDs 04 08 DOD Single Line Item Release Receipt Document Used to identify PDs 01 03 Incl all NORS ANORS Federal Catalog System Policy Manual Master Cross Reference List The following manuals are not available through normal distribution Request for these publications must be submitted to Commander Combined Arms Support Command ATTN ATCL SRR Fort Lee Virginia 23801 6000 AUTOMATED DATA SYSTEMS MANUALS 18 L19 AJH BUR EM 18 L19 AJH BUR UM Standard Army Retail Supply System SARSS 1 1 End User Manual Standard Army Retail Supply System SARSS 1 1 Users Manual NOTE Technical manuals in the 38 L32 series are now available through distribution References 7 FM 10 15 INDEX Address Directory oret deb 6 7
173. changes Require that semiannually flowmeters be verified CONTROL PIPELINE CORROSION If you are a platoon leader in a petroleum pipeline and terminal operating company you will be tasked to develop or review a corrosion control program to prevent fuel contamination Corrosion control procedures are prescribed in TM 5 678 and MIL HDBK 201B Your tasks are listed below Require that soldiers inspect the pipeline and manifold system weekly for signs of corrosion or deterioration Have corrosion inhibitors in petroleum pro ducts tested semiannually for effectiveness according to procedures in FM 10 20 Require that soldiers apply protective paint to the pipeline according to procedures in TM 5 678 FM 10 15 FORWARD AREA REFUELING EQUIPMENT FARE 1 APPLICABILITY This load is suitable for the CH 47 helicopter at speeds of 100 KIAS 2 LOAD DESCRIPTION a Forward area refueling equipment FARE consisting of 1 Generator 1 5kW 1 each 2 Hoses fuel with reels 2 each 3 Hoses fuel with carrying bags 2 each 4 Assembly pump 1 each 5 Extinguishers fire 3 each b LIN H94824 weight 820 pounds 3 MATERIALS a Net helicopter cargo carrying external 5 000 pound capacity b Webbing nylon 1 2 inch tubular Cord nylon type Ill 4 PERSONNEL Two men can prepare and rig this load in 15 minutes 5 PREPARATION 8 Secure two fire extinguishers to inside frame of fuel hos
174. cks in DSUs or GSUs until they can be issued as interchangeable or substitute items or until their price exceeds the amount prescribed in AR 710 2 Chapter 3 Your tasks are listed below Review and carry out disposition and retention policies for ARIs material return 1 2 program items field returns and captured and unwanted material Review the current DI file list Select DIs to be canceled Select the most recent DIs with the lowest priority first e Have stock control soldiers process materiel release confirmation cards shipping documents if required and possible partial cancellations 054 processing instructions are in 38 132 13 Request disposition instructions as directed by your command COORDINATE AND MONITOR STOCK ACCOUNTING AND STOCK CONTROL OPERATIONS If you do not know the NSN of an item or if an item is not listed on contact the following Management Information Research Assistance Center US Army Materiel Command Catalog Data Activity New Cumberland Army Depot New Cumberland PA 17070 5010 AUTOVON 977 7431 COMMERCIAL 717 782 7431 As the supply operations officer you must periodi tally review the preparation and submission of stock accounting and stock control records kept by your materiel control specialists Your ability to review stock records and listings produced by your MMC or SCS will help improve supply responsive ness to supported units
175. covery and evac uation operations Briefs search and recovery soldiers Issues personal effects bags human remains pouches NBC agent tags record of recovery of remains and statement of recognition forms 2 23 FM 10 15 Monitors search and recovery team operations Supervises emergency burials Determines specific burial sites Coordinates approval of burials evacua tion operations engineer support and security of area with next higher HQ Forwards burial sketch and map overlay through next higher Search and Recovery Team The search and recovery team searches assigned areas for remains and personal effects and marks location of remains The team also Collects personal effects Records location of remains and personal effects Recovers remains 2 24 Checks booby traps and contaminated or contagious remains Makes initial identification Tags remains with the correct search and recovery tag Attaches NBC tag or tag marked with a large C to contaminated or contagious remains Shrouds remains 5 a record of recovery of remains and record of effects Prepares a recovery site sketch of recovery site and a map overlay of the site Evacuates remains to a GRREG collection point temporary cemetery or mortuary Performs emergency burials Prepares and marks the grave site Buries remains ensuring that US allied and
176. csssssesssscosossosessssesosesssscsscestesorssnscesconataesenesnsscoereaccoes 5 18 Vertical Space in eo qe dev Hon Dn ld dme sere isse 5 18 Section IV CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 7 X CHAPTER 8 Section I C1 FM 10 15 Page Reporting Storage Space Responsibilities 5 19 Space Allocation 5 19 Planograph 5 19 Storage Space Survey Work Sheet 0 40 5 20 Storage Space Status 5 21 Space Recapitulation 5 21 Storage Space Management 1 4 4 1 111200 4 4 40 0 00 0 1 1 444 19 1006 5 21 SETTING UP AND MAINTAINING STOCK LOCATOR SYSTEM Using the System 6 1 Setting Up the Locator 6 1 Marking Locations RR 6 5 Setting Up the Locator File 6 7 Maintaining the Locator File eerie nennen entente nennen 6 7 Making Location 6 8 Making Location Site Forms 6 10 RECEIVING SUPPLIES Responsibilit
177. d Order Department Tandem Station New York NY 10019 11 84IPPED FROM other CODE DA8E0183 0001 0001 CB L 3 1075 2 SMiPMENT 8007 39 ADMINISTERED Products Division Eastern Troy NY 12100 18 SHIPPED CODE 14 MARKEO FOR 34th Supply Company Fort Blank NJ 07891 38 STOCK PART DESCRIPTION indicate number of shipping containers of cantelner container number 6850 00 865 B584 Silicone Compound Silicone plus toluene petroleum spirits basic ingredientn 24446 DR FILM 88 gal per PROCUNEMENT QUALITY ASSURANCE D DESTINATION ACCEPTANCE ef thted Heer has been made by me under My supervision end they Conform fo contract x Cee m rated herein or documents A ORIGIN ACCEPTANCE of Hestad iterns tear mad Jy OT Under pnd tha eonfarm to contract noted herein on pepporting documents CL a SIG ATURE OF AUTH GOVT REF J Doaks 8022000 22 CONTRACTOR USE ONLY DATE DATE TYPED AND TITLE REPLACES COITION OF 1 AUG 7 WHICH BE USED 250 17 1 176 20 SMip RECO UNIT UNIT PRICE uL 10 15 8 ACCEPTANCE POINT D Supp P 2765 5 DISCOUNT TERMS Procurement Division Bldg P 1172 Fort Blank NJ 07891 1
178. d enter the code in block F on the DD Form 1348 1 If this block already has the nine digit depot location code listed they should write your DSU location code in block 10 If the DD Form 1348 1 lists the wrong location code cross it out and write the correct location in block 10 When your unit is operating under SARSS the receipt document will NOT contain a storage location When the receipt is processed into SARSS the system will produce a location issue ticket which will identify how much of the receipt to store and all recorded storage locations Also the receipt should be entered into the SARSS computer before moving items to storage since the system will produce the necessary documents should due out release be required Entering the receipt before moving to storage eliminates double handling of stocks Storage personnel should go to the location listed and compare the information on the receipt document with the data on the bin label or locator placard They must compare the NSNs UI codes nomenclatures if listed and condition codes to make sure they are putting the supplies in the right location Next they should com pare the supplies with the items already in the location to make sure they are the same If data on the receipt document match those on the bin tag or location placard compare the supplies If the supplies are alike this is the right location for the items Before your personnel put the items in storage they mus
179. d on whether requests are for ASL or NSL items and on the number of items in stock You must make sure your SSA stocks the line items demanded as part of your ASL and that stocks are on hand to fill requests upon demand DA objectives and acceptable management levels are prescribed in AR 710 2 Chapter 1 The formulas for measuring demand satisfaction is covered later in this chapter DETERMINE AND MONITOR ASL SIZE Your main concern is that your SSA will be able to supply supported units upon demand or within acceptable time limits The problem is that your 55 cannot stock all demand supported items and still remain mobile Table 1 1 lists ASL stockage criteria Your tasks are listed below Review the ASL semiannually for potential reductions in range Monitor the quarterly ASL continually to determine and drop nonessential lines Review action codes on the ASL change list which recommend addition deletion or retention of items 054 makes automatic increases to ASL lines Analyze the impact of stockage level changes on movement and storage requirements Ask the supply manager to set minimum RO and ROP quantities so that automated supply systems will not be adjusted below the set minimum 14 FM 10 15 Table 1 1 ASL stockage criteria The following items qualify for stockage Demand supported items ninerecurring demands in the most recent 360 day period to stock and three demands to retain NOTE item
180. d or New Loc and the prime location code in block 15 on DA Form 2765 Figure 6 11 shows the DA Form 2765 completed as a new location card Figure 6 12 shows the form completed as a location change card Automated Procedures Try to have only one location for each item If you need to delete change or add a location make sure your soldiers use the correct procedures for your type of automated system Most automated systems use DA Form 2765 or DA Form 2000 3 to make changes Most of the data you will need to fill out these cards are in the locator file or deck Sometimes due to electrical or equipment problems you may have to make a manual location change Use DA Form 2765 to make such a change TM 38 L32 12 gives step by step procedures for making automated and manual loca tion change requests Most automated systems use DA Form 2000 3 as a stock locator card This card is machine printed and filed in the locator deck in NSN order The DSUs which operate using SARSS 1 I will update the locator file through the location main tenance process This process provides the capability to change existing locations and establish new ones SARSS will allow you to have up to five different storage locations The location maintenance process consists of keyboard entries It requires no preparation of manual YDL cards C1 FM 10 15 NOTE These locations are maintained by SARSS the capability of creating bin labels NOTE This therefore there
181. d out how much money is open Prepare monthly statements of financial operations Supervise the required semiannual inven tory Set a cutoff date for postings to journals Prepare a DA Form 4697 to adjust financial records to the inventory totals Publish and distribute the semiannual SSSC list This list may be updated monthly FM 10 15 COORDINATE LAUNDRY BATH AND RENOVATION OPERATIONS Division units must be augmented to provide CEB services Supply and service DS units have organic sections authorized CEB sections provide showers and clothing exchange bring soiled clothing back to be laundered and make such repairs on clothing and tents as prescribed by FM 10 16 If your unit operates in the corps or COMMZ you may have to supervise field laundry and renovation services as well as CEB opera tions Your tasks are listed below Review the SOP FM 10 280 Appendix provides a sample Update the records and reports requirements portions of that SOP as applicable Reconnoiter and select the general operating site To save time colocate the laundry and renova tion sections See Approve the CEB layout Figure 2 8 shows a sample layout Request operating supplies and initial CEB float stocks Arrange for water shipments through your supply operations office if no adequate water supply is available Coordinate laundry and bath schedules Notify supported units of the schedules and of an
182. d their destination Write the date shipped released in the Date Shipped block block 12 Write one of the following control or ship ment numbers in block 14 Transportation control number Government bill of lading number Commercial bill of lading number Airway bill number Ensured or registered parcel post number Motor vehicle number Send Copies 2 and 3 with the supplies The original copy of the DD Form 1348 1 will be retained as the supply copy Mail Copy 5 to the address shown in block B Figure 9 8 is an example of a correctly prepared MRO and disposal release order your shipping clerk sends to the SCS PREPARING TRANSPORTATION DOCUMENTS The chief of your issue shipping section arranges for the transportation of the supplies The two kinds of transportation used to ship items from 0505 are organic and installation FM 10 15 Organic Transportation The DSU or your supporting unit provides organic transportation When you use organic transportation your issue shipping section will need no transportation documents The only form needed to ship items by organic transportation is the release order Your shipping clerk should pull Copy 6 from the DD Form 1348 1 The driver will use this copy as a listing of the items being transported and their destinations Installation Transportation The installation where your DSU is located provides installation transportation You will need t
183. ded on the count cards Count cards list only prime locations Monitor the return of inventory count cards Verify that count cards have been sent to the MMC within seven days of the inventory cutoff date The MMC will produce a delinquent count card list daily until all count cards have been returned Perform causative research as required Review the inventory adjustment report list The MMC will automatically prepare a DA Form 444 Inventory Adjustment Report IAR for discrepancies of 50 or more COMPUTE LOCATION ACCURACY AND INVENTORY ACCURACY Use the following formula to compute how well inventory location records compare with the actual physical location of items on hand Mee tion Number of correct locations jy Location metal locations surveyed Accuracy DA Objective 98 Acceptable Level 95 FM 10 15 Table 2 5 Reasons for conducting a special inventory A credit balance is recorded negative balance A locator survey finds an item in an unrecorded location A location survey finds an item in the wrong location Evidence shows an illegal forced entry into a warehouse When this occurs all items stocked in the warehouse must be inventoried The SSA com mander will decide according to the situation which transactions the SSA will process and the period during which the SSA may not be operational The SRO SSA commander or other commanders in the SSA chain of command directs a
184. diers compute an EOQ RO However DS4 determines automatic replenish ment when the ROP is penetrated e Add or delete stock items from the semiannual SSSC list Delete items for which Table 2 10 SSSC stockage criteria Unit price is no more than 100 SEC must be U or M for hand tools Accounting requirements code must be X or D Recoverability code must be Z The second position of the MATCAT structure code must be 2 The first position class of supply of the SCMC must be 2 36 or 9 for AMC only Item must be on the ASL Item must be demand supported For an otherwise qualified item to be included in the SSSC stockage under the 054 the following must also apply must be serviceable Stockage list code must be Distribution of stockage code must be set at 6 there was no demand within the last 90 days and lack of demand is considered permanent Monitor stock control procedures 555 stocks may range from 15 to 30 days of supply Conduct inspections Review the inventory adjustment journal and customer deposit and withdrawal journal Supervise maintenance of accounting records Your involvement in SSSC accounting will depend on the degree of automation at your installation Prepare monthly statement of customer accounts Coordinate with the battalion S4 how much money the units have left to spend Coordinate with the finance office to fin
185. drop of supplies and equipment Provide control and return instructions for receiv ing and aviation units 9 Ensure that adjustment documents are prepared for damaged or loss of supplies and equipment and air item delivery equipment not recovered or damaged or destroyed 2 18 NOTE Turn in slings used in external air transport operations to the supporting supply element on DA Form 2765 1 Request for Issue or Turn In ESTABLISH A MAP POINT General support supply of standard maps and map products both classified and nonclassified are now logistical functions Unlike most other items of sup ply however quantities and types of maps and map products stocked are established in response to direc tives from unit intelligence and training elements rather than from past supply and consumption factors Maps are requisitioned from local installations or directly from the Defense Mapping Agency through depots in CONUS and overseas using SF 344 Multi use Standard Requisitioning Issue System Document Map quantities will vary depending Size and makeup of the envisioned task force Deployment phasing and security considerations Quantity and currency of map stocks presently on hand in unit basic loads Possible duration of the tactical operation Anticipated map shortfall and replenishment re quirements Replenishment of small scale maps 15 estimated at 50 percent of initial requirements Replen ishmen
186. drum filling point 500 gallon drum filling point First bottom loading point Bottom loading point NOTE Terrain and situation may alter the recommended distances e Supervise rigging and derigging of 500 gallon fuel drums by soldiers with MOS 77 See Figure 3 1 Also refer to FM 10 564 for additional guidance on rigging the 500 gallon fuel drum Ensure soldiers follow all safety measures NOTE Do not free fall airdrop a full collapsible drum Incorporate issue procedures from FM 10 69 Chapter 13 in your section SOP Total the daily issues listed on DA Form 3643 and enter the total on your daily stock status report Determine if loss or gain figures fall within the allowable loss or gain ranges Investigate any unacceptable range deviation immediately to determine the cause Ensure all safety measures are taken prior to receiving or issuing fuel INSPECT PETROLEUM TANK TRUCKS AND TANK SEMITRAILERS Use Table 3 3 to help identify and correct fuel handling component malfunctions on petroleum tank trucks and tank semitrailers If your unit is authorized petroleum tank vehicles your soldiers 4 PERSONNEL FM 10 15 must perform the daily PMCS identified in the applicable TMs before each operation Use Table 3 4 to check on the daily preventive main tenance required on tank vehicles VERIFY ACCURACY OF BULK PETROLEUM INVENTORY As the officer responsible for bulk petroleum stocks in Class III supp
187. ds There is one card for every NSN in stock These cards show the item s storage location UI and condition code You can find a list of the condition codes that the Army supply system uses and their explanations in AR 708 1 Chap ter 7 and AR 725 50 Table C 28 For manual locator files place the cards in NUN order When you file locator cards by NIIN order and the first two digits of the NIIN are the same file these cards in ascending order of the next three digits If your DSU operates using SARSS the location is maintained by the SARSS at the DSU When the SARSS interfaces with DS4 setting up and maintaining the locator file becomes a SARSS responsibility For more information on set ting up and maintaining the locator file see TM 38 L19 2 Chapter 4 If your DSU operates under the DS4 or SAILS automated systems file the cards in location sequence TMs 38 L32 12 and 38 L32 13 explain how to setup locator files under automated systems Other information can be added to the cards such as nomen clature expiration date and the CIIC The locator file will also have a card for each empty storage location You can use these cards when you assign new storage locations If your unit has no ADPE use DA Form 2765 Request for Issue or Turn In showing DIC YDL to make a temporary location card Send a stock location card also to the SCS and MMC The tempo rary location card will be maintained until the SCS and MMC provide a printed DA F
188. duction Log Daily Water Production Log Daily Water Issue Log Daily Water Distribution Log Water Point Daily Production Summary Water Point Daily Distribution Issue Summary Petroleum Sample Installation Inventory Count Card Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms Status Report Report of Class I Supplies Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet Maintenance Request Request for Issue or Turn In Request for Issue or Turn In Request for Issue or Turn In Request for Issue or Turn In Request for Issue or Turn In Subsistence Consumption Card Field Ration Issue Slip Daily Issues of Petroleum Products 3644 3645 3645 1 3733 R 3778 3779 3780 3781 3782 3783 3857 4697 4702 R 4766 R FM 10 15 Monthly Abstract of Issues of Petroleum Products and Operating Supplies Organizational Clothing and Individual Equipment Record Additional Organization Clothing and Equipment Record Self Service Supply Center Account Card Loose Issue Label Location Placard Pallet Count Check Unit of Issue Notice Suspended Notice Stock Change and or Physical Security Change Notice Commercial Deliveries of Bulk Petroleum Products Checklist Department of the Army Report of Survey Monthly Bulk Petroleum Accounting Summary Bath and Clothing Exchange Activity Record DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY LABEL 141 Open Box DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY PAMPHLETS 25 30 700 30 7102 1 710 2 2 710 4 710 5 738 750 Consolidated Index
189. e Aged due ins and due outs Monitor required delivery dates Notify procurement officer of overdue contract shipments Supplies received with commercial vendor s delivery ticket but no contract can be found Delay in issuing items Delay in paying commercial ven dors Loss of discounts Interest penalties on late payments Credit holds Appoint an NCO to search for the contract If investigation is unsuc cessful report problem to the sup ply operations office Shipment frustrated because of incorrect contract number mis taken quantities or COD orders shipped prepaid Supplies backlogged in receiving area Delay in supply fill Increase in MRDs Notify supply operations office and stock control section C1 FM 10 15 9 Ensure receiving reports are prepared promptly and submitted to your supply operations office for processing and input of data into the automated system Ensure that timely actions are taken to resolve frustrated shipments Monitor required delivery dates and begin fol low up action on overdue shipments from commercial vendors Alert the procurement officer to overdue contract shipments SUPERVISE UNLOADING TM 743 200 3 Chapter 2 lists step by step proce dures and soldiers and equipment needed to unload trucks trailers vans and railcars is a sample set of unloading procedures from the TM Your tasks are listed below Check with SCS soldier
190. e Log DA Form 1714 1 R Daily Water Distribution Log and DA Form 1717 R Water Point Daily Distribution Issue Summary for any unusual consumption by supported units Review data on monthly or quarterly activity reports required by higher HQ Make sure data is 2 16 accurate Check also for any indication of problem areas or inability to continue providing water supply support SUPERVISE RIGGING OF WATER DRUMS FOR EXTERNAL SLING LOADS Road nets may make it impossible to transport potable water to our soldiers in time by normal means There will be times when storage per sonnel will have to rig water drums for external helicopter sling load Soldiers with MOS 76Y or MOS 77W as well as all OM officers have received training in external transport operations Your tasks are listed below Coordinate time requirements and heli copter landing site with your battalion S4 supply operations officer and water section chief Determine rigging requirements They are shown in FM 55 4503 Sed Figure 2 6 Assign soldiers to rig the water drums inspect the rigging and guide the helicopter using proper hand and arm signals Provide derigging and distribution instruc tions to receiving units Stress that these units must recover and return the sling equipment to the sending unit for reuse C1 FM 10 15 ONE TO SIX 250 GALLON WATER DRUMS 1 APPLICABILITY This load is suitable for the UH 1 one drum at speeds
191. e at the top 73 feet long and 33 feet wide Require all section soldiers to inspect all fittings daily for slippage or signs of leaks They should also inspect all FSSP or FARE hoses daily for blisters nicks and cuts 3 16 Conduct night and day fire drills CONTROL PILFERAGE AND SABOTAGE Fake invoices and tanker trucks with false bottoms can be used to pilfer bulk petroleum Saboteurs can contaminate products Packaged products can be hidden in trash or salvage disposal drums You must devise a control program to prevent product loss Your tasks are listed below Locate vehicle turnaround areas near guarded security gate Require that all trucks entering and leaving the supply point pass through a security gate Permit only one way traffic Have section soldiers document all cargo according to DOD 4140 25 M and current regulations Require section supervisors to verify that no locks and seals have been tampered with before off loading and after loading Ensure that seals are applied whenever possible Require that any discrepancies in the amount of petroleum loaded or discharged from commercial trucks be reported at once to you or your section chief and investigate discretion Implement perimeter controls Initiate a parcel check system for packaged petroleum products Ensure physical security Use guards bar riers protective lighting entry control checks and intrusion detection devices
192. e services needed and report any problems or deficiencies promptly If your storage section is assigned MHE on a regular basis you must work with the maintenance activity to schedule the MHE for maintenance checks and repairs If the maintenance activity that supports your DSU is located a distance away you can sometimes request a contact team to come to your storage section to perform maintenance Teach your per sonnel that MHE is only as good as the care it receives Make sure that they use the correct operator s manuals as a guide when they perform minor maintenance NOTE PS Magazine articles give helpful tips on maintaining your MHE They also give telephone numbers that you can call for information and assistance You should file these magazines where your personnel can find them The January issue 11 6 beginning in 1981 contains an index of all items and problems discussed in articles during the previous year Before 1981 a separate index was printed each year To get back issues of PS Magazine contact Editor PS Magazine c o US Army Materiel Readiness Support Activity Lexington KY 40511 5101 As storage supervisor you must make sure your MHE operators are trained and licensed Only licensed operators can drive and operate the powered MHE You should keep a list of those in your DSU who have MHE licenses You may need to contact them in an emergency All powered MHE that your personnel use must have a fully c
193. e M871 breakbulk semitrailer Figures 12 3 and 12 4 is 29 83 feet long 8 feet wide and 4 feet high from the bed to the top of the sideboards Stake type vehicles adapt themselves more readily to bulk storage than to bin storage Under normal conditions storage aids will be stacked no more than two high Select a storage aid that will make best use of the M871 storage capacity This example uses FLEX pallets which can be used for both bin and bulk storage The standard FLEX pallet is 48 inches long 33 inches wide and 38 inches high Figure 12 5 shows the types of FLEX pallets The unit cube requirements of the ASL can often assist in the selection of the proper storage aid Each 12 4 type of FLEX pallet can support different types of line items depending on the unit cube of the ASL items Table 12 2 shows the unit cube and average line capacities for each FLEX pallet shown in Figure 12 5 To determine the cubic feet available in the storage aid follow the steps below Multiply the length by the height by the width For convenience first convert inches to feet Length x Width x Height 48 inches x 33 inches x 38 inches 4 feet x 2 75 feet x 3 17 feet 34 87 cubic feet FM 10 15 Som Nem HH gt figy ve Figure 12 3 The 22 5 ton M871 breakbulk semitrailer Figure 12 4 The 22 5 ton M871 breakbulk semitrailer with mesh FLEX pallets 12 5 FM 10 15 Class De
194. e reels with 1 2 inch tubular nylon webbing Secure the two fuel hose reels together with type nylon cord b Spread a 5 000 pound capacity net on the ground Center the two fuel hose reels on the net Place pump assembly on either side of reels Place a 1 5kW generator with 5 gallon gas can attached on the opposite side of reels Place fuel hose carrying bags in front of reels Secure the two carrying bags with the remaining fire extinguisher together with type ill nylon cord Secure net carrying bag to top of reels 6 RIGGING a Place four grabhooks onto apex fitting b Tape lifting legs of net with masking tape every 2 to 3 feet 7 HOOKUP Hookup man stands alongside load Figure 3 2 Sample extract from FM 55 450 1 of materials personnel and procedures required to rig the FARE 3 7 FM 10 15 Ensure that line scraper operations are conducted periodically to remove rust scale and other debris according to procedures in 10 20 Verify that sand traps have been cleaned CONTROL ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION Petroleum spills present a threat to your soldiers the mission and the environment Whether you are a petroleum platoon leader a supply platoon leader or a platoon leader in a terminal or pipeline operating platoon you must prepare or update an oil spill prevention control countermeasures plan according to CFR 40 AR 200 1 and oversea host nation regulations Include in your plan detailed descriptio
195. eam found for the item Figure the amount of money this overage or shortage represents by multiplying the dif ference by the unit price Write this figure on the count card If the quantities do not match he can still accept the count if the adjusted value is 50 or less and the 10 26 item does not have an SEC on the AMDF of 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 P Q or CDA Pamphlet 18 1 explains these codes REQUESTING A RECOUNT MANUAL PROCEDURES There are times when the inventory team count and the total listed on the accountable officer s control listing do not match This does not always require a recount Under certain conditions the count can still be accepted as valid However the accountable officer must have the items recounted when it is determined that the adjusted value is more than 50 or the item is sensitive or controlled To tell if the item is a sensitive or controlled item the accountable officer checks the item NSN on the monthly If the SEC column has 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 P or the item is sensitive or controlled The accountable officer checks the Recount box on the inventory count card and returns the card to you or the inventory super visor Figure 10 16 shows a count card marked for recount When a recount must be made you or the inventory supervisor needs to make up a new count card from the information on the control listing for each item to be recounted Be sure you number
196. eather condi tions and type of storage facilities Inspections include checks of preservation and packaging adequacy and the condition of unpackaged items and clothing Inspections also make sure that items with a shelf life date rubber cork neoprine and dry batteries are within time limits and that older stock is issued first Deficiencies uncovered by inspections are cor rected promptly under AR 740 3 the COSIS program Minor repair preservation and packing are limited to supplies in storage The COSIS program does not cover the receipt and shipment of supplies Major repairs are not part of the COSIS pro gram Items which require minor mechanical repair or adjustment or supplies which need repacking and preservation are classified con dition code E unserviceable These items are repaired by the storage activity or units when the costs do not exceed the limits set forth in AR 740 15 AR 740 3 covers the COSIS program and pro vides guidance on budgeting forecasting cyclic inspection and scheduling TMs 38 230 1 and 38 230 2 cover preservation packaging and packing of supplies and equipment D 1 FM 10 15 APPENDIX E JULIAN DATE CALENDAR PERPETUAL e s FM 10 15 FOR LEAP YEARS ONLY FM 10 15 APPENDIX F QUALITY CONTROL ASSURANCE PROGRAM INITIAL CHECKS AND INSPECTIONS On receipt of mat
197. ecause they are sectional you can relocate them with MHE whether they are empty or filled Use the guidelines below when you arrange shelf space or when you arrange bin and shelf boxes within shelves Place small lots in the center so that most items are in chest high position for easy picking Place heavy or large items toward the bottom with the slowest moving items on the lowest shelf Place light large items toward the top with the slowest moving items on the highest shelf Place single rows of shelves side to side along the walls if possible You should also use the space along walls for storing irregular items such as those with odd shapes or long handles Use posts and columns as bin boundaries so that no space is lost Place small bins in areas where powered MHE cannot fit but where manual MHE can move REAR EXIT BULK STORAGE FEET STORAGE EE WORK AREA CUSTOMER PICKUP BINS FRONT ENTRANCE GROSS SQUARE FEET 46 NET SQUARE FEET SFO Figure 5 5 of bin and bulk storage areas in a storage warehouse 5 10 GROSS SQUARE FEET xem S NET SQUARE FEET FM 10 15 GROSS SQUARE FEET and NET SQUARE FEET Figure 5 6 Typical layout of bin rows in a warehouse e Do not mix items in bins Store small loose items in boxes instead of directly on the shelves You can stack items in them since their walls support the items
198. edis 10 5 utc boe Let erui 6 7 6 8 SUEIVey 2 11 Mandatory parts lists 4 1 Manual replenishment 1 2 1 11 Manually prepared inventory count oe 10 14 through 10 16 Manually prepared stock location change CRISI 6 11 Map point 2 18 FM 10 15 Material Classified op abl ines 2 6 Sensitive Be Ah 2 6 Material return program items 1 2 Materiel control system 2 6 Materiel release card 7 10 MHE Choosing LiT dantur welded 11 1 Controlling 11 4 Maintaining 11 6 Nonpowered 11 3 Powered 11 1 MILVANmS x wey 9 16 1 2 Mixed 2 10 10 7 Mobile filling stations 3 6 Monthly PLL change lists 4 6 Monthly processes 1 4 MRD Fate c Spore PESOS 2 1 MRDs TSSUIN BG 8 19 Monitors Rv Ober e eDR 2 1 Processing 8 15 8 16 MRD troubleshooting chart 2 2 MROs Cutoff controls 10 13 Processing 8 10 through 8 13 Sorting by
199. eet Provide three fire extinguishers for each FARE system Fire extinguishers are not compo nents of the FARE system Used fire extin guishers should be taken to the nearest engineer unit for recharge or replacement on an RX basis Specify the amount and type of refueling support required Ensure all aircraft passengers disembark and disperse at least 50 feet from the aircraft during refueling ESTABLISH MOBILE FILLING STATIONS You can use the FARE to refuel motor convoys or ground vehicles Tank and pump units may also be used to support mobile filling stations See FM 10 69 for more information on FARE and tank and pump units Your tasks are listed below Require that refueling points be at least 25 feet apart Make it SOP that soldiers check the nozzle screens for dirt test the hose and take a visual sample from each nozzle Require FARE operators to check vehicle dispatch against vehicle markings Verify iden tification card of vehicle operator This is neces sary because no DA Form 2765 request document is required Include daily issues recorded on DA Form 3643 in the totals recorded each day on the monthly DA Form 3644 Monthly Abstract of Issues of Petroleum Products and Operating Supplies SUPERVISE HOSE LINE OPERATIONS Hose lines can transport from 500 to 550 barrels of fuel per hour over rough terrain where it would be costly to build roads and rail nets Hose lines relieve congestion on ro
200. eir shape or composition They may also require special storage because of their bulk Be sure the type of storage aid you use to stack these items can support the items easily Items included in this category are reels glass items and construction materials DOD 4145 19 R 1 gives instructions on storing unusual items STORAGE LAYOUT DRAWING The storage layout drawing is a floor plan showing the way the open or covered storage area is divided into different sections These sections can include storing and shipping areas aisles latrines and offices The floor plan shows the location of all columns posts exits and stairs It should also show the gross and net square footage of the areas Use the floor plan to help you decide the best places for storage areas working areas and storage aids Table 5 1 is a checklist for preparing a storage layout Use it to help you make the best use of your storage space Once you have a copy of the basic layout fill in the required 5 4 sections These sections include the bins bulk pallet rack other storage areas work areas and aisles Figure 5 2 shows samples of a basic floor plan and a prepared storage layout Estimate the amount of space you need for different areas by using past storage reports that show item quan tities sizes and demand rates Estimate the amount of work space you will need by the amount of activity that will be in each area The locator file area for example may
201. el will generally handle several kinds of MRO documents They are DA Form 2765 DD Form 1348 1 PCN AJH 101 and PCN AJH 102 Use DA Form 2765 for items currently in stock Use DD Form 1348 1 to issue items that were not available when the request was processed when the supplies are shipped and transfers are made between stock record accounts and when items are turned into the Defense Reutilization and Marketing Office If your DSU operates under 054 check TM 38 L32 12 for guidelines on how to process If your DSU operates under SARSS 1 I see ADSM 13 L19 AJH BUR UM for procedures on the use of MRO forms Your personnel can tell when these forms are used as MROs by checking the letters in the Document Identifier block An MRO has an A5 series Document Identifier Code These codes and their explanations are listed in AR 725 50 Appendix G MRO codes are A51 52 A54 55 A57 A5B ABD and ABE Table 8 1 lists the amount of time your DSU is given to process each MRO according to its PD PROCESSING A DA FORM 2765 MATERIEL RELEASE ORDER When your personnel receive a DA Form 2765 MRO from the SCS there are steps they should take These steps are described in this paragraph Check the locator deck for the correct location code if the MRO does not show a storage location and write this code in block C on the DA Form 2765 Check the data on the MRO against the data on the bin stock tags Also check t
202. en necessary On an exception basis such issues may be needed to replenish a forward DSU storage site when automatic replenishment is blocked For example requisi tions for ASL replenishment may be blocked for controlled items by a manager introduced block age parameter card Another reason to process off line requisitions may be the need to obtain more stocks to meet seasonal change require ments TM 38 L32 13 explains manual replenish ment procedures for SSAs under DS4 MONITOR TURN IN OF RECOVERABLE AND AUTOMATIC RETURN ITEMS Each month automated systems generate a recoverable item control list of recoverable items for which no turn ins are recorded or for which turn ins with no corresponding issue are recorded TM 38 L32 13 explains how to process this list Each quarter a list of ARIs is distributed along with the AMDF Its purpose is to speed up the retrograde of selected reparable and recoverable secondary items and repair parts in critical supply AR 710 1 Chapter 3 prescribes ARI policies and procedures Table 1 6 explains ARI codes The ARI code is a one position alphabetic code indicating items in a critical stock position which may be returned to CONUS depots without receipt of disposition instructions Your tasks are listed below Review several months listings of recover able items to identify situations in which follow up actions are required Contact supported units to ask the status of pending turn ins
203. en storage areas by the location of the access roads Because of the layout of roads and changes in terrain each storage area presents different problems in layout planning However the same general storage principles used in storing supplies in covered areas also apply to open areas Figure 5 3 is a sample of a typical open storage layout Remember that your storage layouts must be flexible so they can be adapted to the constant changes in quantities and sizes of stocked items Use the guidelines below when planning open storage layouts e Allow 20 to 30 feet for aisles so that soldiers can operate rough terrain forklift trucks and cranes for handling heavy supplies e Ensure that easy access and transportation can be provided for each type of item stored Stack supplies according to their packaging weight shape and turnover rate for stability Limit stack heights to the lift capacity of your MHE and to the stability of the stacks Cover supplies that require protection from the elements with tarpaulins Provide adequate drainage to keep supplies from being water damaged Use dunnage on all ground level storage if supplies can be harmed by standing water or ground moisture Figure 6 3 Typical open storage layout Keep the aisles as straight as possible from the unloading point to storage Reserve storage space next to railroad tracks for very heavy stock so that cranes can be used TENT STORAGE L
204. enemy soldiers are buried in separate grave sites a register of remains FM 10 15 CHAPTER 3 PETROLEUM PLATOON LEADER REVIEW YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES A fighting force can move and fight only as long as it receives required supplies when and where they are needed Your platoon supplies the fuel needed to sustain the attack You and your platoon sergeant are responsible for supervising the receipt storage and issue of bulk petroleum whether your unit is authorized FARE a FSSP 10 miles of hose line or 90 miles of multiproduct pipeline You also may supervise the receipt storage and issue of packaged products if your company commander decides to place them with your sections instead of with the Class IV and VII sections Packaged petroleum operations are covered in this chapter You are concerned mainly with mission accomplishment accountability quality surveillance pollution control fire and safety and pilferage and sabotage Whenever possible control measures or suggestions are included in this chapter See Table 3 1 for some key publications ESTABLISH A CLASS III SUPPLY POINT You may supervise a forward Class III supply point which may maintain 55 600 gallons of bulk fuel for light infantry units in the brigade support area You may supervise a main supply point which may store up to 302 600 gallons of bulk fuel to support heavy division units in the division support area In both cases your
205. ep rules to follow to make additions deletions or changes in the locator file Make sure everyone in your section understands and follows the rules You should also set up guidelines for special arms control and security guidance To ensure that security storage areas are correctly identified and used for storing only classified and highly pilferable supplies you must setup locator file controls way you can mark the locator file to show which items are pilferable supplies is to use some type of color coding or a different corner cut Be sure to place these guidelines in your storage SOP The basic SOPS for the stock locator system apply to all types of locator systems The manual and automated systems are very much alike in function and purpose The major difference is that manual locator system record cards are handwritten while the cards of the automated system are machine printed Both systems list the item stock number nomenclature and UI Stock locator file maintenance includes the following procedures When a new item is received search the locator file for the item stock number and its assigned location If a location is already assigned for the stock number write the location code on the receipt docu ment and route the item to the warehouse section for storage Chapter 7 explains receiving procedures Sometimes new material has to be placed in a temporary storage location until a permanent location 6 7 C1 F
206. equate supply of chemicals is available for water purification Coordinate with your supply operations officer on well construction and water point improvements to be provided by engineer units Review daily inspection reports on water purification Refer to FM 10 52 1 Review daily water production issue and distribution logs and summaries Allocate water production resources Review distribution and issue schedules LB PER CASE VOLUME CU FT GROSS WEIGHT AVERAGE UNIT WEIGHT PER CASE LB 1 03 per ration 0 706 per packet 0 75 per packet 36 to 39 1 57 to 1 67 6 5 per ration Coordinate with your supply operations officer and the MCC for additional transportation and aviation assets to distribute water Monitor traffic control and drainage operations Request augmentation to increase water support capabilities MONITOR WATER REQUIREMENTS Logistics officers project water requirements for supported units The type of environment affects water requirements There are other factors which affect water requirements They include type of battlefield conventional or NBC type of warfare short or sustained soldier and equipment density local command policy on ration type and shower frequency Sed Table 2 8 adapted from FM 10 52 Tables 3 1 through 3 4 for planning purposes does not include water required for decontamination support or for sup port of PWs refugees or civilians Wa
207. equential programs that depend on one another Estimate special requirements Establish priorities and suspense dates Adjust work load schedules to meet priority demands Requests should be batched by PD code Obtain ADP run schedules from your sup porting data processing activity Note cutoff dates and submission times Project time requirements by reviewing run time statistics listed in console logs and utilization records SAFEGUARD ELECTRONIC DATA TRANSMISSIONS ADP systems may be configured for electronic data exchange with other computer systems or PRIORITY DESIGNATOR TIME LIMITATION Must be processed within 24 hours from the time received Must be processed within two workdays from time received Must be processed within 24 hours from time received 20D Form 1348 1 DOD Single Line Item Release Receipt Document will have 999 or N tn Req d terminals by way of radio AUTODIN reference data networks mobile subscriber equipment or other electronic transmission facilities To safeguard electronic data transmissions you must coordinate electronic interconnection with the attached signal support unit Your tasks are to ensure that Modem is operational Communications software is operational Cryptographic equipment is operational if applicable Individual is available that knows about the system PREPARE FOR ADPE OUTAGES ADPE may become inoperative because of a mechanica
208. er systems An 18 inch vertical clearance is required between the sprinkler system and all stacks of nonhazardous supplies that are less than 15 feet tall 36 inch vertical clearance is required between the sprinkler system and all stacks of nonhazardous supplies that are more than 15 feet tall A 36 inch vertical clearance is required between allrafters beams and roof trusses and all stacks of supplies regardless of stack height HORIZONTAL CLEARANCES A24 inch horizontal clearance is required between all stored material and substandard firewalls A 36 inch horizontal clearance is required between stored supplies and fire doors located next to aisles A 24 inch horizontal clearance is required between hazardous supplies stored in a general purpose warehouse and any walls or nearby supplies 12 inch maximum horizontal clearance between top of stacks and sprinkler system or rafters and beams is required if stored supplies are subject to excessive swelling FM 10 15 different types of items and the quantity of items you store will change you will have to move some of the storage aids periodically Make the adjust ments on the layout sketch before you make the changes in the storage area It will save you time and effort when you start moving storage aids to different positions if you know exactly where they should be placed to make the best use of the space OPEN STORAGE LAYOUT Determine the layout of op
209. erial the receiving activity decides whether a spot check or an inspection up to 100 percent is necessary The extent of the inspection will depend on the source of the material its type and its general appearance on arrival Local conditions quality history of like commodities desired quality level and command directives will also be factors A 5 percent check is sufficient unless the material is subject to internal damage deterioration or miscount A 10 percent check is then required Used aged damaged or otherwise suspect material requires a more thorough inspection Deficiencies and discrep ancies are reported for corrective action and preventive measures Required Checks spot check of shipments including bulk lots must cover the following item identification check NIIN nomenclature and any others quan tity check and a check for proper marking contract number date of pack level of pack Do not open containers and unit packs unless the material is suspect Opened packs should be resealed if they are returned to stock Unpackaged items should be 100 percent inspected for identifi cation damage deterioration count and com pleteness Uncrated or open crated equipment is inspected to ensure that protective coatings materials have not worn off Operational Checks Supply elements are not equipped for opera tional checks on mechanical equipment Such material receives only the checks named above
210. es Number the first card 00001 NOTE This change deletes Figures 10 1 and 10 3 NOTE Sometimes it is not convenient for a DSU to use DA Form 2000 3 for the location survey When your unit is not using DA Form 2000 3 be sure your local storage SOP explains what form and procedures to use C1 FM 10 15 PROCESSING MANUAL LOCATION SURVEY WORK CARDS The survey supervisor should check the location survey work cards DA Forms 2000 3 to ensure they are in the correct serial number order and no cards are missing The supervisor should make a note of the beginning and ending numbers for later reference For example if the last card is numbered 02508 all cards from 00001 to 02508 must be turned in when the survey is finished The supervisor should also record the survey date and starting time He should give each survey team a stack of cards to use to record the location information He should log the cards out by listing each soldier s name and card numbers Survey teams should go to each location They should first ensure the information on the label and card matches the supplies in the location Then they copy the information from the bin label or placard onto a survey work card If there is more than one NSN in a location the team should contact the storage and survey super visors The supervisors will check the locator deck for the correct locations of the items and move the supplies to the right places If there are supplies in a
211. es The warehouse tractors and trailers most often used in storage sections are shown in Figure 11 2 They are described below 11 2 Light duty warehouse tractor The light duty electric powered warehouse tractor has a 2 000 pound drawbar pull and solid rubber tires It can be used in closed warehouses Since it emits no fumes it also can be used to transport food items You should use this tractor for light loads in warehouses and in cold storage areas since varying temperatures do not affect its performance Medium duty warehouse tractor This gasoline powered tractor has a 4 000 pound drawbar pull and pneumatic tires It can be used in outdoor storage areas for general purpose towing It has enough horsepower and traction to operate on all types of surfaces Warehouse trailer The trailer used with a warehouse tractor is a load carrying platform on HEAVY DUTY WAREHOUSE TRAILER ELECTRIC POWERED WAREHOUSE TRACTOR FM 10 15 GASOLINE POWERED WAREHOUSE TRACTOR LIGHT DUTY WAREHOUSE TRAILER Figure 11 2 Warehouse tractors and trailers pneumatic tires The normal capacities for a trailer used in storage areas range from 6 000 to 20 000 pounds Because the rear wheels of the heavy duty trailer are mounted on a rigid axle that carries about two thirds of the load it can be used for oversized loads and rough surfaces You should use the light duty trailer for indoors storage operations USING NONPOWERED MATERIALS
212. es would certainly slip and wear away rubber Braking dis tribution would also be very uneven Tail gate loading should never be practiced even in the interest of speed as it puts a severe strain on the equipment and frequently results in serious accidents See above for the correct method of loading Figure 9 12 Correct and incorrect weight distribution 9 18 WRONG A heavy load like a big piece of machinery or a safe should not be loaded against the cab This loading will bend the frame perhaps permanently It will also overload the front tires may even cause a blowout on a worn tire Hard steering will also result and the load may be top heavy WRONG A very heavy load should not be loaded at one side This overloads one spring and the tires at that side This loading could be bad enough to allow the brakes to lock on the wheels at the light side and cause flat spots on the tires or a skid on a wet surface FM 10 15 A heavy concentrated load should be placed near the rear and on its long side if at all possible Most of the load should be over the rear axle to get proper tire loading and eliminate bending of the frame RIGHT This loading has equal loads on rear tires and eliminates twisting of the frame which mightloosen rivets of cross members or frame brackets Uniform loading crosswise prevents axle housing and wheel bearing overloading This above example applies to trucks and trailers alike WRON
213. ess the DD Form 1348 1 release document by Comparing the NSN on the document blocks 8 through 22 with that of the supplies Comparing the unit of issue blocks 23 and 24 Comparing the nomenclature block X Comparing the quantity shown on the docu ment in blocks 25 through 29 with the quantity of supplies selected e Writing the quantity pulled from stock in block Q Signing and dating block 1 Selected By And Date Sending the supplies with all copies of the release document to the issue shipping section Figure 9 5 shows release documents filled in by your stock clerk MAKING A RELEASE DENIAL If the quantity of the item in stock is less than the amount to be shipped your warehouse per sonnel must prepare a release denial There are two kinds of release denials MRDs and disposal release denials To make an MRD for an item that is to be shipped follow the directions in Chapter 8 Figure 9 6 shows two completed MRDs As shown in the figure make sure you enter as the document identifier You make a disposal release denial the same way you make the MRD However a DD Form 1348 1 generally is the only form used as a disposal release denial Make sure you enter A6 in the Identifier Code block This code shows that the document is for a disposal release denial and not an MRD Figure 9 7 gives a sample of a completed disposal release denial You should remember that a release denial is a sup
214. ey attach the MRO to the supplies The MRO acts as an issue document to show the quantity and type of supplies a unit is to receive Section II Issuing Items USING ISSUE DOCUMENTS The documents a DSU uses to issue supplies to customer units are described below The docu ments are DA Forms 2765 2765 1 and 3161 and DD Form 1348 1 DA Form 2765 Units use this form to order PLL items repair parts or other expendable items Only one line item can be issued on this form at a time The DA Form 2765 generally is used with ADPE When ADPE is available the DSU gives prepunched and preprinted cards to customer units The units use these cards when they order PLL or other expendable items on a recurring basis The DSU gives the unit a new card each time a replenishment quantity is ordered 9 1 FM 10 15 DA Form 2765 1 This four part carbon form is used for ordering nonexpendable items Units can also use it to order expendable items in place of the DA Form 2765 if no ADPE is available or authorized Your personnel give the bottom hard copy of the form to the customer as a receipt DD Form 1348 1 This six part carbon form is used to issue items your DSU orders from another supply source Only one line item is ordered or issued at a time on this form DA Form 3161 Your DSU uses DA Forms in the 3161 series instead of DA Forms in the 2765 series for special types of supplies It uses DA Form 3161 when more than one
215. f it has an advance copy of the receipt document It may provide the information you need to help you process the supplies C1 FM 10 15 Table 7 1 Classes of supply included in DSS Clothing individual equipment storage tentage tool sets and tool kits hand tools and administrative and housekeeping supplies and equipment These items are prescribed in authorization and allowance tables Packaged POL Construction base development materiel Missile components only CLASS VII CLASS VIII CLASS 1 Major end items of equipment prescribed in authorization tables Medical materiel including repair parts used only on medical end items Repair parts including expendables and consumable does not include medical items repair parts Table 7 2 DSS and DSS air lines of communication processing time DSS SHIPMENTS The accurate checking in of supplies and equipment is an important part of the storage operation As storage supervisor you must make sure your soldiers know how to check in and inspect the supplies correctly and how to process the receipt documents Before unloading begins they must look over the containers for damage to decide if the shipment will be accepted If some containers are damaged or missing a more detailed inspection is necessary Check DA Pamphlet 710 2 2 for the procedures to follow when receiving and inspecting new supplies under the manual supply system The TM
216. f all aviation fuels Laboratory tests API gravity distil lation flash and fire copper strip Corrosion water and sediment Analysis for A and B 2 tests must be forwarded to the base laboratory Laboratory tests gravity distil lation flash and fire copper strip corrosion water and sediment Analysis for A and B 2 tests must be forwarded to the base laboratory For compartmented vehicles a sample is required from each compartment Refer to Table Ili of MIL HDBK 200G 3 14 FM 10 15 Table 3 10 Packaged fuels sampling and testing requirements TYPE OF FUEL TYPE OF TEST REQUIRED WHEN TO SAMPLE Aqua Glo and Set Aqua Glo and Sediment Visual Color Visual Gravity Distillation Copper Strip Corrosion Aviation gasoline Daily using Aqua Glo kit When identity is uncertain Every six months for dormant Stocks Jet fuels Aqua Glo Daily using Aqua Glo kit Visual Appearance When identity is uncertain Color Every 12 months for dormant API Gravity Stocks Distillation Copper Strip Corrosion Flash Point Except JP 4 Automotive gasoline Appearance Water and Sediment Visual Color Gravity Distillation Copper Strip Corrosion When identity is uncertain Every 12 months for dormant Stocks Diesel fuels Color When identity is uncertain API Gravity Every 12 months for dormant
217. f life periods that end after a specified time 2 2 items have shelf life periods that may be extended if they meet certain standards after inspection or restoration Controls are established at the storage facility to maintain records on shelf life stocks Regardless of the time remaining shelf life material is issued by first in first out rule to ensure its use before the expiration date Shelf life material is coded at the source These codes are listed in AR 708 1 Information on inspections and coding changes is in AR 740 3 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATION Condition codes indicate the condition of mate rial and determine its distribution These codes show the extent of needed repairs where repairs can be made and whether an item is worth repairing There are strict rules for the use of the codes with material received stored or issued Collection and Classification Because of time and equipment limitations collection and classification inspectors often cannot make a final decision on the serviceability of an item Their main purpose is to divide materials into commodity groups and to deter mine their general condition A complete inspec tion is made after the material has been sent to the DSU Coding At the DSU level material is inspected and classified by condition codes in AR 725 50 To ensure that the correct code is assigned DSU units verify the inspection sheets for equipment sent to them from co
218. f the material In addition to the biweekly inspection of unit storage facilities cyclical and special checks of the material must be made Basic guidance is in DOD 4145 19 R 1 More specific instructions are in the storage serviceability standards supply manuals and bulletins Routine Inspections During routine cyclic inspections the emphasis is on ensuring that the first in first out rule is being followed This is especially important for stock that is known to deteriorate with age This kind of inspection must be very thorough in areas where large quantities of slow moving stocks are stored Where first in first out rule is not being observed inspectors notify the storage officer so that action can be taken Special Inspections Special inspections of suspect lots quantities or items are made on request of higher authority and after periods of hard rains heavy snows high winds and sudden changes in the weather They are requested by higher authority for a variety of reasons and are carried out according to the need Inspections after bad weather cover such things as torn or loose protective canvas and coverings damage from flying debris water and hail and loss of preservatives on exposed bare metal surfaces hydraulic cylinder rods and gears SHELF LIFE ITEMS Items that deteriorate at a known rate are assigned storage time shelf life periods There are two types of shelf life items Type 1 items have shel
219. floor plan of the storage area drawn to scale It shows the direction of bin and rack areas and the locations of the aisles structural space support areas offices and latrines The planograph also shows the gross square feet and the net square feet of all available storage space See Figure 5 11 Each major storage area within the total area should also show the gross and net square feet available As chief of the storage activity you are responsible for the preparation and use of the planographs You do not have to show occupied or vacant spaces on each planograph within the storage areas You SMALL LOTS ARE TO BE PLACED ON END ZONES INDICATED Figure 5 11 Planograph 5 19 FM 10 15 must place a completed planograph of each warehouse shed or other storage area where it is highly visible Mount it on wood and cover it with clear acetate so that you can use a grease pencil to make changes on it as needed Maintain ammuni tion storage space data planographs also STORAGE SPACE SURVEY WORK SHEET The storage space survey work sheet or space audit is a scaled drawing which shows the aisles and the amount of storage space available in a storage section You must draw a work sheet for each supply warehouse section shed or open storage area Figure 5 12 is an example of how a storage space survey work sheet is prepared The sample space worksheet in the figure does not apply to ammunition storer You should use the Sec
220. for FM 10 15 Basic Doctrine Manual for Supply and Storage Qty rqr block no 0863 DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is unlimited C1 FM 10 15 CHANGE HEADQUARTERS NO 1 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY Washington DC 12 December 1990 BASIC DOCTRINE MANUAL FOR SUPPLY AND STORAGE TABLE OF CONTENTS Page dd Co ad SUPPLY OFFICERS AND LEADERS CHAPTER 1 SUPPLY OPERATIONS OFFICER Determine Your Responsibilities crescere netten retener ete 1 1 Determine Demand Satisfaction 22 1 1 Determine and Monitor ASL Size M 1 1 Reduce Excess Stocks 1 2 Coordinate and Monitor Stock Accounting and Stock Control Operations 1 2 Schedule ADP RUNS reiten 1 3 Safeguard Electronic Data Transmissions 20 2 4 4 4 1 3 Prepare for ADPE Outages eet bieten resi pe rauf ee ena nae 1 3 Ensure Security of ADP Facilities and Software eese 1 5 Review Stock Status Report eese esee esses ene enen nane tnstn eret eth enne tree entne tna rnn 1 5 Schedule and Coordinate Inventories 0 4 00 1 8 Determine Supply Suppor
221. greed upon in telecom with LT Carter Pickup past due notified that sup ples were sent back to storage Contacted LT Johnson on 9335 Figure 2 4 Sample customer unit notification log Supplies may then be divided into unit or item piles for temporary storage prior to issue to supported units Your tasks are listed below Ensure subsistence is protected from weather vermin spoilage theft and contami nation according to DOD 4145 19 R 1 and FMs 10 23 and 10 60 Ensure that stockage is on dunnage no more than two pallets high and covered Require that rations be rotated and guarded Ensure that personnel have separated Class I stock by date of pack with an ISSUE sign for older stocks and a DO NOT ISSUE sign for newer stocks Ensure that an authenticated list of sup ported units authorized to enter the supply area is available at the supply point entrance and exit NOTE Security guards should know the entries required on issue documents so that they can check the contents of trucks as they leave Monitor sanitation standards using pro cedures in AR 40 5 CHECK EXCESS CLASS I STOCKS Class I stockage is based on personnel strength reports In wartime the number of soldiers sup ported will change often Your initial stockage should provide for surges in the number of soldiers supported In addition you may want to maintain a small excess stock to take care of unexpected surges in soldier strength
222. h information used to measure how long a container takes to reach its destination Cards are marked with special DICs in the top left corner These codes show whether the shipment was a CONUS or oversea shipment They also show whether the items were shipped by air or by surface transportation See Figure 7 8 for a sample in transit data card A DIC of TK6 means that the item was shipped by air and a DIC of TK9 means surface shipment These two codes are used only for oversea shipments All cards used in CONUS are marked TK4 regardless of how the CC 13 16 JULIAN CC 7 12 SHIPPING DATE SHIPPED APOE ACTIVITY ADDRESS CODE CC 4 6 ROUTING IDENTIFIER CODE CC 17 MODE SHIPMENT TO APOE FM 10 15 supplies were shipped When 055 or 055 ALOC shipment arrives at your DSU your soldiers should remove the in transit data cards when they inspect the supplies for damage They should then forward the cards to the SCS The SCS will keypunch the delivery data onto the cards and forward them to the correct activity If you receive DSS or DSS shipment with a torn or damaged in transit data card make sure your soldiers send a copy of the shipping document DD Form 1384 Transportation Control and Move ment Document to the SCS with the damaged card The SCS will use the information on the TCMD to make a new card If the in transit data card is missing have your soldiers attach a note to the TCMD before it
223. harged fire extinguisher Make sure your personnel know and follow the safety guidelines for MHE operation These guidelines are listed in each MHE operator s manual FM 10 15 CHAPTER 12 UPLOADING AND STORING THE COMBAT ASL PURPOSE a storage supervisor you are responsible for maintaining and uploading the combat ASL This chapter will help you and your storage personnel carry out the storage functions involved in mobili zation of the combat ASL COMBAT ASL ITEMS A critical and basic mission of any DSU is to transport designated items of supply needed to sustain operations in a hostile environment for a given period of time Those items designated by the command are known as the combat ASL The combat ASL requires wartime transportation It consists of repair parts which are essential in support of the MPDL end items Specific elements of this component are MPL items to include provisioning items for force modernization equipment Demand supported C parts applicable to MPDL end items Command discretionary essential parts EC C applicable to MPDL end items Transport and storage space is limited to the vehicles that a unit is authorized under its TOE or MTOE For this reason you must compute usable space and use it wisely SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS The MPL portion of the combat ASL must have first priority of movement and storage Some items such as end items repair parts petroleum products
224. hat water does not backup but flows freely to an outlet BIN STORAGE LAYOUT In a DSU most of the items you stock and issue will be bin type items Therefore you must plan the layout so that the maximum available space can be used for storing bin items The amount of space you give an item will depend on the size of the package and the quantity of the item to be stored Use the bin area to store supplies that have a high turnover rate or that are issued daily NET SQUARE FEET 42 6 21 FAST MOVING ITEMS SLOW MOVING TEMS PILFERABLE ITEMS Figure 5 4 Typical tent storage layout FM 10 15 Locate the shopkeeper s office and the receiving area close to the bin area This keeps your issue trips short and saves you time and labor Figure 5 5 shows how a bin storage area in your warehouse should look When bins run the same direction as the ends of your warehouse you should receive bin items at one end of the warehouse and issue them at the other end This arrangement will help you avoid bottlenecks and confusion Figure 5 6 shows how to setup bin rows in your warehouse You should build your bin storage area with standard shelves pallet racks and special or nonstandard shelves Arrange them according to the physical limitations of the storage area and the characteristics of the items you are storing Generally sectional shelves are used in bin areas These shelves are 87 to 99 inches high 36 inches wide and 18 inches deep B
225. have been made for these locations If a locator card has no matching inventory count card the next numbered blank count card must be filled out using the information on the locator card After checking the cards the locator clerk will give the count cards and listings back to you After you have looked over the listings and cards for any mistakes give the accountable officer a copy of the listing As soon as you give the inventory supervisor the listing and the deck of inventory count cards the inventory can start PREPARING STORED ITEMS FOR INVENTORY You must try to maintain stored supplies in the most secure manner possible As storage super visor you must also ensure your personnel use the proper storage techniques and that they follow all guidelines given in DOD 4145 19 R 1 for storing supplies However before each inventory there are special actions to take that will make the inventory go smoothly and quickly These actions will also help ensure an accurate inventory count You must ensure supplies are properly identified and clearly marked All supplies not to be counted are marked with DO NOT INVENTORY signs All supplies are stored in the least number of separate locations opened containers either contain the quantity listed or have the new quantity marked on the outside of the container supplies stored on pallets are placed neatly and uniformly to make counting easier A
226. he locator deck or recorded location but the locations do not match your personnel should change the loca tion shown on the receipt document Then they should send the item to the corrected location for storage and the receipt document to the SCS Ifthe NSN on the receipt document is not listed in the locator file or the recorded location the locator clerk must assign a new location Your person nel must also make a new locator card and matching stock placard or bin tag See instructions in Chapter 6 Your personnel should check the receipt document to make sure the correct location has been added Then they should send the supplies with a copy of the corrected document to the storage section After they place the item in the new storage location they should forward the completed receipt document to the SCS File the location issue ticket according to local SOP 83 C1 FM 10 15 IDENTIFYING INCORRECTLY STORED ITEMS When your personnel go to a storage location to shortcoming as extracted from DOD 4145 19 R 1 select an item for issue they sometimes find that the When your personnel find that the information on the item stored in the location is not the item listed onthe _ bin tag or locator card is not correct they should bin tag location placard or locator card At other change the tag or card to correct it Then they should times they find that the condition of the item changed notify the stock records sec
227. he MHE Keep the length and number of moves to a minimum Try to move supplies in a straight line flow to keep the distance short Allow only licensed drivers to operate powered MHE CHOOSING MATERIALS HANDLING EQUIPMENT There are many different types of MHE used in storage operations To save time and labor you should use the type you have available as much as possible MHE can be powered and nonpowered To determine what kind of MHE is best for a job you need to know its capacity and capabilities Also you need to consider the construction of the building and the characteristics of the storage area in which you are working The MHE your storage section may use is described in this chapter If you need information on a piece of MHE that is not given check DOD 4145 19 R 1 Chapter 4 It describes all types of MHE currently used in the DOD Before you choose the MHE you also need to know which types of MHE your personnel are authorized to operate USING POWERED MATERIALS HANDLING EQUIPMENT The powered MHE most often used in storage operations are the forklift truck and the warehouse tractor and trailer Before your per sonnel use them they need to be trained in operator maintenance Forklift Truck The forklift truck is used to pick up carry and stack unit loads of supplies and equipment The trucks are available with lifting capacities from 2 000 to 20 000 pounds and lifting heights from 100 to 210 inches M
228. he data against the informa tion on the items in storage to make sure the correct item for issue is pulled Remove the quantity of the item listed on the MRO and send it to issue shipping section with a copy of the MRO C1 FM 10 15 e Place the MRO and supplies at the customer unit pickup point if the total quantity is on hand NOTE Sometimes your personnel should NOT send supplies listed on the MRO to the issue shipping section If the supplies are very large heavy or bulky such as lumber cement or other construction materi als let the unit pick up the supplies directly from the storagelocation This keeps your personnel from having to use time and MHE to take the supplies to the issue point Be sure you setup guidelines about issuing and loading these kinds of materials directly from the storage location Include these instructions in your storage PROCESSING A DD FORM 1348 1 MATERIEL RELEASE ORDER When your personnel receive a DD Form 1348 1 from the SCS they should take the following steps f the shows no storage location they should check the locator deck for the correct location code They should write this code in block F Next they should compare the data on the DD Form 1348 1 with the data on the bin labels They must also check the supplies in the storage location to make sure they match the item description and NSN Ifthe data match they should remove quan tity l
229. he location against the locator file before the item is sent to the storage section Chapter 6 explains the locator system Send a copy of all receipt documents and any changes to the SCS SUBSTITUTE ITEMS Sometimes a higher source of supply will ship your DSU a substitute item instead of the one requested As storage supervisor you must make sure that your receiving personnel know when they have received substitute items Substitute items have a BH status code on the receipt document This code is listed in columns 65 and 66 of the DD Form 1348 1 On a DA Form 2765 1 look for this code in the Advice Status block Your personnel should follow the guidelines in Chapter 8 when they receive substitute items FM 10 15 UNIT PRICE 817 H 26070 27 Y TOTAL PRICE SHIPPED SHIP TO NEW iUMBERLAND ARIY DEPOT 215 INF BN NEW UMBERLAND 17979 FORT BRAGG NC 28307 8 arion j omr uwr we erbe ovante T PA F8B race j 117 L We a lia z lt sumsTiTUTE ure reo 1 FREIGHT ASSIFICATION n x OF CONT dens es CUBE ar np s W 9 ma 091 261 dE 085 6208 011313371101 9 9 3 uS ut 8 M T
230. ial It also provides details as to when no credit will be allowed FM 10 15 TURN INS FROM SUPPORTED UNITS There are several reasons a unit may turn in items of supply Some reasons for turn ins are described below Items Serviceable or Unserviceable Due to FWT Units generally turn in serviceable and unser viceable items due to FWT using DA Form 2765 1 SCS soldiers should use DA Pamphlet 710 2 2 Chapter 14 to edit requests for turn in Make sure your receiving personnel do not accept the DA Form 2765 1 on any accountable item unless the paperwork showing that the item has been inspected and classified by the quality assurance and maintenance sections is attached to the item When your personnel process a DA Form 2765 1 as a turn in document they should enter the quantity turned in the date of receipt and their initials It is important that they return a copy of this docu ment to the unit turning in the item The unit needs the completed turn in document for its property records After your personnel process the DA Form 2765 1 they should forward a copy to the SCS and send the supplies to the storage section Refer to TM 38 L 32 12 for turn in procedures under 094 Items Unserviceable Through Other Than FWT Sometimes the classification portion of the maintenance section determines accountable items to be unserviceable for reasons other than FWT In order to turn in these items units must have approval and documentatio
231. idelines and give sample layout plans FM 10 15 METHOD DESCRIPTION Flatbed Truck Location Warehouse Platform Condition Truck to Storage Location Method 2 Forklift Trucks Handling Unit Loads Personnel Required 2 Forklift truck operator checker warehouseman 1 Truck driver commercial or government Equipment Required 2 Forklift trucks Procedure 1 Documents a Receive advance documentation from document control 2 Prepare truck for unloading 8 Truck driver removes canvas tie downs and or stakes and position truck for unloading Warehouse personnel receive instructions Travel to work area Open warehouse doors as required Receive freight bill or copy of GBL Check GBL or freight bill Forklift handling of material a One forklift truck operator checker unloads the right and left side of the truck and places the load on the platform or inside the warehouse door One forklift truck operator checker on ramp or inside warehouse transports all loads of material to storage area and stacks same in permanent location One forklift truck operator checker tallies and makes visual check of condition of containers 4 Annotate and finalize documents incident to receiving operations a Annotate receiving document 1 Date received 2 Sign document Annotate Government B L Annotate freight bill 1 Pieces received 2 Date 3 Sign freight bill 4 Stamp freight bil
232. ies io museo hte ECL ED 2 1 Graves registration 2 1 e xiu eiue 4 6 Salvage collection point 2 19 Sample performance report 4 5 Sample register 10 12 Schedule and coordinate inventories 1 8 Search and recovery team leaders 2 23 Seasonal change requirements 1 11 Seasonal demand items 1 2 Seasonal requirements 4 2 5 9 16 Security t ES 1 1 Self service supply center 2 20 Semimonthly 3 1 4 Shelf DOK 5 17 Shipments DSS oti tuere hea Site iter es 7 6 7 7 DSS c cu aep ede ES 7 6 Non DSS 7 10 Shipping materiel 9 5 Site 3 1 Software security 1 6 Space allocation 5 19 Space audit ernieren 5 20 Space recapitulation record 5 21 Special instructions 2 8 Special inventory 2 11 SSSC stockage criteria 2 21 Steel 5 17 Stock Counting
233. ies A 7 1 Receipt Documents 7 1 Document Control 7 5 DSS and DSS Air Line of Communication Shipments eene 7 6 DSS Shipment RR BE 7 7 Documents Received with DSS and DSS Air Lines of Communication Shipment eee 1000000 eene nette enne teeth nennen 7 8 Non DSS 5 7 10 Substitute Items cinco _______________ 7 10 Misrouted 5 corii tano 7 12 Overages or Shortages and Damaged 2 2 242 1 201020 004940449 0 7 13 Turn Ins From Supported 7 13 STORING AND SELECTING SUPPLIES FOR ISSUE Storing Supplies Supervising 8 1 Storing Incoming 8 2 Processing Substitute Items for Storage eee 8 3 Identifying Incorrectly Stored 1 2 4 440 0 04021 011 4 3 8 4 Relocating Stored Supplies 424401 00 2 2044 1 4 0 27 0 8 5 C1 FM 10 15 Section II
234. ifferent stock numbers are stored in the same location NOTE DS4 records only one location on location survey listings and locator cards for each stock number Use the location survey listing to monitor the survey The survey supervisor will use this list to control location change cards and record alternate locations COORDINATE INVENTORIES You may be required to inventory monthly sensitive items quarterly semiannually or annually depending upon the type of item You may request an inventory when a location survey indicates the following There is material in stock without a recorded location No stock is on hand even though the stock status report indicates that there should be FM10 15 STACK LEVEL SECTION LEVEL 4 LEVEL 3 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 1 1 ELLA STACK B STACK A AREA D Building van tent or open storage space ROW F Row of storage aids or aisle between two rows of storage aids STACK C Column in the row LEVEL 3 Level of the storage column SECTION 1 Compartment or section of the level NOTE Nine character stock locator codes are used in depots and larger installations For further information on the nine character stock locator system see TM 743 200 1 Figure 2 3 Five character stock locator code FM 10 15 Table 2 4 Location survey problems and corrective actions PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Material in locat
235. ill be conducted only when the tactical situation allows Discre pancies occurring during wartime have to be recorded They do not have to be reported Your tasks are listed below Coordinate with the supply platoon leader on location survey dates and findings Establish a cutoff date for receipts Ensure that customers are notified of cutoff dates Have personnel prepare a receiving cutoff control register Setup issue controls Have personnel prepare an MRO cutoff control register Request an inventory control list and inventory count cards from the MMC Ensure that items in maintenance are included in the inventory count NOTE You may recommend changing the lot size if you find that soldiers in your storage activity cannot count a certain lot within the set time frame DETERMINE SUPPLY SUPPORT OF DEPLOYING UNITS Since departing units should have their basic loads hand SSAs need only fill all DOs for units deployed for less than 15 days However you must develop detailed contingency plans for con tinuing or transferring supply support of forces deployed for an extended period TM 38 L32 11 contains procedures for deploying a supported unit using 054 TM 38 L32 13 contains deploy ment procedures for DSUs and larger elements You must coordinate with the supporting SAILS activity to ensure requisitioning support Your tasks are listed below Ensure transferring units resubmit requests to your
236. ing Ensure these listings do not include items the RX CIF QSS 555 and shipping and receiving sections Accountable Officer s Listing This listing must include the following Count card serial number NSN of item Name of item UI Condition code of item Security and pilferage code of item Unit price Recorded balance on stock record Location code Figure 10 8 gives an example of a page of the control listing made for the accountable officer He must keep this list in a secure place He must not let storage personnel use it He will use the listing when he reports and reconciles his records with the installation FAO Inventory Supervisor s Listing This listing has less detail than the listing the accountable officer needs Figure 10 9 gives an example of a page of the control listing made for the inventory supervisor His list must include the inventory count card serial number NSN of item name of item and location code After completing FM10 15 the listings the SCS will send them to you along with the inventory count cards Check them to ensure they are ready for the inventory Give them to your locator clerk to check against the location file He compares the cards the listings and the locator file to see if there are any differences The clerk also must check to see if there are any locator cards that have multiple locations in the locator deck If so he checks to see if inventory count cards
237. ing legs attaching one leg to each hub Figure 2 6 Sample of procedures extracted from FM 55 450 1 SET UP CLASS II IV AND VII DISTRIBUTION OR SUPPLY POINTS Class IV and VII items may be located in the same general area as the Class I distribution or supply point Class II items maybe packaged in lots designed to support a specific number of soldiers Class IV stock may be limited to preconfigured hasty fortifications and barrier materials Class VII items will be limited to combat essential critical items needed to support combat readiness SUPERVISE CLASS II IV AND VII SUPPORT OPERATIONS Class IV and VII items are costly critical to combat missions and often scarce This means you must increase management over stock levels and inventory actions and control over storage and issue procedures Your task are listed below 9 Review issue control lists for Class IV and VII items Review stock locator file system Coordinate location surveys Coordinate inventories Report discrepancies and damaged cargo to your supply operations office at once Coordinate with your supply operations office regarding disposition of damaged cargo 2 17 C1 10 15 MONITOR CLASS VII ISSUE CONTROLS Class VII items have a direct impact on operational readiness and our ability to win the first battle Major end items especially major weapons systems must be replaced quickly when they are damaged or destroyed Y
238. int before the cutoff date in the Date To Shipping Pickup Point column of the register On the cutoff date you and the stock control supervisor must check the register to ensure all MROs listed have been sent to the pickup or shipping section If you find MROs with no entry in the Date To Shipping Pickup Point column you will know that these MROs have not been processed You and the stock control supervisor must locate and account for all MROs that are outstanding To ensure that the listed supplies are ready for inven torying you must change the count in the SCS and send the MRO back to the receiving section or move the supplies and the MRO to the issue shipping section If you have any MROs that are outstanding for items such as lumber or barricade materials send the to the SCS to inventory supervisor so the inventory count can be changed Because of their size do not send these items to the issue point for loading Therefore even though the MROs have been processed count bulk items as part of the stored supplies since they are kept in the storage section until they are loaded GETTING AN INVENTORY VOUCHER NUMBER You will need to contact the stock control super visor for an inventory voucher number before the inventory begins special number from the DA Form 272 Register of Vouchers to a Stock Record Account is assigned for each inventory 10 13 FM 10 15 CONTROL NUMBER STOCK NUMBER
239. ion of ADPE authorized your office This includes physical security of ADPE software programs and pro cedures see Table 1 4 Detailed guidance is in AR 380 380 Your tasks are listed below Ensure strict accountability for keys or access combinations Ensure that physical security deficiencies are eliminated or kept to a minimum through the use of guards barriers protective lighting entry control checks and intrusion detection systems Check that van cables and generators have been protected Limit access Prevent unauthorized access to ADP area equipment documents listings card decks and system TMs Establish a system of checks and controls on personnel entering the area Plan for storage and safeguarding of alternate files Establish a system of input and output control logs Report extra data found in printouts as possible ADP system penetration or Threat agent attack Review distribution plans Reduce the num ber of copies of reports Require periodic justifi cation of the number of reports Identify an alternate site for the transfer of ADP operations if necessary Destroy all printouts of reports lists and alternate files as new ones are printed REVIEW STOCK STATUS REPORT The weekly stock status report is the only automated listing which shows all assets on hand It lists stockage levels for ASL items This report is the basic listing required to continue operations in case of
240. ion with no Check locator deck for other locations Survey work card If another location is listed move supplies to the correct location no location is listed make a location request card Mixed stock Check active locator file for locations of supplies If several NSNs are listed move supplies to correct locations If no NSNs are listed establish a new location for the supplies and make a location request card Unidentified stock Contact storage supervisor to identify the supplies If item in location matches NSN and other data listed on survey work card check locator deck for correct location code Move supplies to correct location or establish new location if one is not listed on locator deck by making a location request card If supplies cannot be identified describe the item fully in the Remarks block of the survey work card Send a copy of the survey work card to the SCS for help in identification File the original copy of the survey work card in suspense file until supplies are identified Multiple stock locations Sortsurvey work cards for items in question into NIIN sequence so that same item in more than one multiple locations can be identified Multiple locations will show up as location items with duplicate NIINs in more than one location Check locator for correct locations of items involved Move supplies to correct locations If no location is listed for an NSN item establish new location and ma
241. ipt document 7 11 FM 10 15 Sar ant DOCUMENT FSC Tt 8 9L 5942 YO COST ACCOUNT NUMGER NI Nun YO 3nssr 1530038 JE SUPPLEMENTARY y Prony val 2 z 8 E 5 3 5 o DATE POSTED z T 8 GATE AVAILABLE INIT 5 DATE RECEIVED SIGNATURE H 85 66 Spem aT am TA mr Senaman Ganar Figure 7 10 Receipt document made from container information showing a temporary location MISROUTED ITEMS Sometimes your DSU will get an item that document to find out which DSU was to have another DSU ordered When this happens your received the item If your DSU receives medical personnel should check the receipt or shipping classified or sensitive supplies that belong to 7 12 another unit contact that unit at once Have that unit pick up the items or discuss how the items should be forwarded Make sure your personnel report mistakes on SF 364 Instructions when to use the form and how to fill it out are in AR 735 5 After your personnel finish the report they should send the item to the shipping section of your DSU The shipping section will send the
242. is It is important that your storage personnel understand that they must check all possible sources for the missing supplies before they pass the MRD on to the next level When personnel pass on the MRD they verify that all areas assigned to them have been checked thoroughly To make the MRD storage personnel should do the following e Line out the DIC 5 on the DA Form 2765 the DD Form 1348 1 MRO e Write in the A6 code for MRD AR 725 50 lists and explains the MRD codes Send MRD through the storage section s chain of command The storage supervisor will send the MRD to the SCS so that the missing supplies can be ordered PROCESSING MATERIEL RELEASE ORDER LIST SUPPLY MANAGEMENT REPORT Another of your duties as storage supervisor may be to check and update the MRO list that the SCS will periodically send to your storage section This list is prepared in PD sequence When two or more MROs have the same PD list them in location order The list gives information on all MROs processed within the time frame listed generally one month Your personnel will need to SHORTCOMING CAUSES RESULTS Quantity in storage does not match quantity listed on stock account records Delay in placing materiel in location Erroneous location recorded Incorrect inventory count Relocation of stock taking place Special inventory required Delay or failure in supply fill Additional manpower paper
243. ist items as normal since they do not affect the ABF Documents Received After the Cutoff Date Your receiving section soldiers must mark AF TER INVENTORY on all documents received tier the cutoff date They must also separate these docu ments from those marked BEFORE INVENTORY so they will not be counted To help the inventory teams you should move all documents and items received after the cutoff date to a separate storage area If you do not have enough room to set these items aside ensure each item involved is marked with a DO NOT INVENTORY sign Table 10 7 Coordination of activities for an inventory Conduct location survey Establish shipping cutoff On cutoff date freeze the posting of MROs Use shipping cutoff control register to process and or account for outstanding MROs Establish receiving cutoff On cutoff date freeze new receipts and segregate Process all old receipts Use receiving cutoff control register to trace postings to stock records Stock records section posts all receipts after cutoff date 10 11 C1 FM 10 15 Table 10 7 Coordination of activities for an inventory continued Cutoff date Process outstanding MROs Conduct physical inventory Perform recounts where necessary Reconcile outstanding MROs for bulk items Post accepted count cards to stock records Prepare IAR Lift the freeze on issuance of MROs Lift the freeze on receipts Prepare reports of survey
244. isted on the MRO and send it to the issue shipping section with a copy of the MRO see the previous NOTE They must make sure the Julian date Appendix E and the initials of the person who pulled the item from storage are written in block 1 Selected By and Date block If the information is missing your issue shipping personnel should contact the storage person nel so that the mistake can be corrected Table 8 1 MRO processing times PRIORITY DESIGNATOR TIME LIMITATION 01 through 03 04 through 15 Must be processed within 24 hours from the time received DA Pam 710 2 2 Must be processed within two workdays from time receiced Pam 710 2 2 8 7 C1 FM 10 15 PROCESSING A SARSS PRODUCED MATERIEL RELEASE ORDER When your personnel receive the SARSS produced they should take the following steps Proceed to the location that is printed in the location field If there is no location contact your storage supervisor Next they should compare the data on the SARSS produced MROs with the data on the bin label They should also check the supplies in the storage location to make sure they match the item description and NSN If the data match they should remove the quantity listed on the MRO and send it to the issue shipping section with a copy of the MRO see previous NOTE They must make sure the Julian date and the initials of the person are written on the line pick pull by on the PCN
245. ith the receiving units to return these containers to your DSU PROCESSING THE RELEASE ORDER In order for your DSU to ship items on time you must fill out and process the release order cor rectly It is your responsibility to make sure your storage and shipping personnel know how to process the DD Form 1348 1 release order Before packing the item the packer should pull Copies 2 and 3 first and second carbon copies from the form They must put these copies inside the shipping container with the item After your per sonnel prepare pack and mark the supplies they process the DD Form 1348 1 by taking the following actions Write the type of shipping container used in the Type Of Container block block 2 Write the total weight of the container in the Total Weight Container block block 3 Write the number of containers in the ship ment in the No Of Containers block block 5 Write the total cube in the Total Cube block block 6 Sign and date the Packed By And Date block block 4 Pull Copy 4 from the DD Form 1348 1 third carbon copy Put this copy in a water resistant PPP E 540 envelope and attach the envelope to the outside of the shipping container Keep the last copy fifth carbon copy of the form with the shipping container Give this copy to the carrier when the supplies are loaded The carrier will use it as a manifest A manifest is a document that lists all the supplies in a shipment an
246. ity Transportation Priority items should be sent to the issue section for customer pickup with PD codes of 01 through 03 could be entered as 1 A storage location in the supplementary address field in this column since they need to be processed within card columns 45 through 50 indicates that the sup 24 hours Items with a PD of 04 and above could be plies are ASL and should be placed in storage entered as 2 in the column When all units are auto mated the need for this document will cease Suggest receiving section maintain a document control register to determine which supplies Review your receiving area s suspense files to to process first Process supplies by PD as explained help in determining reasons for receipts not due in in Chapter 8 You can design one to fit the needs of Table 2 2 lists the major reasons for invalid due ins and your unit possible corrective actions Table 2 2 Troubleshooting chart for invalid due ins POSSIBLE CAUSES RESULT CORRECTIVE ACTION Receiving report was not prepared and submitted for processing and transmission to the automated system Increase in due ins Require prompt preparation of receiving reports so that issues can then be processed Due ins were not adjusted or Increase in due outs canceled Require timely adjustments or cancellations Shipment overdue contract or purchase order remains in the sus pense fil
247. k of the shipments your section receives and processes This register can also be used to look up the history of particular shipments when claims are filed and to provide tonnage estimates for reports to higher HO DOD 4145 19 R 1 discusses the need for a document control register and gives suggestions on how to use it Because each DSU needs different reporting data there is no set design for a docu ment control register Figure 7 6 shows a sample of a register that you can use or adapt to fit the needs of your DSU DA FORMS AR 633 50 amp 633451 AR 6321 MILPERCEN MODA TAG TAGCEN MEMO 3403 AR 340 1 MEMO 340 3 210 130 37105 GOA 6504 MILPERCEN 6 04 MILPERCEN AR 37 105 COA sa ARGUI MILPERCEN AR 614 102 MILPERCEN oci DESI OG TAG TAGCEN DCSLOG INSCOM COA ACSI Figure 7 5 Extract a page from DA Pamphlet 25 30 FM 10 15 ATE ASSIGNED CONSIGNOR NUMBER NUMBER IDENTIFYING ENTRIES Er DATE DATE RECEIVED FORWARDED FROM STORAGE CONTROL NOMENCLATURE Figure 7 6 Sample of document control register OF COMMUNICATION SHIPMENTS Your DSU will receive most of its supplies from depots GSUs and installations These supplies are shipped to your DSU under the DSS DSS or the non DSS system The DSS is the Army standard ship
248. k record levels and order OCIE as required CIF personnel Prepare and submit requests Maintain a transaction register Check stock position Maintain property records Prepare and submit operating reports FM 10 15 f Prepare maintenance work orders Maintain files for all supply transactions 13 REQUISITIONS OCIE will be counted monthly for reorder purposes These counts will not be posted to the property book b Requests will be submitted on DA Form 2765 1 Request for Issue or Turn In c The PBO or PBO representative will review requests to ensure they are complete and accurate d If items have not been received within the allowable order ship time a follow up document will be prepared 14 RECEIPT DOCUMENTS Receipt documents will be delivered to the PBO for posting to the property book and for filing Expendable items will not be posted to the property book 15 ISSUE DOCUMENTS a Use DA Form 3161 Request for Issue or Turn In or an issue abstract to transfer or issue items b Hand receipts will rarely be used and only with prior approval If approved issues will be made to an established hand receipt account c OCIE items will be consolidated and abstracted from the property book on DA Form 3645 or DA Form 3645 1 at least once a month More frequent posting is allowed if desired by the PBO OCIE items are charged to an individual on DA Form 3645 or DA Form 3645 1 Each colu
249. ke a location request card Make location addition deletion or change requests as needed to correct locator deck so that only one item is listed for each location Update or change bin tags or placards NOTE Sometimes multiplelocations are needed because of limited storage space Inthis case list all locations on each locator card involved for a cross reference Flag or color code all locator cards with multiple listings for easy identification 2 10 Mixed stocks are stored in one location The recorded on hand balance may be incorrect TM 38 L32 12 has information on how to prepare for and conduct an inventory TM 38 L32 13 gives information on how to process inventory count cards and related 054 inventory listings Your tasks are listed below Require a special inventory of a single stock number item for reasons listed in Table 2 5 TM 38 L32 13 gives information on how to start a special inventory NOTE You must conduct an unscheduled spot inventory each time you process a total or partial MRD Coordinate cutoff dates with your supply operations officer Set up a receiving cutoff control register e Freeze all receipt storage and issue activities for items to be inventoried except for items with PDs 01 through 03 and NMCS requests You can continue to process NSL items since they are not listed in the stock location files Ensure that quantities in secondary loca tions are counted and recor
250. keep your personnel from FM 10 15 Table 9 1 Release order processing times PRIORITY DESIGNATOR TIME LIMITATION 01 through 03 Item must be ready to load within 24 hours after the or storage section receives the MRO not mission capable shipment On a not mission capable Shipment 999 will be listed in the Req d Del Date block of the DD Form 1348 1 04 through 08 09 through 15 Item must be ready to load within two regular workdays after the storage section receives the MRO item must be ready to load within four regular workdays after the storage section receives the MRO handling and moving the items more than neces sary Try to plan the shipments in truckload lots If you have more than one item going to another DSU combine the items into one shipment This will protect the items as well as save packing material time and transportation costs Sometimes you will not be able to pack items in the same box or crate because of their weight size or type Consider these items bulk items for shipping purposes and pack them according to the guidelines in TM 38 230 2 After you finish planning the shipment send the MRO to the warehouse section PICKING THE STOCK Once warehouse personnel locate the items listed on the release order they must use either the progressive or selective method to pick the items from stock These methods are described in Chapter 8 When selecting the items the stock clerk should proc
251. l stamp date and time in When material is damaged short etc prepare all necessary documentation e Return copy of freight bill to driver 5 After unloading a Clean work area b Truck driver replaces tarps tie downs and or stakes onto the truck and secures the truck for traveling Close warehouse doors as required d Proceed to next assignment or to office Special Instructions 1 Commercial or government truck driver time will not be charged to this operation 2 Broken or damaged unit loads are set aside in the warehouse pending repair determination by the warehouseman in charge Figure 2 2 Sample extract from TM 743 200 3 2 5 FM 10 15 to help you manage storage space effectively Your tasks are listed below Obtain data from the SCS on the type and quantity of items to be stored 9 Review demand rate for each item Analyze size shape and weight of items and whether they are perishable pilferable hazardous or flammable Recalculate storage area capability Verify maximum allowable stacking height for supplies and floor load limitations Analyze the number of line items to be stored in bin areas Note mandatory or preferred types of storage for various items These are listed on the AMDF See SBs in the 740 series for codes to identify guidance Review requirements in DOD 4145 19 R 1 and regulations regarding storage of petroleum and subsistence items and sensitive
252. l be limited to requests with UND A and PDs 01 02 and 03 Table 10 1 Inventory training checklist What is the purpose of the inventory location survey How does the inventory location survey relate to normal storage operations What are the duties and responsibilities of the inventory survey supervisor and team members the accountable officer the storage supervisor and the stock record supervisor during an inventory survey Need to include duties and responsibilities of personnel when using automated procedures By what date must the inventory survey supervisor and team members be trained How long will the inventory last What are the beginning and ending dates How much additional time will be required for corrective action Will your unit use its own personnel for the inventory survey What additional personnel do you need to complete the inventory survey How do you obtain them What inventory training aids do you need What aids are available What other assistance is available for training What controls need to be set up to ensure proper inventory survey counts How is a location survey conducted 10 2 C1 FM 10 1S Table 10 1 Inventory training checklist continued What are the different kinds of inventories When does your DSU perform each type Are personnel trained for all types Do inventory survey personnel understand the stock location numbering system Do inventory survey pe
253. l failure in the power source It may be damaged or destroyed because of enemy action Normal procedures should be altered as little as possible Follow short term outage procedures until it is determined that long term backup pro cedures prescribed in automated system TMs are warranted See Figure 1 1 for actions during outages You may need assistance to determine the cause of the problems that interrupt normal processing Problems may be the result of hardware malfunction operator error incorrect data or a systems incident The US Army Infor mation Software Support Systems Command maintains a 24 hour customer assistance office to support major commands using 054 See Figure 1 2 for customer assistance locations and telephone numbers 1 3 FM 10 15 Table 1 3 DS4 ADP functional processes and frequencies DAILY PROCESS Daily cycle Catalog update process Demand history update WEEKLY PROCESSES Supply performance report Excess stocks Recoverable item control process Monthly consolidation Stock status report Weekly reports Di and DO reports eWeekly consolidation AS REQUIRED PROCESSES SEMIMONTHLY PROCESS Location survey Special inventory Mass cancellation Stand alone ASL and NSL Replenishment cycle Customer DO reconciliation MONTHLY PROCESSES ASL Bottom up reconciliation Monthly transaction register OUTAGES ACTIONS Short Term Direct soldiers to process high priority request
254. l numbers MNT s 10405 00073 9421 of supplies ADN es added to document Gag 3284 2000 dli SUE Code for sensitive ml Pasco or pilferable items MTOE fh gt MEE 408 qua REQUEST FOR OA TURA UN 4150 SONA YO POET MATHUR UR Rhee Figure 8 15 MROs showing issue of sensitive or pilferable items 8 14 make sure that the additional quantities of the items were not stored in a wrong location or that they were not overlooked They should search the bins and stacks above below and next to the location listed on the MRO They should also check the locator deck to see if there is more than one location listed for the items If they still cannot find enough supplies they will have to make a partial issue When making a partial issue your storage personnel should take the following steps Prepare a manual MRO or DA Form 2765 and write partial release in block O Em JOENTIFIERROENTIFIER 4 STOCK NUMBER 1 9042 IUOS VO FM 10 15 Place the manual MRO and supplies in the customer s pickup bin Forward the MRD to the SCS and MMC for review and machine processing Figure 8 16 shows a manually prepared MRO for partial release PROCESSING MATERIEL RELEASE DENIALS An MRD also known as a w
255. ld be tight on both types of drums Reinforcing metal strips should be in place on 16 gage drums No defective thread gasket seat or weld Must be restorable to approximate orig inal contour Should be restor able to approximate original shape No indication of cracking or deterio ration Up to 3 inches deep if not more than six dents in body No restriction on length 16 gage None greater than 1 4 inch deep with no restriction on length or number 718 gage None greater than 3 4 inch deep and 5 inches in length with no more than four dents per chime None Up to 2 inches deep if not more than two dents per head None greater than 5 8 inch deep no limitation in number Up to 2 inches deep not to exceed three dents per weld HOLES ALLOWED None resulting from rust Others up to 3 4 inch in greatest dimension accept able if not morethan four holes in body 16 No holes allowed and no rup tures acceptable if they separate rein forcement from chime 18 No holes allowed and no rup tures acceptable None resulting from rust Up to 3 4 inch if not more than one hole per head None located within 2 inches of flange weld or chime Up to 3 4 inch not to exceed three holes per hoop None ALLOWABLE CONDITION OF METAL SURFACES Exterior Must be free of severepitting that would weaken drum structure Interior Must be free of pitting
256. listed i Notify the stock records section that your storage personnel will need to perform a special inventory Review any required adjustment documents Determine MRD rate using the formula below MRD Rate MRDs Total MROs Your objective is to have no MRDs AR 710 2 allows no more than a 1 percent MRD rate x 100 2 1 FM 10 15 Table 2 1 MRD troubleshooting chart POSSIBLE CAUSES TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES Duplicate receipt records Check with stock records section Stock being relocated New location not listed old locator card Old locator card not removed from the locator deck and placed in the inactive file Check with SCS for a location addition card location change card and old location bin labels incorrect location recorded Check the locator deck for any other locations listed for the items that are not shown on the MRO Search locations listed on the MRO and all locations above below and next to those locations for missing stock Review past location changes Incorrect NSN quantity or condi tion code recorded on receipt docu ment or stock locator card Check with stock records section to determine if a keypunch or computer error occurred Refer to catalog change notices to determine if the NSN or was changed and was not recorded Determine if a part number or service stock number was listed in place of
257. lities Figure 8 1 shows a shortcoming as extracted from DOD 4145 19 R 1 SHORTCOMING CAUSES RESULTS Failure to accomplish daily warehouse housekeeping actions such as stock alignment and closing lids No routine schedule for examina Lack of management emphasis Lack of training Heavy workloads Actions accumulate to major tasks Can create safety hazards General relaxation in discipline for accomplishing such actions Unsightly appearance tion or correction of such deficiencies Figure 8 1 Extract from DOD 4145 19 R 1 showing shortcoming amp 1 C1 FM 10 15 STORING INCOMING SUPPLIES When supplies are delivered to the receiving sec tion your personnel should first check them over for damages and then forward them to the stock locator and storage sections These supplies should have receipt documents DA Form 2765 1 DD Forms 1348 1 250 or 1155 or PCN AJH 112 with them These forms help your soldiers identify the supplies so they can place them in the right storage location If your DSU works under an automated system some receipt docu ments for ASL items may list a storage location when you receive them You can generally find the location on the Supplementary Address block of the receipt document Sometimes no storage location codes will be on the documents especially those for NSL items In these cases your soldiers will have to write the code on the form They shoul
258. ll make it easier to keep track of items for reorder purposes Dividing them will also keep your personnel from issuing an unserviceable item as a new issue by mistake PROCESSING SUBSTITUTE ITEMS FOR STORAGE Sometimes the supply depot will not have the item your DSU requested and will send a substitute item instead As storage supervisor you must make sure your personnel know how to tell when they receive a substitute item Substitute items have the status code BH in card columns 65 and 66 on a DD Form 1348 1 Store the substitute item separately under the substitute NSN Do not store it under the NSN of the item requested Sometimes the location listed on the receipt document is for the original item To make sure the substitute item is stored in the correct location your personnel should take the following steps Check the locator deck or the recorded location on SARSS 1 I to see if the NSN of the substitute item is listed If the NSN of the substitute item is listed your personnel should compare the location code on the receipt document or that on the location issue ticket with the one on the locator deck If the location codes are the same then the code listed on the receipt docu ment or location issue ticket is correct Your personnel should place the item in the location listed and forward the completed document to the SCS The location issue ticket is filed f the NSN on the receipt document is listed in t
259. ll members of the inventory teams given enough on the job training to do the following Fill out inventory count cards correctly identify all items being inventoried and count all types of packaged items They must know and follow safety and security requirements 10 17 FM 10 15 ALO 30 1VA ue 10 OGE 10 pae NOD 1 Peonposd spae 1unoo 9 4 spied 1unoo 82301 spie 1unoo pe npoud spied 0 00 ALO 39NV 1V8 YAGWNN U38WnN 3002 31581 930933 7171035 NOILVIOT 30 LINN 1 000 30 39Vd OSE H38WN 7VNOIA4O 8 086 C00SOES 6516852000585 6516852000585 2298 22000 28 1870755000135 0001 SZ 9279010000931 9275010000991 70001000001 82018 anug Pow s inventory count card control listing D 8 Accountable officer Figure 10 10 18 FM 10 15 VOUCHER NUMBER 350 PAGE 1 UNIT COUNT CARD STOCK COND LOCATION SERIAL NUMBER ISSUE CODE NUMBER NUMBER A Spring 1040000100047 Mod Kit 1560000105476 Mod Kit 1560000105476 Tire 2610000234692 Modifier 2510000875526 Modifier 2510000875526 Adapter 2840001112986
260. llection and classification inspectors When verification shows the need for inspection training it will be provided by quality assistance contact teams DSU units also inspect and classify organic equipment sent to higher levels of maintenance AAFES ADP ADPE AL ALOC AMC AMDF AOE API APO APOD APOE Apr AR ARC ARI ARIL ARMS ARNG ASL attn Aug AUTODIN AUTOVON bal BDU B L bldg Blvd bn BSA BIU BX GLOSSARY Army and Air Force Exchange Service availability balance file automatic data processing automatic data processing equipment air lines of communication United States Army Materiel Command Army Master Data File Army of Excellence American Petroleum Institute Army Post Office aerial port of debarkation aerial port of embarkation April Army regulation accounting requirements code automatic return item automatic return items list Army Master Data File Retrieval Microform System Army National Guard authorized stockage list attention August automatic digital network automatic voice network balance battle dress uniform bill of lading building Boulevard battalion brigade support area British thermal unit box CA Cav CDA CDR CEB CFR Chgd CIF CIIC en cnt c o co CO COD COMMZ COMSEC cond CONEX CONUS COSCOM COSIS CPT C RL crnt CS CSS CTA cu DA DC DD Dec del DI DIC FM 10 15 California cavalry card column
261. location that does not have a bin tag or placard the survey team should notify the storage supervisor He will help identify the supplies and have a bin label made The team then copies the information onto the survey work card As the teams copy the information from the locations onto the cards they should place the com pleted cards at the locations where they can be seen easily This will let other teams know that the locations have been checked Figure 10 2 page 10 9 shows the positioning of the work cards After the teams finish the survey supervisor should check the storage areas to make sure all locations have cards If a location has no DA Form 2000 3 the supervisor must send one of the survey teams to the location to make a new survey work card After checking all locations the supervisor should have the survey teams collect the cards in location sequence Then the supervisor should check both used and unused cards by serial number to see if any are missing The survey supervisor then records the survey completion time If any cards are missing the teams must make a thorough search for them If a missing card cannot be found the survey supervisor 10 7 C1 FM 10 15 should make a replacement using a blank DA Form 2000 3 You must number the new card with the serial number of the missing card Then the supervisor sends a survey team to the location that is without a card to fill out the new card from the data on the bin label
262. location listed on their next count card When the count team has filled out all the cards signed and dated them and placed them at the locations the inventory team will tell the inventory supervisor that it has finished the count Inspecting the Area When all the teams have finished counting the inventory supervisor must inspect the storage area to ensure all locations have a count card posted If he sees a location without a count card 10 23 FM 10 15 E 572 553 ue e edis 8c 385 894 OSI OVANTITY fme COUNTER z LES QUANTITY PER TOTAL QUANTITY 1271 PALLET PACKAGE AR 711 161 c22c22c12c22c22 1 1 RECOROER AND DATE j 32 32232 35 32 232 4 0 4 20420 ACCEPTED RECOUNT SUSPEND 2 BALANCE UNIT PRICE Ec o5 554 QUANTITY CIDCIDC WDC PIC VIC IO 1 2 SHORT 9 INSTALLATION INVENTORY COUNT CARD CE 2C42c82c82C42C8 45 MAE 9535 PT FIPPP PTT Lance HE pr Figure 10 11 Count card for loose stock LOCATION ity LOCATION Um 2 ig latos 1
263. ly points mobile filling station sites bulk storage facilities or tank farms you must verify the results of monthly inventories conducted by your petroleum inventory control specialists Your tasks are listed below Ensure that an all level sample is taken of all storage facilities and tank vehicles Ensure DA Form 1804 Petroleum Sample is completed and attached to the sample container Check on the determination of the API gravity Review volume correction to 60 degrees Fahrenheit using the petroleum volumetric tables cited in FM 10 69 Appendix B Review DA Form 4702 R Monthly Bulk Petroleum Accounting Summary This form serves as the supporting document for adjustment Two men can rig the load one to four drums in 5 to 15 minutes 5 PREPARATION Align drums side by side in a row 6 RIGGING a Sling set 10 000 pound or 25 000 pound capacity 1 For one drum a Route one outer and one inner sling leg 1 and 3 to the same side of a drum and the other two sling legs to the other side b Rotate the hub so one clevis is at the top c Loop the chain end of sling leg 1 through the clevis and insert link 3 in the grabhook d Repeat this procedure for sling leg 3 using the same clevis e Attach sling legs 2 and 4 to the opposite side of the drum in the same manner 2 For two drums Figure 3 1 Sample extract from FM 55 450 1 of materials personnel and procedures required to rig a
264. m bers on the supplies with those on the MRO Check to see that the customer signs both copies of the MRO His signature shows that he agrees that the quantity and any serial numbers listed on the MRO are correct Give one copy of the MRO to the customer to use as a receipt document Figure 8 4 has examples of MROs showing issue of sensitive or pilferable items PROCESSING MATERIEL RELEASE ORDERS FOR PARTIAL ISSUES Sometimes your DSU will not have the quan tity of supplies in stock that a unit requests Before your personnel issue the items on hand they must make sure that the additional quantities of the items were not stored in a wrong location or that they were not overlooked They should search the bins and stacks above below and next to the location listed on the MRO They should also check the locator deck to see if there is more than one location listed for the items If they still cannot find enough supplies they will have to make a partial issue When making a partial issue your storage personnel should take the following steps Prepare a manual MRO or DA Form 2765 and write partial release in block O Place the manual MRO and supplies in the customer s pickup bin Forward the to the SCS and MMC for review and machine processing Figure 8 5 page 8 10 shows a manually prepared for a partial release CAR TIERS SRA PD NIE cad
265. m Products Inspect all connections hoses and valves daily before during and after operations Ensure that a sample log is maintained on all sample fuel Inspect the tanker Review DA Form 2765 1 DD Form 1348 1 and DD Form 1970 Motor Equipment Utilization Record 3 1 FM 10 15 Table 3 1 Key petroleum publications SUBJECT AREAS Operation of aircraft refueling systems and equipment defueling and refueling operations for fixed wing and rotary wing fue quality surveillance fire fighting and safety PUBLICATION FM 10 68 FARE system tank vehicles safety railcar operations packaging and storage quantity and quality surveillance receipt storage issue and transportation FM 10 71 Operation and maintenance of tank and pump unit 5 000 gallon tanker series 49C 1 200 gallon tanker HEMTT 2 500 gallon tanker vehicle FM 10 427 Table 3 2 Recommended distances between FSSP components Receiving manifold Receiving pump 10 000 gallon tank 20 000 gallon tank Manifold on last tank Discharge pump Filter separator Fuel servicing nozzle Last fuel servicing nozzle 500 gallon drum filling point Last 500 gallon drum filling point Bottom loading point Set up of petroleum field operations Receiving pump Manifold on first tank 10 000 gallon tank 20 000 gallon tank Discharge pump Filter separator First fuel servicing nozzle Fuel servicing nozzle First 500 gallon
266. m is within that unit s authorized allowance If the unit wants the item it should follow the procedures listed in DA Pamphlet 710 2 1 Chapter 2 and DA Pamphlet 710 2 2 Chapter 14 Other Turn Ins For information on how to process turn ins of Army Reserve National Guard and ROTC units check AR 710 2 AR 710 1 gives procedures for processing ARIs Follow the guidelines in AR 37 111 to inventory property that is tem porarily in use C1 FM 10 15 CHAPTER 8 STORING AND SELECTING SUPPLIES FOR ISSUE Section I Storing Supplies SUPERVISING PERSONNEL As storage supervisor you must make sure your personnel store items correctly and issue them promptly You must also be sure they maintain and safeguard the supplies in their area Appendix D contains information helpful in car ing for stored supplies Set up housekeeping rules for all personnel to follow Make each section responsible for its housekeeping Make sure per sonnel follow a clean as you go plan to keep all storage areas neat and accessible Set aside cer tain times for trash collecting sweeping and general cleaning Include these tasks in your storage SOP As storage supervisor you will have to shift personnel within sections or between sections because of heavy work loads Make sure that each individual assigned to you understands his major job and what he is responsible for Remind your personnel that the shifts do not relieve them of their major responsibi
267. mn of the abstract form will be lined out except where items have been noted 16 TURN INS OCIE items turned in will be abstracted to the property book on DA Form 3645 or DA Form 3645 1 Abstracts will be consolidated at least once a month and posted to the property book 17 PROPERTY BOOK AND DOCUMENT REGISTER The property book and all supporting documents will be maintained in strict accordance with AR 710 2 and procedures in DA Pamphlet 710 2 1 Signature FM 10 15 APPENDIX C INTERNAL SOP FOR QUICK SUPPLY STORE SUBJECT Internal SOP for QSS Section TO QSS Section Personnel 1 REFERENCES AR 7102 CTA 50 970 DA Pamphlet 710 2 1 TM 38 L32 12 TM 38 L32 13 TM 38 L32 14 2 PURPOSE The purpose of this SOP is to outline duties and responsibilities for the stockage and resupply of the QSS section 3 RESPONSIBILITY The QSS NCOIC is responsible for QSS supply He is also responsible for resupply 4 PROCEDURES a QSS stock should be stored and maintained in a central location usually in the same warehouse as the rest of the ASL This speeds up customer support and replenishment transactions b Only individuals authorized to shop at the QSS will be issued 055 stock They must be identified on a DA Form 1687 Notice of Delegation of Authority Receipt for Supplies from the supported unit c If there are not enough items in stock to fill a unit request the QSS clerk must prepare an informal DO If a unit submits a high
268. n address for each item of stock that is stored in the facility As the storage supervisor of a DSU you are responsible for setting up and maintaining a stock locator system The two types of systems are the five character and the nine character For information on the nine character system see TM 743 200 1 Chapter 3 As a DSU storage supervisor you will be concerned only with the five character system You must also make sure that your soldiers under stand and use the system You should have the stock location file placed in a central area Make sure that a separate record is kept for each location that has an item in it or that has been held open for an incoming item You should have a location reserved for every item on your unit ASL You can get the ASL listing from the SCS If you have available use it to set up and maintain the stock location system SETTING UP THE LOCATOR SYSTEM To set up a good stock locator system you should start with the layout plan you prepared for the storage area Your completed planograph should show the location of storage areas or sections working shipping and receiving areas main and working aisles locker rooms and rest rooms and offices Use this planograph to assign stock location codes Each character of the five character code describes a certain row column level or segment of the storage area Only 23 letters and 9 numbers can be used for labeling The letters I O and Z and
269. n areas with limited space The two basic types of plat form trucks are the two wheeled which is called a dolly and the four wheeled which is known as a hand truck Some warehouses also use a stockpicker truck to move large quantities of small items at one time It has a built in stepladder that 11 4 storage personnel use to reach the higher shelves You should use the two wheeled truck for moving cartons cases bags and barrels short distances Use the four wheeled hand truck in stocking and packing areas CONTROLLING MATERIALS HANDLING EQUIPMENT The MHE your storage section uses is probably controlled by a central office When you need a piece of MHE contact the personnel in this office and they will dispatch it to you When you finish a job you must return the MHE to the central office If you need MHE for longer periods of time such as for maneuvers or special operations you must contact the central office for a special dispatch Since not all DSUs use these controls you should check with your accountable officer to find out what procedures your DSU follows FM 10 15 FOUR WHEELED HAND TRUCK TWO WHEELED HAND TRUCK UTILITY WAREHOUSE TRUCK STEEL WHEELED HAND TRUCK Figure 11 4 Hand lift trucks and platform trucks 11 5 FM 10 15 MAINTAINING MATERIALS HANDLING EQUIPMENT You and your personnel must keep the MHE under your care in good working order The MHE operators must make the checks perform all th
270. n document with the warehouse location shows how to use the five character stock locator system to find an item in a warehouse Determine if a possible location change is in process Follow up to ensure that location changes have been submitted if required 2 8 Ensure that personnel change the NSN condition code UI or security code data before the inventory date if required MONITOR LOCATION SURVEYS The purpose of a location survey is to ensure that supplies are stored in locations specified on locator decks and that all identifying data are correct They are generally conducted annually or prior to a wall to wall inventory lists corrective actions for common problems found during location surveys Your tasks are listed below Coordinate with the supply operations officer in scheduling location surveys SUGGESTION Try to schedule surveys during the 30 day period between monthly AMDF change notices Set up a cutoff date for posting changes to the locator file Ensure that all new data have been posted before the survey Ensure that the survey supervisor groups locator cards into survey lots according to rows aisles or survey areas Have survey teams check whether the item is serviceable Review the location error list As shown in TM 38 L32 13 this list identifies quantities on hand with no recorded location on the ABF It also identifies invalid locations and shows when items of two d
271. n showing that they are no longer responsible for the item Check each DA Form 2765 1 to make sure that the authorization document is listed The REMARKS block must contain the statement Excess unserviceable AR 735 5 AR 735 5 gives more details on the methods used to gain relief from responsibility for items Items Found on the Installation Supplies and equipment that have been lost or abandoned can be turned in as property found on the installation if they do not appear on local units property records These items must turned in immediately to the DSU that handles that class of supply The DSU will accept this property as is Units are not required to spend time 7 13 FM 10 15 or money fixing or upgrading the items before they turn them in The unit is also authorized to turn in the item without paperwork When a unit turns in an item found on the installation it does not receive turn in credit for it Once the item is accepted by your DSU the quality assurance and maintenance sections must inspect and classify it It is then sent to the receipt section where turn in paperwork is prepared Make sure your soldiers have written the NSN quantity nomenclature condition code and date of receipt on the turn in document Then send the supplies to the storage section and the documents to the SCS The item found on the installation can be reissued to the 7 14 unit turning it in as a free issue no billing if the ite
272. ncerned mainly with continually monitoring receipt storage and issue operations to improve demand satisfaction Your tasks are listed below Standardize receipt storage and issue pro cedures to eliminate unnecessary time consuming moves Review document flow to eliminate bottle necks where time may be lost Review storage layouts and use of space nspect storage areas often to monitor any problem areas which may cause invalid MRDs Perform location surveys regularly Develop step by step lists to aid location survey and inventory teams Perform a location survey during the 30 day period between monthly AMDF change notices Perform a location survey of all stock semiannually in installation DSUs MONITOR MATERIEL RELEASE DENIALS An MRD can cause a delay or failure in filling a supply request It affects demand accommodation and demand satisfaction rates SSAs have only 48 hours to determine the reasons for a denial and to correct the stock records involved An MRD requires a special inventory to determine why supplies are not on hand Your tasks are listed below Verify that the receiving section has frozen all inventory receipts for items with the NSN of the item requested Have the stock records section freeze stock record to prevent issuing anymore for that item Verify all affected MROs collected which have not been processed e Have storage 2 trouble shooting checks
273. nd after every operation Make it SOP that dust caps or plugs are placed over any loading or dispensing hoses or nozzles not in use Make sure that bulk fuel has been tested before it is allowed to enter a pipeline Ensure that soldiers follow the first in first out rule when issuing packaged petroleum products This prevents deterioration due to pro longed storage Ensure that contaminated or off specifica tion fuel is segregated Determine the source of any contamination and the feasibility of removing it so that you can reclaim the product Set up prescribed points or time intervals for sampling and testing petroleum products FM 10 70 prescribes these procedures Determine the source of contamination and take corrective action to prevent reoccurrence MONITOR STORAGE AND HANDLING OF COMPRESSED GASES Compressed gas cylinders are potentially hazardous A gas cylinder explosion can equal that of a bomb Store all compressed gas cylinders away from petroleum products and ammunition Soldiers must use extreme caution when lifting FM 10 15 storing and transporting gas cylinders Storing and handling precautions are described below Place valve protection safety caps on all small cylinders Close the valves on all empty as well as full cylinders Store empty cylinders separately from full ones Allow 50 feet of space between storage sheds for flammable gas and other buildings DOD 4145 19
274. nd derig 500 gallon fuel drums FM 10 15 Table 3 3 Troubleshooting chart for tank vehicles AUXILIARY ENGINE D po Cranks too stiffly Incorrect oil Change to recommended oil Will not start when cranked Faulty ignition Check spark plug for fouling Check for broken or defective wiring Faulty fuel system Check fuel supply and grade Fill tank with correct grade of fuel Power drops under load Restricted exhaust line Check muffler exhaust pipe and spark arrester Governor not adjusted Adjust governor or notify organi zational maintenance Faulty fuel system Check fuel supply and grade Fill tank with correct grade of fuel Backfire at carburetor Incorrect fuel Refill with correct fuel Dirty sediment bowl Clean sediment bowl Low oil pressure Oil too low or diluted Drain and fill with correct grade of oil High oil pressure Oil too heavy Drain and fill with correct grade of oil Excessive oil consumption Oil too viscous or diluted Drain and fill with correct grade of blue smoke oil Too much oil Drain to proper level Oii filter tube cap leaks air Check gasket for condition and proper fit If defective notify organi zational maintenance Knocks Oil too low or diluted Drain and fill with correct grade of oil CENTRIFUGAL PUMP em pom Fails to deliver product or
275. nel moving in and out of these areas You should assign one of your soldiers to be responsible for secured areas Give the keys to the locked portions only to the key custodian and the officer in charge of the storage section You will need to inventory most of these items quarterly Some sensitive items require a monthly inventory Check AR 190 11 for other information you will need to know in controlling these items 5 3 FM 10 15 Classified Items Classified items include documents and supply items that need protection because of their impor tance to the national security Store these items in specific types of secured areas They also require special handling Any storage personnel who work with classified items must have a security clearance and be under constant supervisory control Perishable Items Perishable items such as food film and batteries can stay in storage for a limited time only because they will spoil or become outdated Sometimes these items also require special handling Many perishable items must be kept in areas that are refrigerated or temperature controlled If you must store perishable items in a single storage area be sure to keep items that give off odors away from those that can absorb odors For example do not store onions and fish near butter or milk Check AR 30 18 for information on the storage of perishables Oddly Shaped or Fragile Items These items require special handling because of th
276. ng steps Select a new storage location and make a new bin label or stock tag Put all new receipts of the item in the new location Mark this additional listing on the old locator card Make a new locator card and a location change card Send the location change card to the SCS Check to make sure the old locator card was C1 FM 10 15 removed from the locator dock and discarded See Chapter 6 for information on how to make new locator cards locator change cards and location addition cards When the DSU is operating under SARSS 1 I SARSS will initiate the location maintenance process Relocate Because of a Change or Consolidation Notice Sometimes you will need to relocate supplies be cause you receive a catalog change notice or a notice of consolidation The catalog change notice is a cross reference listing that your storage section can use to identify stock numbers and UI changes This notice tells you when the stock number is no longer valid It also tells where items with the old stock number are stored SARSS users follow the procedures in ADSMI18 L19 AJH BUR EM 054 users follow the procedures in TM 38 L32 13 for the catalog change process Section II Selecting Items from Storage CHOOSING ITEMS FOR ISSUE As storage supervisor you are responsible for see ing that the comet supplies are selected for issue When a unit requests an item the SCS personnel make an for the storage
277. nload items For the M129A2C van example two rows of bins will yield the following 1 5 feet x 2 rows 3 feet 8 feet vehicle width 3 feet 5 feet of aisle space The M129A2C van can hold at least two rows of nine aids for 506 34 cubic feet of storage space 18 x 28 13 cubic feet Two rows of aids provides an oversized aisle of 5 feet for loading and unloading As noted previously aisle space is to be considered unusable for storage and is subtracted from the total usable cubic feet of the vehicle To compute the usable cubic feet of storage capacity remaining with the use of two rows of storage aids multiply aisle length by aisle width by aisle height and subtract the total from the total usable cubic feet of the vehicle The compu tation is as follows 29 72 feet x 5 feet x 6 3 feet 936 18 aisle cubic feet of aisle space 1 497 89 cubic feet vehicle 936 18 aisle cubic feet aisle space 561 71 usable cubic feet Storage capacity could be increased further by adding another row of nine aids in the center of the van see Figure 12 2 This would increase usable storage space to 759 24 cubic feet 253 08 506 16 but it would reduce aisle width In this case only small items could be moved through the narrow aisles and stored 12 3 FM 10 15 L L ia ia Figure 12 2 The 12 ton M129A2C semitrailer van with bins 22 5 Ton 871 Breakbulk Semitrailer Th
278. not exceed 10 code must be U Accounting requirements code ARC must be X Recoverability code RC must be Z MATCAT code position 2 must be 2 C1 FM 10 15 7 Fund code FC must be either or blank 8 Reportable item control code RICC must be 0 9 Essentiality code EC must be J except that where a QSS is established EC G items that receive nine demands in the control period and meet all other QSS criteria will be transferred to QSS accounting 10 Supply category of materiel code SCMC position is 9 Notes 1 All critical except are found in the ARMS Monthly AMDF 2 Criterion is found in the stock record account Figure 4 8 QSS stockage criteria extracted from DA Pamphlet 710 2 2 FM 10 15 PART TWO SUPPLY OPERATIONS CHAPTER 5 CONTROLLING STORAGE SPACE Section I Determining Space This chapter is for the storage supervisor RESPONSIBILITIES Storage space is the most critical and basic resource of any DSU storage facility The amount of storage space that is available is often limited Most DSUs usually cannot obtain additional space Therefore you must make the best use of all available space in many types of storage facilities How effectively your storage section operates depends upon how fully you use the MHE assigned to your section You will need to plan your storage areas so that this equipment can be used as much as possible As storage supervisor you
279. ns of spill countermeasures and applicable spill control materials from Table 3 5 FM 10 71 details spill control procedures to follow when loading or unloading petroleum tank vehicles Your tasks are listed below Schedule cleanup drills so that section per sonnel become expert at spill cleanup Require daily inspections of storage han dling and transfer equipment Ensure that section personnel document regular equipment checks on Form 2404 Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet Report immediately through command chan nels any offshore oil and hazardous substance discharges of 50 gallons or more Request engineer support to construct con tainment devices CFR 40 lists specific construc tion requirements Submit a spill report according to CFR 40 through command channels for any oil spills of 1 000 gallons or more or whenever two oil spills occur in a 12 month period Dispose of mixed petroleum water according to the unit SOP and EPA regulations Dispose of sludge according to instructions in AR 200 1 SUPERVISE PACKAGED PETROLEUM STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION Set up separate areas for each product and type of package to simplify inventory and stock control of packaged petroleum products Figures 3 3 through 3 5 illustrate suggested storage layouts for 5 gallon cans 55 gallon drums and 500 gallon collapsible drums Your tasks are listed below Ensure that high flash and l
280. nt cards he gives them to his count card control listing He will use this listing to keep track of all the cards The steps in the inventory are described below Counting Stock The teams go to the storage locations listed on the count cards At each location the counter reads aloud the location stock number and UI from the bin label and supply containers The recorder compares this information with the data listed on the count card Loose stock If the location is filled with loose stock the counter will count each item and tell the recorder the total number of supplies in that location Since the supplies are not in packages as listed on the count card the team should write the word LOOSE on the card and enter the final count in the Total Quantity column Figure 10 11 shows a count card prepared for loose stock Packaged stock If the location has supplies that are in packages or boxes the counter calls out the number of packages and the number of supplies in each package The recorder writes this information in the correct columns and multiplies the two figures He writes the total in the Total Quantity column Figure 10 12 shows a count card prepared for packaged stock 10 21 FM 10 15 10 22 Table 10 8 Lumber measurement conversion table NOMINAL CROSS SECTION 1 12 11 2 4 1 2xBe 11 2 x 10 11 2 12 2x 10
281. ntory count Incorrect issue quantities Hidden containers Crushed or damaged supplies Incorrect count of stock on hand Incorrect inventory count Delay in performing location survey and inventory Delay in supply fill Increase in MRDs Make change complete with needed bin label or location placard Note all changes on receipt documents Submit location addition cards to your stock control section Ensure storage personnel check card column DD Form 1348 1 receipt documents Code BH indi cates that an intercha is being shipped See Figure 2 5 Correct data listed on labels tags or placards Notify stock records section of change to correct accounting records Prepare an MRD with code 5 in card column 72 to indicate the item is being reidentified Recount Adjust stock record balances to match on hand quantities Restack Relocate stocks if necessary Reinventory Restencil container or package markings Prepare new bin labels or location placards Note problem on stock locator cards to avoid confusion during location surveys and inventories 2 7 FM 10 15 NOTE Stress that issue personnel must never place sensitive or pilferable items in customer bins or at customer pickup points These items must remain in the restricted storage area Storage personnel are to send only the MRO to the issue point Provide In Transit Controls Take steps to reduce in transit e
282. nts begins long before the storage section receives an MRO You should set up the location of the receipt storage and issue shipping sections so your personnel can withdraw stock and prepare items for shipping easily and quickly You begin planning for an individual shipment when the storage section receives the release order As storage supervisor you must decide what shipping arrangements need to be made Use the questions below to help you set up guidelines for handling the shipment 9 6 What is the quantity weight and cube of the items being shipped If the item weighs more than 10 000 pounds check with the installation transportation officer that supports your DSU You may need a special release authorization e Will the item need any special security packing marking or MHE What is the PD The PD tells you how soon an item must be shipped Is item to be shipped by air truck water or rail or is it to be mailed Where the supplies being shipped It is your responsibility to give the transportation office personnel all the information they will need to get a route order for the carrier Discuss any special problems with the supervisor of the warehouse and shipping sections before the items are pulled from the warehouse The two sections will have to work together to get the items moved from the storage section to the packing section When you set up guidelines for preparing shipments try to
283. nventoried MRD Rate MRDs 100 Total MROs Location Accuracy Index Number correct locations 10096 Total locations surveyed UMMIPS High Priority Requisition Rates PDs O1 03 PDs O1 08 Legend greater than less than through the DS4 Your duties deal mainly with reviewing the receipt not DI listing Your tasks are listed below e Research incorrect stock numbers when the remark Skeleton ABF Created appears in the Remarks block of the receipt not DI listing Check for possible keypunch errors when duplicate document numbers appear on the listing If necessary have soldiers prepare a decrease adjustment document Coordinate with storage supervisors to deter mine if there has been a double shipment Prepare a SF 361 Transportation Discre pancy Report for duplicate shipments REVIEW SUPPLY STATUS Under 054 supply status documents on ASL and non ASL outstanding requisitions will be sent automatically to SSAs 054 also produces an ASL status review list on the status of ASL replenish ment requisitions that require manager review Your office will also receive supply status cards in response to requests for follow up TM 38 L32 13 1 9 FM 10 15 960 tl 0 0 0 0 0 O 00 00 00 9000 9000 9000 60 tl c9 0 0 1v8 0u32 S3NI 2555 S3NI1 9555 1 101 0832 S3NI1 SSO 9ot 950 0 01 0 0 0 4 81 91 9E L IHd IH
284. o coordinate the shipment with the instal lation transportation officer There may be special packing or marking requirements for the type of item you are shipping It is your duty to see that your personnel give the Transportation Office the information necessary to get the supplies shipped Your issue shipping section is also responsible for filling out the address label DD Form 1387 Military Shipment Label that goes on each container Section personnel fill out this label differently for oversea shipments and for shipments within CONUS Figure 9 9 shows samples of how this is done Check DOD 4500 32 R Volume 1 or STP 10 76V24 SM TG step by step guidelines on how to fill out the labels RETURNING RETROGRADE CARGO Retrograde cargo is materiel that is being returned to the US from oversea commands because they cannot provide the proper level of maintenance support or repair parts Retrograde items can include hazardous or dangerous items which might cause fires or damage to the environ ment if mishandled during shipment In these cases you will need special equipment such as waterproof barriers special cushioning or blocking and bracing of items special facilities for storage and specially trained personnel to process the supplies These items may also require special inspection and shipping procedures You must make sure your personnel know how to pack mark preserve store and transfer retrograde items Not all retrog
285. o maintaining all combat ASL items readily accessible and mobile DEPLOYMENT In the event of unit deployment load all combat ASL items before any other ASL items Upload all MPL lines before any other combat ASL items Leave behind nonessential and excess items of supply for which there is no space 12 1 FM 10 15 Section II Computation And Configuration Of Usable Storage Capacity COMPUTATION At times you will need to compute and configure the usable storage capacity of a vehicle The steps you must take are described below Determine unusable length and subtract unusable length from total vehicle length Then determine unusable height and sub tract unusable height from total vehicle height Determine unusable width and subtract unusable width from total vehicle width Compute total cubic feet available usable length x width x height If aisle space is needed aisle cubic feet must be subtracted from total usable cubic feet available Select an appropriate storage aid and com pute its cubic feet Compute number of storage aids required STORAGE AIDS Storage aids can be standard wooden pallets metal bins cabinets racks shelving frames and CONEXs Storage aids obtained through supply channels are normally of a uniform size If the storage aids are unit produced or manufactured ensure that they do not become the bulk of the vehicle load The number of individual combat ASL items to be c
286. of Water Supplies at Fixed Installations MED 577 Occupational and Environmental Health Sanitary Control and Surveillance of Field Water Supplies TECHNICAL MANUALS 5 678 Repairs and Utilities Petroleum Oils and Lubricants POL 11 415 Primary Batteries Dry and Reserve Types 38 LO3 series Standard Army Intermediate Level Supply System 38 L03 17 Standard Army Intermediate Level Supply System SAILS Storage Operations 38 L32 series Direct Support Unit Standard Supply System 054 38 L32 11 Functional Users Manual for Direct Support Unit Standard Supply System DS4 Customer User Procedures Divisional and Nondivisional 38 112 12 Functional Users Manual for Direct Support Unit Standard Supply System 054 Storage Operations Procedures Divisional and Nondivisional 38 L32 13 Functional Users Manual for Direct Support Unit Standard Supply System 254 Stock Control and Supply Control Procedures Division and Nondivision 38 L32 14 Functional Users Manual for Direct Support Unit Standard Supply System 054 Executive Management Procedures Divisional and Nondivisional 38 230 1 Packaging of Materiel Preservation Vol I 38 230 2 Packaging of Materiel Preservation Vol II 743 200 1 Storage and Materials Handling 743 200 2 Storage Modernization 743 200 3 Storage and Materials Handling 746 series Marking and Packaging of Supplies and Equipment Technical manuals in the 38 L32 series are not available through normal distri
287. of Army Publications and Blank Forms Logistic Control Activity LCA Information and Procedures Using Unit Supply System Manual Procedures Supply Support Activity Supply System Manual Procedures Management of Excess Materiel and Materiel Returns Unit Commander s Supply Handbook The Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE FORMS 250 805 1155 1348 1 1348 6 1384 1387 1487 1970 Material Inspection and Receiving Report Storage Space Management Report Order for Supplies or Services Request for Quotations DOD Single Line Item Release Receipt Document DOD s Single Line Item Requisition System Document Manual Long Form Transportation Control and Movement Document Military Shipment Label DOD Materiel Adjustment Document Motor Equipment Utilization Record DOD REGULATIONS AND MANUALS 4140 25 M Procedures for the Management of Petroleum Products References 3 FM 10 15 4145 19 R 1 45W 32 R Vol 1 5100 76 M FIELD MANUALS Storage and Materials Handling Military Standard Transportation and Movement Procedures Physical Security of Sensitive Conventional Arms Ammunition and Explosives 5 20 Camouflage 5 105 Topographic Operations 10 14 Unit Supply Operations Manual Procedures 10 16 General Fabric Repair 10 18 Petroleum Terminal and Pipeline Operations 10 20 Organizational Maintenance of Military Petroleum Pipelines Tanks and Related Equipment 10 23 Army Food Service Operati
288. oint near the water point but far away from the Class III distribution or supply point Select a site close to the main supply route To prevent traffic congestion plan for entrances and exits separate from each other Your tasks are listed below Coordinate with your supply operations officer and ration distribution sergeant to determine subsistence items to be stocked Compute weight and cube of Class I stocks to provide movement requirement data for your supply operations officer Use Table 2 7 Use Part Two of FSCC 8900 SL to determine how many items are in a case CS units do not break cases Review stock status data reported on DA Form 2060 R Status Report Report of Class I Supplies Use DA Form 3294 R Field Ration Issue Slip to plan receipt and distribution operations 10 24 covers ration breakdown point operations MONITOR CLASS I STORAGE Storage of Class I supplies may range from 5 5 STONs at forward distribution points to 44 37 STONs at main supply points Supplies received at the Class I point must be inspected and placed on dunnage Quantities must be verified against data listed on the DD Form 1348 1 JULIAN DATE TIME NOTIFIED NOTIFIED 3d 3d Inf Bn Mech 6th 32d inf 8n Mech 2d 32d Inf 8n Mech 506th Spt Troops Co SFC Robert A Short SFC Robert D Cole SFC Sam E Jones SFC John Doe FM 10 15 PERSON NOTIFIED REMARKS Pickup 9329 To be picked up 9332 as a
289. ok up payload capabilities in TBs 55 46 1 and 55 46 2 Determine time required for local haul and line haul round trips to and from supported and supporting units Determine how the above time estimates will change when vehicles are forced to use alternate supply routes Follow up on transportation requests when necessary Request airlift support when necessary COORDINATE CLASS OPERATIONS Routine resupply demands and emergency resupply requests for Class I rations must pass through your office Your soldiers edit those from supported units They keypunch or transmit data to the MMC 054 SAILS and SARSS do not provide automated printouts on Class I demands Your tasks are listed below e Review the stockage objective DS and GS units maintain an operating stock of 3 to 10 days of supply Require units operating field kitchens to request their rations from your Class I supply point on a scheduled basis normally three to five days in advance Coordinate with the Class I manager in the MMC and with the Assistant Chief of Staff Materiel in the DISCOM COSCOM or TAACOM Pass along information on ration policy order frequency ration and issue cycle and OST Have your office overprint DA Form 3294 R Field Ration Issue Slip for each day of the ration cycle Submit a consolidated operational ration issue report to the MMC at the end of each month Sign off on DA Form 2060 R Status Report
290. ome kind of receipt document This document helps you identify the su It tells you if the supplies are for stock or if they were ordered for a specific unit The document also tells you the quantity of supplies shipped and the dates they were ordered and chipped It gives their storage location and shows if any are still clue in You will use this document as a tally sheet when you check in the containers as they are unloaded Your DSU will use five receipt documents Figures 7 1 through 7 4 show samples of these documents DA Form 2765 DA Form 2765 1 and DD Form 1348 1 DA Form 2765 DA Form 2765 1 Request for Issue or Turn In and DD Form 1348 1 DOD Single Line Item Release Receipt Document are used as receipt documents for supplies shipped from military depots and military storage activi ties At a DSU you will handle mostly DD Forms 1348 1 However items representing recurring requests and emergency issue items may be received with DA Forms 2765 or 2765 1 DD Form 250 DD Form 250 Material inspection and Receiving Report is sent with supplies ordered from civilian procurement sources These items do not have NSNs or part numbers are not in the federal catalog system or are urgently needed The form is also used to ship standard issue items with directly from the manufacturer DD Form 1155 DD Form 1155 Order for Supplies or Services Request for Quotations is used when supplies are ordered from local
291. ome to pickup supplies your issue shipping section soldiers must PERSON NOTIFIED INE BN 70 BE PICKED UP 9332 PER TELECOM WITH 47 CARTER PAST BN y THAT SUPPLI asa MEN SFE Sam ONES WERE SENT BACK 70 Roar Figure 9 1 Sample customer unit notification log C1 FM 10 15 compare the unit s DA Form 1687 with the customer s identification form They must check the expiration dates on both forms The names and signatures should be the same Figure 9 2 shows a sample of both forms and the entries that are to be checked Customers may also present a DA Form 5977 Authorization Card when picking up supplies This form is used in lieu of DA Form 1687 and is issued by the organization requesting and receiving supplies from the SSA or DSU Details concerning the use of this form are in DA Pamphlet 710 2 1 Chapter 2 Do not use this form to issue sensitive items such as weapons ammunition or COMSEC materiel Your issue clerk is responsible for making sure only authorized personnel receive sup plies Be sure to include customer identification pro cedures in your storage SOP Your issue shipping section personnel should set up a filing system to protect the signature forms from wear and tear A filing system also makes it easier to locate the correct signa ture form for the identification check File these forms in DODAAC numerical or alphabetical order by unit name NOTICE O
292. onditions you could stack items to a height of 12 feet What is your capacity in cubic feet Attainable Cubic Capacity The attainable capacity in cubic feet is affected by the MHE capability floor load limitations and safety regulations For example your storage area has 1 134 square feet of net storage space Due to an overhead sprinkler system and floor load limitations for this section the maximum height you can stack items safely is 9 feet To find your attainable capacity in cubic feet multiply the net storage area by the maximum stacking height 1 134 square feet x 9 feet 10 206 capacity in cubic feet Bin Cubic Capacity To find the cubic capacity of a storage bin multiply the outside dimensions of the bin length x width x height together 5 18 NOTE Do not include the unused space above the bin in figuring the dimensions Rack Cubic Capacity To find the cubic capacity of a rack section multiply the outside dimensions of the rack length x width x height and add this result to the cubic space of the area above the racks that can be safely used for storage DOLLAR VALUE PER CUBIC FOOT To find the dollar value per cubic foot of storage space divide the total dollar value of a specific stored item by the cubic feet it occupies For example you are storing cases of paper plates in 576 cubic feet of space The total cost for the paper plates is 7 874 To find how much it is costing you to store 1 cubic foot
293. ons 10 24 Ration Distribution Operations 10 52 Water Supply in Theaters of Operations 10 52 1 Water Supply Point Equipment and Operations 10 60 Subsistence Supply and Management in Theaters of Operations 10 68 Aircraft Refueling 10 69 Petroleum Supply Point Equipment and Operations 10 70 Inspecting and Testing Petroleum Products 10 71 Petroleum Tank Vehicle Operations 10 280 Mobile Field Laundry Clothing Exchange and Bath Operations 10 427 Petroleum Supply Company 10 564 Airdrop of Supplies and Equipment Rigging Fuel Drums 38 725 1 Direct Support DSS Commander s Handbook 55 450 1 Army Helicopter External Load Operations 55 450 3 Multi Service Helicopter External Air Transport Basic Operating Equipment 55 450 4 Multi Service Helicopter External Air Transport Single Point Load Rigging 55 450 5 Multi Service Helicopter External Air Transport Dual Point Load Rigging 100 10 Combat Service Support 101 10 1 1 Staff Officers Field Manual Organizational Technical and Logistical Data Volume 1 101 10 1 2 Staff Officers Field Manual Organizational Technical and Logistical Data Planning Factors Volume 2 MILITARY HANDBOOKS 200G References 4 Quality Surveillance Handbook for Fuels Lubricants and Related Products FM 10 15 201B Petroleum Operations Military handbooks are available from Commanding Officer Naval Publications and Forms Center ATTN NPFC 106 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia PA 19120 5099
294. oops and time available NATO OCONUS OPSEC OMC amp S QSTAG RMA 52 SDT STAMIS STANAG TACCS ULLS North Atlantic Treaty Organization outside continental United States operations security Quartermaster Center and School quadripartite standardization agreement reparable management activity Intelligence Officer U S Army self development test Standard Army Management In formation System standardization agreement Tactical Army Combat Service Support Computer System unit level logistics system Glossary 5 FM 10 15 REFERENCES RELATED PUBLICATIONS Related publications are sources of additional information They are not required in order to understand this publication ARMY REGULATIONS 12 12 Processing Discrepancy Reports Against Foreign Military Sales Shipments 25 30 The Army Integrated Publishing and Printing Program 30 18 Army Troop Issue Subsistence Activity Operating Procedures 37 111 Working Capital Funds Army Stock Fund Uniform Policies Principles and Procedures Governing Army Stock Fund Operations 40 5 Preventive Medicine 40 61 Medical Logistics Policies and Procedures 55 38 Reporting of Transportation Discrepancies in Shipments 115 11 Army Topography 190 11 Physical Security of Arms Ammunition and Explosives 200 1 Environmental Protection and Enhancement 340 series Office Management 380 5 Department of the Army Information Security Program 380 380 Automation Security 385 30 Safety
295. op engines The light clockwise from the individual counterclockwise from the is moved horizontally back and giving the signal from top to individual giving the signal from forth several times across the bottom describing a circle 12 to top to bottom describing a circle path of approaching traffic to 18 inches in diameter 12 to 18 inches in diameter Stop vehicles The same signal is used to stop engines Figure 2 5 Light signals 2 14 FM 10 15 Table 2 7 Weight and volume planning factors for operational rations Meal ready to eat individual 12 meais Food packet long range patrol 40 packets Food packet survival general purpose 24 packets Ration supplement sundries pack one pack per 100 soldiers per day 1 packet Ration supplement aid station 1 packet makes 100 8 oz drinks T Ration 6 trays SUPERVISE WATER POINT OPERATIONS Soldier morale welfare and health depend on a safe water supply Depending on your assign ment you may have to supervise water puri fication storage testing and distribution Water is provided by supply point distribution Your tasks are listed below Reconnoiter operation sites The 53 coor dinates water reconnaissance efforts with the 54 Coordinate with the logistics staff on pro jected water requirements of supported units Coordinate with the preventive medicine soldier on water quality checks Refer to TB MED 576 and TB MED 577 Ensure an ad
296. or a piece of lumber you need to know the size kind and use of the piece of lumber You also need to know the FSC code The FSC code for lumber is 5510 Get the other information by checking and measuring the lumber in question When you have this information check the Federal Supply Catalog identification listing These listings are issued quarterly on microfiche The SCS or the editing section of your DSU should have a copy The listings are made in FSC code sequence to help you locate items easily Look under the FSC code 5510 until you find the description of the lumber you are inventorying The description also will list the NSN After you find the NSN check the stock record for this FM 10 15 number It will give the total number of board feet which you have on hand for that piece of lumber Recording Lumber Counts You inventory lumber by size and length When you make a count card on lumber you must relabel some of the columns Figure 10 10 shows how to relabel the count card It also shows which section of the card the inventory team fills out and which section the SCS fills out after the inventory PERFORMING THE INVENTORY After completing the preinventory actions you are ready to start the inventory The inventory supervisor assigns the inventory teams to specific portions of the storage areas and gives them the count cards for those areas He should log the names of the team members and the serial numbers of the cou
297. or classified items Analyze traffic flow Evaluate the cost of rewarehousing in terms of soldiers needed time and money against the value of space to be reclaimed Fill out DD Form 805 Storage Space Manage ment Report once or twice a year according to AR 740 1 Use data from local storage space status reports MONITOR STORAGE OPERATIONS Incorrect storage procedures may delay demand fill and cause unnecessary MRDs They cost SSAs time labor and stocks and waste MHE and transportation assets Your tasks are listed below Monitor stockage procedures Ensure that soldiers issue older stocks first Spot check stock locations Have storage per sonnel maintain a file listing empty locations Ensure that soldiers are taking adequate preservation and security measures SUGGESTION Have storage personnel flag stock locator cards in some way to identify classified and pilferable items Ensure aisles are clearly marked Make sure supplies are stacked correctly Take proper care in storing combustible or hazardous supplies Setup a storage control system for shelf life stocks Check on the preservation and condition of unpackaged items 2 6 Ensure that soldiers perform maintenance and inspections on equipment in storage Review equipment maintenance records Monitor storage problems Common storage problems and corrective actions are listed in Table 2 3 MAINTAIN SECURITY OF PILFERAB
298. or in shelf boxes Shelf Box The shelf box is used to store small items which cannot be stored efficiently on open shelving Notched Spacers Notched spacers are made of lengths of hardwood that have been cut a special way so cylinders can rest in the depressions Cylinders or pipes can be stacked neatly They also allow some items to be removed without destroying the balance of the stack Bin A bin is used for storing small items such as repair parts and electronic parts Have open lots in divided storage bins so that you can select and issue these items easily Section III Computing Storage Space RESPONSIBILITIES As storage supervisor you must fill out many different storage space reports You will also be asked to provide storage data for briefs and other reports that require you to make various mathe matical computations To get the necessary infor mation you must be able to compute storage space GROSS STORAGE SPACE The gross storage space for an area is the total number of square feet in an area including aisles minus the space unusable for storage operations The space not used for storage is referred to as standby out granted or unusable space For example if your storage area is 35 by 60 feet with an area of unusable space that measures 12 by 8 feet what is the gross storage space The steps below show you how to compute the gross storage space Step 1 Find total area 35 x 60 feet 2 10
299. orm 2000 3 Installation Inventory Count Card showing DIC YDL as an output to your unit If your DSU has ADPE the SCS and MMC provide a preprinted deck of stock location cards showing DIC YDL for each NSN in stock The deck is in stock number sequence DA Form 2000 3 is a multipurpose card that can also be used as a location survey work card Use DA Form 2765 to report items that need locations added to or deleted from the locator deck You should also use it to combine two or more locations into one Stock location cards for shelf life items should first be placed in NSN order and then filed by condition code The first locator card within a specific condition code should be for the item having the least amount of shelf life left This card should be FM 10 15 followed by the card with the next oldest date File the card with the oldest shelf life date last Make sure that this first in first out rule is followed in all sections NOTE There will be no locator card decks used under SARSS or DS4 desktop There will be location listings available in either stock number or location sequence The listing of stock numbers in NIIN sequence can help relocate stocks and identify stocks with no location NOTE This change deletes Figures 6 9 and 6 10 MAINTAINING THE LOCATOR FILE Keep the locator file at a central point near the receiving section since this is the area where most of the locator activity takes place Set up step by st
300. ost storage sections use the light duty and rough terrain forklift trucks Figure 11 1 shows both types They are described below Light duty forklift truck This truck has a 2 000 pound load capacity and a 100 inch lift It can be used in areas with low overhead clearance It also can be used indoors because it can be gasoline or electric powered and have either solid or semisolid rubber tires Use this forklift for loading and unloading trucks that have low mast heights Rough terrain forklift truck This truck has a load capacity that ranges from 4 000 to 10 000 pounds upon the model It can be gasoline or diesel powered and has high floatation pneumatic tires that help it move in unprepared or unstabilized areas You should use 11 1 FM 10 15 LIGHT DUTY FORKLIFT TRUCK Figure 11 1 Light duty and rough terrain forklift trucks this forklift in field areas Use it mainly for loading and unloading flatbed semitrailers and for stacking large heavy loads Warehouse Tractor and Trailer A warehouse tractor is a gasoline or electric powered vehicle used to pull one or more warehouse trailers The tractor has a drawbar pull ranging from 2 000 to 7 500 pounds and has either solid rubber or pneumatic tires The warehouse trailer is platform mounted on wheels It is used to carry loads of various sizes You can hook two or more trailers together to form a train when you need to move a large number of suppli
301. ot included in the survey Reporting date reporting point and schedule for survey team members Explanation of training for survey team members Explanation of the duties of the survey team members PERFORMING THE SURVEY A location survey is a physical check of actual storage locations against items recorded on the ABF This survey is very important to ensure storage of items in the locations identified on the ABF It is usually done once a year or prior to a wall to wall inventory Also during daily operations it maybe necessary to relocate items to store material correctly Report these location changes promptly to the SCS MMC or the SARSS document control section To conduct the survey the survey teams compare each location survey work card with the data on the bin label or item placard at each storage location The procedures they use for locating marking and recording the storage locations and errors depend on whether your DSU uses pre printed or handmade location survey work cards and location listings Specific procedural guidance for conducting the location survey within SARSS 1 I is in ADSMs 38 L19 AJH BUR UM 18 L19 AJH BUR EM USING HANDMADE LOCATION SURVEY WORK CARDS If your DSU keeps a manual locator file or if it does not use a locator deck your location survey teams must write all the location data on blank DA Forms 2000 3 You must also give these cards serial numbers for control purpos
302. ou must have no more than one open box per item The lid must be kept closed to keep the materials clean C1 FM 10 15 LOCATION PLACARD 2926 4 294 3992 adl an el le GANGCA STOCK NUMBER STOCK NUMBER DA FORM 3779 2926 66 199 5 02 EE 22222222252 125222 n mE SENE T CU BD Nev Cumberland Army Depot on Cumberland PA 17976 APO NY 12345 CLASSIFICATION NOMENCLATURE a NOMENCLATURE F Spark Plug iv _ EP mE Sq Figure 6 15 DA Forms 3778 and 3779 filled out using data from receipt document 6 11 FM 10 15 MAKING LOCATION SITE FORMS As storage supervisor you must be able to show your soldiers how to make location placards for new bulk supplies and how to replace location placards that are missing at the location site You must also be able to chow them how to make loose issue labels for new bin e or remake labels missing from storage bins Loose issue labels are sometimes called bin tags or bin labels Use DA Form 3779 Location Placard and DA Form 3778 Loose Issue Label to make these location markers Make out the location form when you receive the item Take it with the item when you put it into storage This will help you avoid making more than one trip to a new location Figure 6 15 shows how to fill out DA Forms 3778 and 3779 using data from the receipt document To complete these location markers copy the item s stock number
303. ou will need to monitor the storage and issue of Class VII items listed on command controlled or regulated items lists These items require command approval prior to release DIRECT HELICOPTER EXTERNAL AIR TRANSPORT SLINGLOAD OR REQUEST AIRDROP SUPPORT Heavy outsized or critically needed end items can be transported by helicopters or airdropped from Air Force aircraft Ground units can then obtain these items when and where they are needed in accordance with METT T factors FM 55 450 series manuals describe how to hookup loads for helicopter external air transport sling load and provide information on equipment and personnel needs and the use of dual point hook loads FM 10 500 series manuals describe procedures used in rigging supplies and equipment for airdrop Only in airdrop missions will you require special assistance from soldiers with MOS 43E Para chute Rigger to assist or rig and to recover and derig items used in airdrop support operations Your tasks are listed below Requisition slings A 22 bags cargo nets and containers needed to assemble the load or items for sling load Assign crews to assemble and inspect all loads and guide helicopters for sling load operations Plan for appropriate actions for airdrop needs or sustainment requirements to include rigging support Coordinate through appropriate command channels for airdrop requests Use FM 10 500 1 and FM 100 27 to plan coordinate and request air
304. ould review the MPLs of supported units to determine possible impact on your ASL MPLs identify mandatory stockage quantities of combat essential repair parts The ASL is required to umbrella customer MPL stocks As a result of the continuing effort to standardize a combat ASL and reduce the number of decisions needed to determine which ASL lines to stock MPLs have been consolidated into three pamphlets DA Pamphlet 710 2 3 is for combat arms DA Pamphlet 710 2 4 is for combat support units and DA Pamphlet 710 2 6 is for aviation units The consolidated MPLs are to be updated semiannually NOTE Proposals have been made to eliminate com bat prescribed load lists and mandatory parts lists and to abolish retention authority If this becomes policy it will be explained in AR 710 2 USE LIF TO DETERMINE SUPPLY STATUS The LIF is a computer data bank of supply requisi tions and transportation documents maintained by the US AMC LCA It covers requisitions for all items except subsistence bulk petroleum and ammunition AR 725 50 Chapter 6 describes the file management data provided and inquiry capabilities You can use data from this file to take the following actions Check on the latest status of a requisition You should first request status through your supporting supply activities You may call in urgent inquiries on DSN 586 5823 or 5824 or send a priority message Refer to DA Pamphlet 700 30 for information on using the LI
305. our stock location files Table 10 2 Storage problems and errors Mixed stock Questionable condition of items in stock Questionable identity of items in stock Unclear markings on containers or packages the items Multiple open boxes of supplies 10 4 ERROR PROBLEM DESCRIPTION Two or more national stock numbers stored in one location Damaged items that need to be technically inspected to find out if they are unserviceable Items that do not have stock numbers on their containers or that cannot be identified by storage personnel Containers or packages that do not have readable labels to help identify Supplies nae SLACK EU containers and crush or break supplies Boxes that have items missing This can cause incorrect inventory counts or improper issues 22 lv and unies urimormme r C1 FM 10 15 Table 10 3 Frequency of inventories TYPES OF SUPPLIES FREQUENCY AUTHORITY Sensitive items items shown on the AMDF with SEC 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 N P Q and R Controlled substances and tax free alcohol Hazardous items Precious metals Medical items Communication security items Weapons and ammunition Selection items Quarterly Quarterly Quarterly Varies Semiannually Quarterly As directed by commander DA Pam 710 2 2 AR 40 61 AR 40 61 AR 40 61 AR 40 61 380
306. ow flash pro ducts are stored separately Require that containers be inspected before they are placed in storage Table 3 6 lists other inspection checks Check that no containers are stored in direct contact with the ground Ensure that packaged lubes stored outdoors are covered with tarpaulins or stored in sheds Ensure that stocks are rotated so that oldest stocks are issued first Inspect containers weekly for damage and leaks Use Tables 3 7 and 3 8 which list can and drum deterioration limits Supervise the yearly inventory of packaged products Adjust inventory discrepancies according to AR 735 5 Require gate guards to collect matches and lighters from customers Inspect vehicles making deliveries picking up items Table 3 5 Material and equipment to control spills ON SHORE Containment curbs berms and retaining walls Oil draining pans or tubs under tank vehicle receiving manifolds tank car bottom outlets pumps drain lines pump station valves flanges and joints Ensure containment systems at tank truck loading or unloading areas can hold at a minimum the capacity of a single tank truck compartment Culverts gutters and other drainage systems Sumps or spill diversion and retention ponds 3 8 Table 3 5 Material and equipment to control spills continued Guide wire across 10 000 and 50 000 gallon fabric tanks to help prevent overfilling Drain pipes at the b
307. pecial code is called the stock locator system Each item will have a record card that shows its stock number and stock location 6 3 FM 10 15 WORK AREA gt gt lt gt SECTION 1 i 1 1 1 E 8 1 1 1 l 1 STORAGE AREA A BUILDING 2156 CLOSE UP VIEW AREA A ROW B COLUMN E Figure 6 4 Planograph with levels and compartments or sections labeled dU Figure 6 5 Five character location code code This system will make it easier and faster for you to find an item When you need to issue an item find the locator card with the NSN for that item and go to the location listed on the card If you have more questions about the stock locator system or about how to set up a system for loose issue and bulk storage items check TM 743 200 1 Chapter 3 Figures 6 6 and 6 7 show you how to use the code to find an item in a warehouse and in a storage van MARKING LOCATIONS When you finish marking the planograph so that each row aisle column level and compart ment has been labeled you will need to mark the actual storage areas to match the planograph Figure 6 8 shows a storage area that has been AREA Row STACK LEVEL SECTION panem c g FM 10 15 properly marked with location markings Be sure you follow the guidelines in AR 3
308. phone communication trainer s guide technical manual transportation management office table of organization and equipment United States Army Training and Doctrine Command transportation type unit of issue Uniform Materiel Movement and Issue Priority System Urgency of Need Designator United States of America USAISEC USAISECE USAISEC FE USAISECP USAISSDCL USAMC USAR USAREUR VA veh vol w whse wt nited States Army Information ystems Engineering Command nited States Army Information ystems Engineering Command urope nited States Army Information ystems Engineering Command ar East nited States Army Information c muc uu ci tH Systems Engineering Command Pacific United States Army Information uan ystems Software Development enter Lee nited States Army Materiel ommand nited States Army Reserve nited States Army Europe Cic c c Virginia vehicle volume with warehouse weight DSM BCR COOP DMMC DOES DSN G2 LOGMARS T MCRL METT T C1 FM 10 15 With this change 23 new acronyms are added automated data systems manual bar code reader change continuity of operations plan division materiel management center Directorate of Evaluation and Standarization Defense Switch Network Assistant Chief of Statff G4 Logis tics Logistics Application of Marking and Reading master cross reference list mision enemy terrain tr
309. ping system for Class II III packaged IV V missile components only VII and Ne supplies Your unit receives items faster that are dipped under the DSS Under this the supplies and equipment are shipped irectly from depot or distribution point to the SSA without in between stops 55 supplies are shipped from supply level to supply level until they reach your unit The DSS currently includes the six classes of supply shown in Table 7 1 For more information on how the DSS works check FM 38 725 1 Most supplies your DSU receives will have receipt documents with PDs 09 through 15 These are normal requests Since they are not emergency requests your section has two working 7 6 days to process the supplies for issue For DSUs receiving supplies by DSS and DSS depending on where you are located you have the time shown in Table 7 2 to process receipts Mission essential items are ordered under PDs 01 through 03 They are shipped to arrive as quickly as possible Your section must process them and have them ready for issue within 24 hours after your DSU receives them Sometimes you will receive supplies that have no PD listed on the receipt document You may also receive supplies that have no receipt documents with them In these cases your section should process the item without the PD within two working days and the item without a receipt document within five working days Always check with the SCS to see i
310. ply failure Anytime your section prepares a release denial you must take a special inventory to find out why the supplies are not on hand Chapter 8 gives the steps you must take as storage super visor when a release denial is going to be issued 9 7 FM 10 15 00000000222222 2222222222222122201222522225521521212421222 FEFE N up STOCK _____ NUMBER f 1 SHIPPED FROM 21st MAINT BN 75th SUPPORT CO REC 81817 FORT KNOX 49126 FORT KNOX KY 4012 D6S Req d DSS 0000282 QUANTITY 081 01 s SUMITITUTEDATA UTEM ORIGINALLY REQUESTED T FCN Stock Fund ITEM NOMENCLATURE x Spark Plug SELECTED AND OATE INSPECTED BY AND DATE lllw 375 f PACKED BY AND DATE WAREHOUSE LOCATION MATERIEL RELEASE FIRST DESTINATION ADORESS 13 TRANSPORTATION CHARGEABLE TO EDITION OF 1 JAN MAY UBEO 000 016 LINE ITEM AELEASEMECEWT DOCUMENT EXHAUSTIO rine eer one ae 5222221222252 42122225212522252 2 00622000220 Y mam OIL umr SHIPPEO FROM W22PEG SY2434 8 c 0 WAREHOUSE LOCATION ant FREIGHT RATE uar QUANTITY b C49D3 F 4 t M RUBSTITUTE DATA AEQUESTEO FREIGHT CLASSIFICATION NOMENCLATURE H 1 T d RENE NOMENCLATURE REESE SPARK PLUG Y SELECTEO BY AND DATE TYPE Of CONT AIERIS TOTAL WEIGHT RECEIVED BY
311. points i The QSS catalog will be maintained and updated by QSS personnel It should be reviewed and updated quarterly following instructions in TM 38 L32 14 Signature FM 10 15 APPENDIX D CARE OF SUPPLIES IN STORAGE The COSIS program covers the inspection minor repair testing exercising preservation packaging and packing of supplies in storage The following are objectives of the COSIS program To ensure that the true condition of supplies in storage is known and recorded e To establish accurate resource requirements To maintain supplies in a state of readiness e To establish controls to ensure that no obsolete supplies are scheduled for COSIS pro cessing and that supplies are maintained with the least cost in manpower equipment and money To ensure that supplies and equipment are preserved and packed according to the degree of protection set forth in AR 700 15 Under the COSIS program supplies are stored to receive maximum protection from rodents insects and weather Sealed containers and pack ages remain sealed until they are used con tainer may be opened for inspection if there is reason to question its serviceability or if it is not clearly marked Containers which are opened are resealed and returned to storage The COSIS program establishes plans for the inspection of stored material The frequency of these inspections depends on the kind of material stored method of packaging local w
312. pplies close to streams Sudden rains can cause streams to flood Protect items stored near unpaved roads from the dust and road spray from passing vehicles STORAGE AIDS Storage aids help you use all available space They make moving supplies easier Storage aids also help prevent supplies from being damaged when stored on the ground There are many kinds of storage aids The most commonly used ones are described below and are shown in Figure 5 10 FM 10 15 FOUR WAY PALLET PALLET SUPPORT SET BOX PALLET Figure 5 10 Storage aids 5 15 FM 10 15 TWO COMPARTMENT SHELF BOX SAFETY PALLET STEEL SHELVING Figure 5 10 Storage aids continued Pallets A pallet is a portable platform upon which small quantities of material are placed so that they may be handled and stored You can handle pallet loads with forklift trucks transporters and cranes Soldiers manually place material on the pallet when it is received It remains on the pallet for mechanical handling throughout the complete cycle of storage and issue operations The types of pallets used are as follows 5 16 Two way pallet The two way pallet is not the standard DOD pallet but it is in fairly common use in storage areas It can be entered into on two opposite sides by forklift and pallet type hand lift trucks This pallet usually measures 40 by 48 by 6 inches Four way pallet The wing end four stringer four way entry type
313. quickly and efficiently you will need to spend time and effort planning day to day opera tion procedures and storage layouts STORAGE LAYOUT PLAN To aid you in planning the layout the SCS can furnish you with the types and number of items on its ASL and NSL Consider the following when you plan your layout PILFERABLE ITEMS sped Aircraft engine equipment and parts Hand tools and shop equipment Newer xn XA Firearms Ammunition and explosives CY tuni rena etate Controlled drugs requiring secure storage Bike Alcohol aicoholic beverages precious metals drugs other substances requiring vault storage Mua Ec Individual clothing and equipment a n mn mo Ra Office machines S Photographic equipment and supplies Yes Communications electronic equipment and parts tes Vehicular equipment and parts diese s ier eher Pilferable items due tothe size shape and utility which do not fall under one of the above categories Pilferage controls may be designated by the coding activity to items coded U Unclassified by recoding the item to J Figure 5 1 Extract from CDA Pamphlet 18 1 5 2 Maximum Use of Space Space is vertical as well as horizontal Stack material to use this space Oddly shaped heavy or hard to move items should be stored in low ceiling areas Leave the high ceiling area
314. r Covcramant in accordance with and to terms and conditions of sdove numbered contract Raftresew your the following on terms inctuding Cor U S purcrams Provisions of Purchags Order on DO Porm 1135 EXCEPT CLAUSE NO 13 APPLIES ONLY JF THIS BOX C IS CHECKED AND NO 15 IF THIS CHECKED prov won and dulivery indicated This gurchum i negotiated under Iurhority of 19 USC 2304 X 3 specified ln che schedule if within the U S its Ot Puerto Ries if odarwim undes 2304 X6 4 checked Additional General Supplier shell sign Acceptance DD Forme 11374 and ertum copus 17 ADCOUNTING AND Dafa LOTAR UM 2122 2 81 8100 590000 1003 SCHEDE OF Ao UE 5910 00 252 4104 Gadget 150 00 900 00 righe hand 5905 00 252 4210 Gadget 160 00 960 00 left hand t If qu n By iz UNITEG MATER OF wed mita 1860 09 43 quantity ard nai indiate by N jf Laney Date Meer t enter actual OPER ordered and LARRY PARK MAJ QM orreen ec Gant COLUMNA 20 DIEN a wv C accipio ang To
315. rade materiel requires special packing and handling However for retrograde items such as repair parts your personnel need to give the items enough packing protection to keep them from being damaged during shipment handling and storage Instructions on processing and shipping retrograde cargo are in AR 700 93 9 11 FM 10 15 2222227222212 SHIPPED FROM 21st MAINT BN 75th SUPPORT CO FT KNOX KY 40120 ee KNOX KY 40120 D6S Required DSS A PP WAREHOUR LOCATION zm wt warant ure c FREIGHT RAT 584 si 53 mm e 5 Sn 67768 12546 111 67 PLC2 4942 0821 SUBSTITUTE DATA ITEM ORIGINALLY REQUESTED FREIGHT CLASSIFICATION NOMENCLATURE ty Stock Fund cp ec NOMENCLATURE Spark Plug ITI BY AND DATE TYPE OF CONTAMERIS TOTAL WEIGHT RECEIVED BY AND DATE INSPECTED BY AND DATE mm EET PACKED BY AND DATE NO OF CONTAINERS TOTAL CUBE WAREHOUSED BY ANO DATE WAREHOUSE LOCATION TM fo NE MATERIEL RELEASE iy EDITION OF 1 JAN 64 USIO 000 SINGLE LINE ITEM RELEASE RECEIPT DOCUMENT UNTIL EXMAUBTEO an 12220 52022225 250222220250 DOCUMENT NUMBER apoa 1 t DAT SHIPPED FROM PROJECT 5 434 WAREHOUSE LOCATION FREIGHT RATE eme E di T 1 1 gt SPARK lis SPARK PLUG BY AND DATE OF CONTAINERIBI TOTAL WEIGHT RECEIVED BY DATE INSPECTED 8Y ANO DATE 7
316. rdinate inventories Monitor cash collection procedures REVIEW CIF PROPERTY RECORDS AND ADJUSTMENT DOCUMENTS A separate page is required for each LIN authorized You will review property book pages and adjustment documents Your tasks are listed below Ensure that all completed receipts and turn ins have been posted to the property records prior to your review 2 19 FM 10 15 Table 2 9 Recoverability codes and actions CODE TYPEITEM DISPOSITION ACTION FOR UNSERVICEABLE ITEMS High Dollar Value Item Critical or Hazardous Material Precious Metal Content item Refer to appropriate manuals or directives for instructions Special handling or condemnation procedures are required Reparable Item Return the item to depot when the item is beyond lower level repair capability Condemnation and disposal not authorized below depot level Reparable Item Condemn and dispose of at DS level when uneconomically reparable Reparable Item Condemn and dispose of at GS level when uneconomically reparable Reparable Item Repair condemnation and disposal not authorized below depot or specialized repair activity level Reparable Item Condemn and dispose of at organization level when uneconomically reparable Nonreparable Item Condemn and dispose of at the level authorized to replace the item when unserviceable Likely an End Item Dispose of according to the policies in AR 725 50 NOTE Recoverability codes will appear on PLL
317. rior to turn in or exchange will be rejected a With the exception of minor repairs by qualified personnel of the CIF repairs to all OCIE will be made by maintenance personnel b The CIF will maintain all OCIE records It is the responsibility of the CIF to ensure that a duplicate copy of DA Form 3645 Organizational Clothing and Individual Equipment Record and DA Form 3645 1 Additional Organization Clothing and Equipment Record is made available to the unit to which the individual is assigned c The commanders of using activities are responsible for ensuring that their personnel clear the CIF before they depart from their duty station FM 10 15 2 6 SECURITY The designated individual will ensure that all storage areas are secured and that all lights are turned off after personnel have left the area He will make sure the area is inspected to make sure there are no fire hazards and all appliances are disconnected 7 FILES files will be complete and up to date at all times according to ARs in the 340 series changes to ARs will be posted upon receipt No change will be placed in the files without the basic AR 8 GENERAL FUNCTIONS a Maintain loose issue and bulk storage areas b Issue OCIE to individuals units or activities c Perform inventories quarterly and annually d Perform biweekly inventory count for ordering purposes e Receive items turned in by individuals and units f Perform direct exchange of i
318. roleum SOPs are updated and enforced Ensure that Class III supply point soldiers are performing a daily inventory reconciliation to identify shortages and losses Schedule bulk petroleum inventories and monthly inventory reconciliations for the last day of the month Rotating inventory teams conduct these inventories Determine allowable losses for bulk petroleum Investigate losses above acceptable levels Have your personnel adjust property records to reflect losses Process an adjustment for losses exceeding the allowance when the total value of the loss is less than 500 Process a DA Form 4697 Depart ment of the Army Report of Survey for losses exceeding the stated allowance when the total value of the entire loss is more than 500 Compute fuel requirements to support line hauls and local hauls to supported and supporting units Consolidate and forward daily fuel forecasts and totals from daily status reports Inspect Class III storage areas daily for safety hazards accountability inventory receipt and issue procedures and maintenance Review contamination reports determine feasibility of reclaiming products and follow unit SOPs on disposition of contaminated fuel Provide strapping charts for all bulk storage facilities COORDINATE SERVICE FUNCTIONS Depending on your unit mission your personnel may have to ensure that necessary field services are provided to supported units
319. rsonnel know how to recognize improper or unsafe storage practices Do they know how to report them Are serviceable and unserviceable supplies stored in separate locations Are all broken and damaged items classified or repaired Are all supplies in the correct locations Do these locations match the locations on the locator file Do personnel know how to recognize and compare stock numbers nomenclature and other entries on labels packages and count cards Do inventory personnel know how to count and report the correct number of items in a package or on a pallet Do inventory personnel know how to record recount information on location survey and inventory cards Do the inventory supervisor the storage supervisor the accountable officer and the stock control supervisor know how to reconcile storage records with inventory counts and with accountable records Are personnel using LOGMARS T properly trained in its use and functions 10 3 C1 FM 10 15 PHYSICAL INVENTORIES Inventories play an important part in keeping your storage and financial records straight Without inven tories you would not discover posting errors Some ways inventories help you are listed below They find storage problems and errors See Table 10 2 They find the total quantity of supplies on hand They compare and adjust the recorded stock balances to match the on hand quantities They give the accountable officer the informa tion
320. s Most of these supplies are shipped with a DD Form 1348 1 However your soldiers may times be required to process DD Forms 250 and 1155 or other shipping documents that come with non DSS supplies Process these supplies in the same way as DSS shipments Generally ship ments which are not MI LSTRIP and DSS do not have a PD listed on the receipt document In this case your section has up to two workdays to process the supplies for issue If a PD is listed follow the guidelines given earlier in this chapter If the non DSS shipment has no receipt document contact the SCS for the advance copy of the document If it is not on file your soldiers should use the information on the shipping document and on the container to make a DA Form 2765 Figure 7 10 shows how to make a new receipt document from container information Be sure your personnel check the NSN quantity and condition of the item Discrepancies your per sonnel note while receiving supplies must be verified by the accountable officer or a designated representative When the discrepancy has been verified explain it on the receipt document The purpose of reporting discrepancies is to find the cause take corrective action and prevent a recur rence Report shipping type item packing and in parcel post shipment discrepancies on SF 364 Report of Discrepancy ROD according to AR 735 5 Report transportation type discrep ancies in shipments according to AR 55 38 Check t
321. s already computed the per cent of demand accommodation and demand satis faction for you See TM 38 L32 13 for details of each column on the report The supply per formance report does not report the number of NSL demands filled Compute it by subtracting the total ASL demands filled and the total demands passed to the main DSU from the total valid demands REVIEW RECEIPT NOT DUE IN LISTING Your soldiers report receipts to your MMC by keypunching or preparing materiel receipt cards or shipping documents for processing in the daily cycle run TMs 38 L32 12 and 38 L32 13 give details on how to process receipt documents FM 10 15 Table 1 5 Supply performance objectives and acceptable levels of customer unit supply support SUPPLY PERFORMANCE INDICATOR Demand Satisfaction or Net Availability Valid ASL demands completely filled 10096 Tota valid ASL demands Average Customer Wait Time for CONUS Alaska Hawaii South America Caribbean or North Atlantic Northern Europe Mediterranean or Africa Western Pacific Zero Balance with Due Outs ASL zero balance lines with due outs 10096 Total ASL lines SSSC Lines at Zero Balance Inventory Accuracy ACCEPTABLE LEVEL DSU 75 70 80 gt 10 82 77 87 lt 1 Div 82 77 87 11 days 19 days 21 days 25 days 15 days 24 days 31 days 35 days No more than 896 10 95 Total lines without substantial 25 difference 100 Total lines i
322. s for each storage sites You will not issue an item to a section They should explain how these sections customer by shipping it When an item is to be must work together to plan the shipment process pulled from storage for shipping your storage the documents and select and prepare the sup personnel will receive a release order from the plies for loading Some supplies such as ammuni SCS The SCS prepares the release orders on tion and classified items require special handling DD Form 1348 1 Figure 9 3 shows completed and control procedures Include these special pro DD Form 1348 1 as an MRO Figure 9 4 shows cedures in your storage section SOP Specific DD Form 1348 1 issued as a disposal release order instructions for preparing and shipping ammuni An is issued when the items are to be shipped tion and other hazardous or sensitive items are to another supply support activity or if the item is listed in DOD 4500 32 R Volume 1 DOD 5100 76 M being moved to another storage site A disposal and DOD 4145 19 R 1 Manuals in the TM 746 release order is issued when the item is to be series give packing instructions for major and transferred to the Defense Reutilization and selected end items Marketing Office that supports your DSU When E ete ell ele EEEE ee i a EEEH EEE eet Y si QUANTITY DIS UNIT PRICE m rnon FSC NIIN aoo 5 2 Dart Jafa mE zt gu s 4 als 5
323. s for items that can be stacked higher Time and Labor Savings The less distance an item is moved the more time your personnel can spend on another operation Accessibility of Supplies Store supplies in specific marked locations so that they can be easily located Consider the locations of doors and aisles and the use of your MHE when you are deciding whereto store items Maximum Protection of Supplies Store supplies where they can be protected from theft fire weather damage rodents and insects STORAGE FACTORS You must consider certain storage factors before you can begin drawing your layout These factors will help you plan where various groups of items should be located They are described below Similar Items To speed storage and issue operations group items according to their type For example all items in Class 7105 office supplies should be stored in one general area if possible Rate of Turnover Place fast moving items close to the issue point This cuts down on the amount of time you spend pulling the item and bringing it to the issue and breakdown point Item Size or Weight Place very heavy or large items close to the issue point This shortens the distance items must be moved It also reduces the need for MHE and helps to hold down labor costs Heavy or large items may not be issued often but you still should place FM 10 15 them close to the issue section and not within their class gro
324. s in the 38 L03 and 38 L32 series explain how to inspect and receive supplies under the automated system Follow the procedures in AR 735 5 to report damages Be sure your soldiers take the following steps when checking in supplies and equipment Tally the containers against the receipt document DSS AIR LINES OF COMMUNICATION Days 4 4 NA 3 COMMUNICATION Days Japan 4 Okinawa NA Korea 4 CONUS NA Compare the information on the receipt docu ment NSN nomenclature UI and quantity with the supplies received If data do not match circle the wrong entry and write the correct information from the container on the document See Figure 7 7 page 7 8 for a sample of a corrected receipt document Check the container for damage Open all dam aged containers immediately If your DSU receives a multipack container open it and check the contents Do not open smaller packages within the containers unless they are damaged If the container is open check the contents Make a list of all damages and shortages Contact the supervisor of the receipt and storage section After the shipment has been accepted and signed for send copies of documents that are attached to the containers through your supervisor to the SCS Be sure to attach a copy of the receipt document to the supplies 7 7 C1 FM 10 15 before you send them to the storage or issue section If the document number card columns 30
325. s manually on a postpost 72 hours or less basis Have your soldiers hold low priority requests until the end of the outage Update records when ADPE is operational again Long Term Seek out replacement substitute or float ADPE or arrange for time more than 72 hours sharing on another command s equipment Determine and direct only essential processing Direct soldiers to process high priority requests on a postpost basis Authorize the use of manually prepared requests Have soldiers use the latest listings and card files to set up manual stock records following procedures in DA Pamphlet 710 2 2 Direct soldiers to maintain additional records in a suspense or hold file to aid in returning to the automated system NOTE Reverting to manual procedures is the least desired backup support Figure 1 1 Actions during outages 1 4 MAJOR COMMANDS 687 1051 Commercial 804 734 1051 USAREUR 2 6613 PACIFIC 438 9377 738 3757 FM 10 15 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE AUTOVON NUMBER MESSAGE ADORESS CDR USAISSDCL FT LEE VA ASQBI LTSI CDR USAISECE ZWEIBRUEKEN GERMANY ASBE FSD CDR USAISECP FT SHAFTER HI ASBP OB CDR USAISEC FE SEOUL KOREA ASBPF SD Figure 1 2 Customer assistance information for DS4 users ENSURE SECURITY OF ADP FACILITIES AND SOFTWARE Data processing facilities are vulnerable to destruction sabotage and compromise Therefore you must plan for the secure operat
326. s serviceable 1 there a spare C Do all brakes work properly Are all brake lights and running lights present and operable The above checklist is by no means complete You should have a section of your SOP dedicated to inspecting cargo containers Check with your local TMO for further guidance 9 17 FM 10 15 Trailers are also designed for uniform load dis tribution as shown by the above sketches The fundamental difference between loading trailers and trucks is in the case of trucks the average design provides for about 90 of the payload on the rear With a part load or with a very heavy load having little bulk itis common practice to put it at the front end of the trailer to get traction on truck tractor rear tires This overloads the truck tires and shortens their mileage life It can also cause bending of the truck 43 tires and 10 on the front tires In the case of trailers the payload should be distributed equally between the rear tires and the fifth wheel which transfers its load to the truck tractor rear axle housing Application of trailer brakes may lock wheels cause tire flat spots skidding or both This load should be distributed over the full length of the trailer floor or platform This example is obviously wrong In the case of the first trailer the heavy load at the rear is overloading the rear trailer tires There is practically no load on the fifth wheel and the truck tractor rear tir
327. s so that supplies do not pile up in bin and pickup areas Monitor dates entered on customer unit notifi cation logs provides a sample notification log Monitor postpost issues to fill high priority requests A high postpost issue rate could cause a high warehouse denial rate Ensure that bulk sensitive or pilferable items are issued from secure storage areas not from the usual customer pickup point Inform your supply operations office of item types quantity weight and cube data needed to determine transportation required Try to plan shipments in truckload lots This will save time packing material and trans portation assets PERFORM NIGHT DELIVERY OPERATIONS Often the tactical situation is such that supplies must be delivered at night Since the use of MHE is reduced by darkness have supplies prepared and loaded on trucks during the day Your external SOP should require supported units to send extra soldiers to serve as walking guides and help load supplies by hand onto the tucks Figure 23 shows light signals used at night To follow blackout procedures you should Use flashlights that have lens filters Black out doors and windows on storage buildings Block light from large tents with salvage tentage 2 12 Use ponchos as blackout flaps on other tents Use blackout lights on vehicles and forklift trucks SET UP A CLASS I DISTRIBUTION OR SUPPLY POINT Set up the Class I p
328. s to determine if they have an advance copy of the receipt document Analyze types of supplies to be unloaded Evaluate available storage space Verify personnel and special handling equipment requirements Ensure that the carrier is correctly positioned Verify that the seals on trucks or boxcars are unbroken and that serial numbers agree with those listed on bills of lading advance shipment documents or notices of shipment Report discrepancies Determine if the shipment will be accepted Contact the SCS for data required to complete receipt from commercial carriers NOTE Ensure that all soldiers are made aware of holdover costs demurrage that can result from keep ing trucks or railcars not owned by the government past time limits set for unloading Place emphasis on making as few moves as possible Each additional move increases time and costs and the danger of damage Ensure that the supply operations office has been notified that the carrier is ready for release 2 4 REVIEW REPORTS OF DISCREPANCIES You must report shipping type item or packaging discrepancies on SF 364 Report of Discrepancy ROD Include on the form the reporting adjusting and accounting for supply item discrepancies preser vation packaging packing and supply item identifi cation marking lost or damaged parcel post shipments and overages and shortages on single consignee SEAVANS or containers th
329. s with less than three recurring demands will be considered for deletion Automated supply systems automatically adjust demand supported stockage leveis based on the quantity demanded The ASL review board will determine ASL additions and deletions Mission essential or mandatory stockage items ORF items specifically authorized Initial provisioning items required for mission loads Aviation and missile repair parts receiving three demands to stock and one to retain Request that the supply manager fix the RO at a specific level Check the ASL lines against the DO lists to determine if manual replenishment or passing action is war ranted when lines are frozen due to inventory actions Seasonal demand items REDUCE EXCESS STOCKS Excess stocks are those which exceed the authorized retention level DA policy requires that automated systems run the process monthly to determine excess During wartime this process is run at the option of the local command DS level automated systems produce an excess report list and a deck of candidate cancellation cards Sample 054 formats are in TM 38 132 13 Note that excess quantities are not automatically canceled SSAs must determine which recommen dations to accept and which to reject In wartime when demands are unpredictable and stocks are expected to be used it may not be wise to dispose of all excess stocks Depending on the extended price the owning 55 may retain excess sto
330. se MHE for stacked materials Table 5 3 gives some guidelines for required space above stacks and below lights and sprinkler systems Once you have made a general sketch of the way you want the supplies stored have your soldiers move in the storage aids You may have to make some minor adjustments once you see the way the bins and shelves fit into the actual building Be sure to enter these changes in your layout sketch Because you will store FM 10 15 Table 5 1 Checklist for preparing storage layout FOR TOTAL LAYOUT AREA D Determine length of building D Determine width of building D Determine total square feet available for storage facility Subtract structural losses for example latrines posts pillars stairwells from total square feet Determine distance from floor to ceiling or to overhead obstructions D Find maximum allowable floor load limitations D Determine maximum stacking heights allowed for supplies Determine required fire clearances and the condition of fire walls in the building Use DOD 4145 19 R 1 to find clearances needed around fire doors and fire aisles Determine required clearances for fire fighting equipment and fire alarms NOTE If the building does not have a sprinkler system subtract 18 inches from the maximum stacking height If it has a sprinkler system subtract 36 inches D Determine types of supplies to be stored Use DOD 4145 19 1 tofindtherequired clear
331. section They compile these MROS and send them to your storage section once or twice daily An MRO lists the item and the quantity requested the storage location and the priority of the request Check and sort the MROs before you give them to your storage specialists to process This sorting makes it easier for them to issue the correct item within the proper time limits The procedures they use to process MROs for issues under DS4 are in TM 38 L32 12 Chapter 3 Chapter 6 of the TM covers procedures for shipment SORTING MATERIEL RELEASE ORDERS BY PRIORITY Sort the into groups by their PDs The PD is in columns 60 and 6 1 The priority of a request tells how urgently the item is needed for the unit mission The lower the PD the more urgently the item is needed For a complete description of the priority issue system 8 5 C1 FM 10 15 see AR 725 50 Chapter 2 Group the MROs into three stacks Put PDs 01 02 and 03 priority requests into stack 1 Put PDs 04 through 08 into stack 2 Put PDs 09 through 15 into stack 3 Put MROs with a PD of 01 on top of stack 1 Put MROs with PDs 02 and 03 on the stack next Put MROs with a PD of 04 on top of stack 2 and put MROs with PDs 05 through 15 next If two MRO documents have the same priority check the required delivery date Place the MRO with the earlier delivery date on top IF ANY OF THE PRIORITY MROs PDs 01 02 or 03 HAVE 999 IN THE RE QUIRED DELIVERY BLOCKS PLACE
332. signed for one shipment and are then discarded They are usually constructed of wood fiberboard or a combination of the two In order to be effective as one trip pallets they must be light in weight and low in cost Figure 9 10 shows expendable pallets Permanent Pallets Permanent pallets are termed general purpose or special purpose General purpose General purpose pallets the most commonly used pallets are constructed of hardwood and are normally 40 inches by 48 inches They fit economically into railroad cars motor vehicles and trailers Two general purpose pallets are the four way entry post pallet and FIBERBOARD PALLETS Figure 9 10 Expendable pallets 9 14 the four way partial four stringer pallet See Figure 9 11 Special purpose Special purpose pallets made of metal are suitable for heavy duty use They are more rugged and will withstand more abuse than wood pallets There are no fasteners to work loose DECKBOARDS FM 10 15 and cause damage to flexible containers and their contents The initial cost of metal pallets is high in comparison to pallets made of wood Pallets made of aluminum that are light in weight are also available The special purpose pallets are designed on a case by case basis to conform to an item requiring special handling gt gt LENGTH 40 DECKBOARDS FOUR WAY POST DECKBOARDS STRAPPING SLOT LENGTH 40
333. signed for small repair parts Standard size is 42 5 x 30 drawer depth may not exceed 28 inches Quartermesh Four 20 5 x 29 x 15 drawers Mesh Standard size is 48 x 33 x 38 Figure 12 5 Types of FLEX pallets 12 6 FM 10 15 Table 12 2 Flex pallet unit cube range CLASS IX QUARTERMESH MESH e You can store up to 34 87 cubic feet of supplies in the standard mesh FLEX pallet To determine how many of these storage aids can be placed in one row of the vehicle M871 semitrailer divide the length of the storage aid into the length of the vehicle and round down 29 83 feet 4 feet 7 46 7 aids rounded down At least one row of seven FLEX pallets can be placed on this vehicle Depending on the width of the storage aid used you may add more rows Take the width of the storage aid multiply it by two the number of rows desired and subtract this amount from the vehicle width to determine if the remaining aisle width will permit two rows of pallets For the M871 semitrailer two rows of pallets will yield 2 5 feet of aisle space e For this example the load height has been increased from 4 to 8 feet Two FLEX pallets stored one on top of the other will give a total pallet height of 6 34 feet Thus stacking of the storage aids will be no problem e stacking the FLEX pallets on this vehicle you have two rows of 14 pallets for a total TYPE UNIT CUBIC FEET AVERAGE LINES 0 001
334. sitive material and have signs posted displaying security status Ensure that an armed guard is posted if circum stances warrant it Require that classified and sensitive items be inventoried more frequently than required if necessary Ensure that personnel pack items in restricted storage areas FM 10 15 Table 2 3 Storage problem troubleshooting chart STORAGE PROBLEM RESULT CORRECTIVE ACTION Mixed Stock Two or more items separate NSN stored in one loca tion Often a different NSN item is behind another on a shelf or rack NOTE Sometimes the location listed on a receipt document for a Substitute item is for the original item requested Substitute items must be stored separately under the substitute item NSN not with the item originally requested Stored item incorrectly identified Items stored in location do not agree with bin tag location placard or locator card Multiple open boxes of supplies Improper nonuniform stacking Old markings on containers or pack ages the NSN or UI has changed Incorrect inventory counts Delay in performing location sur veys and inventories Delay in supply fill MRD on original item or substitute item Mixed stock Duplicate MROs Stock record imbalance Increase in inventory investigation time Delay in supply fill Increase in MRDs Incorrect item or quantity shipped to requesting unit Waste of MHE assets and trans portation assets Incorrect inve
335. special inventory Use the following formula to compute the percent of lines inventoried for which the difference on the count card is leas than 50 Percent of lines with difference Inventory less than 50 X 100 Accuracy Total locations inventoried DA Objective 95 Acceptable Level 85 NOTE Lines with a discrepancy of 50 or more remain frozen until the MMC generates an IAR list following the third inventory count SUPERVISE ISSUE AND SHIPMENT OF SUPPLIES Issue_and shipping procedures are covered in Automated system procedures are covered in 38 L32 12 Table 2 6 lists time requirements for processing MROs UMMIPS standards are listed in AR 725 50 Your tasks are listed below Review listings of DIs and DOs Check with your supply operations soldiers to determine if they have an advance copy or notice of shipments Research lost or missing MROs 2 11 FM 10 15 Tabie 2 6 MRO processing times PRIORITY DESIGNATORS TIME LIMITATION 01 through 03 and NMCS Within 24 hours after the storage section receives the MRO 7 day workweek 24 hour workday basis 04 through 15 other than NMCS Within two regular workdays after the storage section receives the MRO Non DSS items without a receipt document should be processed within five days Make it SOP that storage section personnel sort MROs by PD Set time frames for customer pickup
336. st be PRISONER WAR MALL NOTIFICATION OF ADDRESS e VLA TORRE PRISONER OP WAR MAIL LETTER LRA PRISONER OF WAR MAIL POST CARD ILRA CERTIFICATE OF DEATH PRISONER OF LKA WEIGHT CONTROL LRA TAGCEN LAUNDRY LIST FOR PIECE RATE PATRONS UNION DUES CONTROL RECISTER REQUEST POR ISSUE OR TURNIN REQUEST FOR ISSUE OR TURN IN CRYTOFACILITY INSPECTION REPORT LRA STATEMENT OF PRE AWARD INSPECTION LRA Ben Section 1 foc footnotes APPLICATION TO USE DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FILES 841 TAGCEN ACTION ON APPLICATION TO USE DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FILES 321 REQUEST FOR ALLOTMENT OF COMPENSATION POR INCOME TAX PURPOSES CURRENT AND PROJECTED COLONEL REQUIMEMENTS SECTION LRA CURRENT AND PROJECTED COLONEL REQUIREMENTS RECTION A LRA JOB PLANNING WORKSHPET MONTHLY SUMMARY IOURNA DISPOSAL ACTIVITIES LRA STATEMENT OF IDENTIFICATION LRA REQUEST FOR COUNTERINTEL LIGENCE INVESTIGATION LRA FM 10 15 rocessed first each day Next check the folder Fiat has the previous day s receipt documents If you must skip a document for some reason place it in the delayed action file This way if you have a heavy work load on Tuesday you can place a document in the delayed action file and it will be the first one processed on Wednesday DOCUMENT CONTROL REGISTER As storage supervisor you should set up a document control register to help keep trac
337. storage locations Assign initial stock locations if applicable Local SOP will state whether the MMC or your office assigns locations Ensure that transportation officers have received specific instructions for spotting carriers at the proper location Coordinate use of MHE used to prepare sites and to load off load and position supplies and equipment Inspect supplies when they are delivered Notify the MMC of the receipt of supplies and when they are ready to be issued Develop an external SOP detailing what is required of the requesting unit for example blocking and bracing items and unit soldiers to help load trucks Assign areas to undergo a location survey Inspect warehouses and other storage areas Send 5 to the appropriate platoon for issue of the supplies Refer to Chapter 8 for recommendations on sorting MROs Review all postpost issues or have your stock control sergeant do so 1 12 COORDINATE TRANSPORTATION REQUIREMENTS Your office informs the MMC when supplies are ready for shipment The MMC then coordinate transportation requirements with the MCC Your tasks are listed below Consolidate transportation requirements Provide the MCC data on the type cubage and destination of supplies Coordinate with the transportation officer regarding vehicle requirements FM 101 10 1 1 recommends using two thirds of the vehicle payload capacity as a guide Lo
338. sue your personnel must prepare a manual MRD for the amount that is not on hand Then they issue the supplies on hand using the MRO that was received from the SCS Storage personnel then make an MRD for the quantity denied To do this they do the following Line out the A5 on the original MRO e Write in the DIC in block 1 AR 725 50 lists and explains codes e Write the quantity denied entered in block 8 on the original MRO Quantity in storage does not match quantity listed on stock account records tion Incorrect inventory count Relocation of stock taking place Delay in placing materiel in loca Erroneous location recorded Erroneous quantity stock num ber owner or condition code recorded on receipt actions C1 FM 10 15 Prepare a manual MRO on DA Form 2765 dupli cating the original MRO but showing the quantity issued and write partial release in block O Storage personnel then place the manual MRO and the supplies in the customer s pickup bin They send the MRD to the SCS and MMC PROCESSING MATERIEL RELEASE DENIALS FOR COMPLETE DENIALS When none of the requested supplies are on hand your personnel must change the MRO to an MRD It is important that your storage personnel understand that they must check all possible sources for the miss ing supplies before they pass the MRD onto the next level When personnel pass on the MRD they verify that all areas
339. system the location survey will be output in computer printout format PCN AJH 104 will be in location sequence PCN AJH 113 will be in stock number sequence TM 38 L19 2 gives a detailed explanation of these listings NOTE No cards will accompany these listings NOTE This change deletes Table 10 5 CORRECTING LOCATION SURVEY PROBLEMS AND STORAGE ERRORS During the physical location survey the survey teams will usually find storage problems such as mixed and unidentified stock and other minor errors If these problems are found in a location survey where manu ally completed cards are used the survey teams should contact the survey supervisor He should keep track of the problems and their locations and work with the storage supervisor to make sure they are corrected COMPARING SURVEY RESULTS WITH STOCK RECORDS MANUAL PROCEDURES After the survey teams have finished the survey you and the stock control supervisor need to compare the survey results with the stock records Do this AFTER making all corrections and posting them to the new locator file You and the stock control supervisor must match stock number location UI and condition code of all changed and corrected locator cards with the stock records Table 10 6 page 10 10 shows you what actions you must take when the stock records and the location survey cards do not agree Before you take the cards to the SCS your stock locator clerks will need to check each correc
340. t mandatory parts number Military Qualifications Standards Materiel Release Denial meal ready to eat materiel release order MSR MTOE NIIN NMCS nomen Nov NSL NSN NY OCIE Oct off OH ORF OST OZ PA Pam PBO PCN PD PLL PMCS POL prev PROJ PSC PW OM 055 qty RC rcmd REC rec d renov main supply route modification table of organiza tion and equipment not applicable nuclear biological chemical North Carolina noncommissioned officer noncommissioned officer in charge national item identification number New Jersey New Mexico not mission capable supply number nomenclature November nonstockage list national stock number New York organizational clothing and individual equipment October officer Ohio on hand operational readiness float order ship time ounce Pennsylvania pamphlet property book officer product control number priority designator prescribed load list preventive maintenance checks and services petroleum oils and lubricants previous project price signal code prisoner of war quartermaster quartermaster center quick supply store quantity recoverability code recommended recoverability code received renovation reqd reqn RICC RO ROD ROP ROTC rqr RX RXA S3 S4 SAF LEV SAILS 5 amp 5 SARSS SB SCMC SCS SEAVAN SEC Sep SF SFC SIMS X SL SLC SM SOP SPT SQT SRO SSA SSSC STG LCN
341. t check to see if there are any shelf life items A shelf life item has 8 2 an expiration date listed on the package They must store these items in the order they are to be issued Compare the expiration dates of the items you are storing and the items already in the location Store the oldest items in front Issue these items first Some times the receipt document will list more than one storage location code When the items are shelf life items the code listed first is for supplies with the least amount of shelf life left Check the expiration dates of the supplies you are storing to make sure you put them with the correct shelf life group Sometimes data on the receipt document do not match the bin or stock tag at the listed location At other times the data may match but the new supplies will not match the items already stored In either case check the locator deck or the recorded location on SARSS 1 I to make sure the location code was listed correctly If there is a mistake line out the incorrect code and write in the correct one Put the items in the correct location If the same location is listed for two different stock numbers you must move one of the items involved Each storage location should have items of only one NSN Figure 8 2 shows a shortcoming as extracted from DOD 4145 19 R 1 Chapter 6 of this FM explains how to make location changes Which supplies you will move and where you move them will depend on
342. t fill all requests and issue supplies for high priority items PDs 01 02 and 03 and NMCS items If you receive a priority request for issue when the inventory teams are counting the inven tory supervisor should hand carry the MRO to the storage location If the requested item has already been counted the inventory supervisor pulls the item from storage and subtracts the amount being issued from the total quantity listed on the count card He must be sure to write the MRO document number on the count card when he writes the number of items he is subtracting He can then move the item to the issue shipping section If an item being issued has not been counted the inven tory supervisor should write the amount that he is pulling from storage on the count card He also should write a short note on the count card explaining what he did Then he issues the items in the normal way and processes the MRO docu ment following the instructions in this chapter You may issue nonstockage list items processed through the receiving section to customer units since they do not affect the ABF If your DSU works under an automated system such as SAILS 054 you may have to use a reverse procedure when you issue supplies during an inventory This will freeze the inventory record until the count card is accepted You make issues under this kind of system on a postpost basis Do not record a postpost transaction until after the inventory Check TMs 38 L0
343. t of Deploying Units eese 1 8 Compute and Monitor Supply Performance Indicators eese 1 8 Review Receipt Not Due In Listing Review Supply Status eee Follow Up on Outstanding Requisitions Reconcile Due Outs With Supported Units 1 11 Direct Personnel to Process Manual Off Line Replenishment Requisitions eee eene eee tete 1 11 DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is unlimited This publication supercedes FM 10 15 31 Jan 74 FM 38 741 13 Jun 84 and FM 10 14 4 7 May 87 C1 FM 10 15 CHAPTER 2 Page Monitor Turn In of Recoverable and Automatic Return 1 11 Coordinate Receipt Storage and Issue 1 11 Coordinate Transportation Requirements 7 1 12 Coordinate Class I Operations scscscsssssssssssssssssssesssecesccesssesesesececscsssserssscecscecases 1 12 Coordinate Class II IV and VII Operations eere 1 13 Monitor Bulk Fuel Operations eese entente 1 13 Coordinate Service Functions s cscccsssosssssssssscssssssssssesssssssrssesserseesessusscssesesesecece 1 13 SUPPLY
344. t of medium and large scale maps may reach 100 percent of initial requirements NOTE Map stock and issue control will follow the provisions of AR 710 2 for entry of map requisitions in the Military Standard Requisitioning and Issue Proce dure FM 10 27 Chapter 3 discusses the initial issue theater reserve stocks requirements requisition proce dures and the requisition and distribution flow of maps MAINTAIN SECURITY OF CLASSIFIED MAPS Classified maps are requisitioned on an exception basis in accordance with the provisions of DA Pamphlet 710 2 1 and OPSEC SOPs Unit S2s G2s or command ers will validate requests for classified maps Classified maps are distributed to the requester IAW the provisions of AR 380 5 and applicable OPSEC SOPs rather than through the supply system Theft of classified maps could jeopardize the mission and cause loss of life Classified maps must be stored in secured areas They also require special handling Your tasks are listed below Require a 100 percent verification of shipment quantity Store classified maps in enclosed security areas Maintain classified maps separate from sensitive but unclassified material NOTE According to AR 115 11 some map requisitions must be classified They must be classified when map indexes indicate that a map is classified when size or nature of the requisition indicates a classified operation or when geo graphic coverage reveals the location of
345. take less space than the receiving or packing area Plan for the best place ment of areas so that work flow and personnel movement are simplified and in a straight line Try to put stacks of large items next to an aisle so that you can issue them without having to move other supplies to get to them with Remember if you think you will need to make any changes try to make them before you set up the storage aids The following guidelines will help you plan a better storage layout Make as few aisles as possible and try to keep them as straight as possible Make the aisles as narrow as possible but allow enough space to use MHE Table 5 2 gives the recommended aisle width for MHE Make sure that areas where will be used are near the front or rear of the storage warehouse so that it is easier to use the MHE Locate offices and locker and break rooms against sidewalls so that your soldiers will not have to walk through work or traffic areas Try to combine all scattered storage areas into one area Put offices and support areas in low ceiling sections Save high ceiling areas for storage After you have filled in where you think storage areas and operation areas should go you need to decide where you will store specific supplies Try to make the best use of vertical space when you plan supply storage Remember that you must also consider the windows light fixtures and sprinkler systems when you plan to u
346. ted locator card against the AMDF to ensure the NSNs and other codes agree They should C1 FM 10 15 make necessary changes to the locator cards at this time When matching the locator cards against the stock record change the stock record if the data do not match The stock control supervisor will leave the quantity blank on the new stock record card until a physical inventory is taken After reconciling the stock record and the locator file you must ensure posting of all changes to the location deck the bin labels and placards materials in storage and any other records your locator section may use Locator team chief scans the storage area and notes those locations not included Sections 1 and 2 of level 1 3 have material in the bin but have no survey cards Section 2 od level 2 has no material in the bin so it doesn t need a card this example the locator team chief will issue two blank serial numbered survey cards and instruct the locator team to record sections 1 and 2 of level 3 and to place the survey card in view SECTIONS 4 3 Figure 10 2 Positioning of completed location survey work cards 10 9 C1 FM 10 15 Table 10 6 Locator card and stock record card reconciliation table STOCK LOCATION NUMBER NUMBER lt a x lt x O H lt o STOCK RECORD CARD UNIT OF ACTION ISSUE REQUIRED None Change stock record card location
347. tems 2 Inspect classify and segregate items received from individuals and units h Process items for laundry i Transport all reparable items to and from the maintenance section j Turn in all unserviceable items to the defense reutilization and marketing office 9 RECEIPT a The storage section will notify the CIF when shipments are ready for pickup A truck driver will be sent to the warehouse b Personnel receiving items from the warehouse will ensure 1 The item is identified as listed on DD Form 1348 1 DOD Single Line Item Release Receipt Document 2 The quantity is correct c When items arrive CIF personnel will make sure that each shipment is matched to a DD Form 1348 1 Items will be placed in stock and the receipt document sent to the PBO 10 STORAGE a All items stored in CIF bin and bulk areas will be stored neatly by size and type b Loose serviceable items returned from repair will be used to fill bin shortages c Issue bins will be filled at all times to permit issues without delay 11 ISSUES a Personnel obtain across the counter service for items listed on DA Forms 3645 or 3645 1 After items have been issued the issue clerk will make entries and obtain a signature and date on DA Forms 3645 or 3645 1 b Issues will be made only to personnel who present a properly prepared DA Form 3645 or DA Form 3645 1 12 CIF PROPERTY ACCOUNTING FUNCTIONS The PBO will compute replenishment requirements establish stoc
348. ter required to care for equipment will depend on the number and types of items authorized Water may be 2 15 FM 10 15 Table 2 8 Water consumption planning factors gallons per soldier per day for sustaining and minimum operations TEMPERATURE ARTIC 5 less than 32 329 TO 809 Battalion BSA DSA BSA DSA Corps EAC TROPICAL ARID More than 800 More than 80 3 9 2 9 4 4 3 4 57 4 7 5 9 5 0 9 Sustaining level factors are designed to provide enough water to support continuous operations for extended periods PMinimum level factors are designed to provide enough water to support essential operations for less than seven days required also for medical treatment chemical decontamination engineer construction and GRREG REVIEW WATER SUPPLY SUMMARY REPORTS Future water requirements can often be pro jected from data reported on daily water point production and distribution summaries You can reproduce these forms locally from the blank forms in FM 10 52 1 Your tasks are listed below e Review DA Forms 1713 R and 1713 1 R Daily Water Production Logs and DA Form 1716 R Water Point Daily Production Summary to determine if production assets need to be shifted to another water point NOTE Since these forms report results of water quality control tests they may also indicate a change in the characteristics of the water source Review DA Form 1714 R Daily Water Issu
349. the change If you use this card ou do not have to move alb itens to one location ou can issue from two locations until the quantity is low and the items can be combined in one location DA Label 141 DA Label 141 Open Box is placed on open boxes in the loose issue or bulk sections It points out which box is open so that you issue from it You must have no more than one open box per item lid must be kept closed to den the materials clean FM 10 15 LOCATION PLACARD STOCK NUMBER 2928 294 3 92 CONDITION UNITOF ISSUE PSC SLI EXP DATE TYPE STORAGE A EA U LOCATION CUSTODY CODE GAHCA STOCK NUMBER UA DATE 3779 2426 09 264 3971 1 SEP 71 LOOSE ISSUE LABEL otete ivo sd New Cumberland Army Depot 703 MAINT BN New Cumberland PA 17870 APO NY 12345 71 BATA A QUEST FREIGHT CLASSIFICATION NOMENCLATURE X v ITEM NOMENCLATURE x Spark Plug 1 E SELECTED ANO DATE TOTAL WEIGNT RECEIVED BY AND DATE INSPECTED BY AND DATE 1 7 PACKED BY OATE TOTAL CUBE WAREMOUSED AND DATE WAREHOUSE LOCATION 4 6 10 1 FIRST DESTINATION ADORESS on dg 9 OF 1 iA 64 UMAD DOD 96 0 1000 ITEM 9416456 MOLE PT DOCUMENT 0 1 1 1 1 Figure 6 15 DA Forms 3778 3779 filled out using d
350. the inventory You also will need room to list problems or areas not covered on the checklist Your commander or accountable officer may want to use the checklist when he conducts briefings or prepares reports for staff visits or inspections Table 10 9 Sample inventory performance checklist Are inventories conducted at least annually 2 Isthere an cereo y VAI TVA CS ERA a 3 Arereports of survey filed with the IARs to support items disapproved 4 Does the report of survey have the same voucher number as the lARs 5 ArelARs supported by count cards a 6 Are the following procedures explained in the inventory SOPs a Cutoff controls for receipts b Cutoff controls for issue shipments c Preparation of inventory count cards d Preparation and use of inventory 115811 058 a e Conducting the inventory f Issuing during the inventory g Inventory adjustment preparation h After inventory procedures Vestes Eo cio ace n od tas 0000000000000 10 29 FM 10 15 10 30 Table 10 9 Sample inventory performance checklist continued Is the percentage of materiel release refusals less than two Total Materiel Release Refusals Total Materiel
351. the size quantity and popularity of the items After you move the supplies to anew location be sure you make new bin or stock tags as needed Ensure your storage personnel write all the changes on the receipt document After your personnel place the items in the correct storage location they must sign and date the receipt document Check to make sure the storage specialist signs and writes the date of storage in the Warehoused Stored By block of DD Form 1348 1 DA Form 2765 DA Form 2765 1 DD Form 250 and DD Form 1155 have no block for this information Your storage SOP must explain where to sign and date these forms when they accom pany supplies to be stored After you have checked the completed document forward it to the SCS Do not send PCN AJH 112 to the SCS It is filed according to your local SOP C1 FM 10 15 SHORTCOMING CAUSES RESULTS Placing different stock numbered items behind other stock numbered items in shelf and rack locations Lack of sufficient storage space for additional items being received Lack of proper training of ware housing personnel Inattention to warehousing tasks Possible lost assets Delay in requisition fill May result in erroneous inventory counts coupled with poor enforcement of proper warehousing proce dures Figure 8 2 Extract from DOD 4145 19 R 1 STORAGE HINT Store serviceable and unserviceable items in different locations Separating the items wi
352. thod When they use this method they select the items that have been in the storage locations the longest To make reaching the oldest items easier be sure your warehouse personnel store new items to the back of the storage locations Selective Method Your personnel should use this method for items that have expiration dates or shelf life codes Under this method they choose items by their dates of pack or expiration dates These dates generally are listed on the supply containers Your personnel should issue the items with the closest expiration dates or oldest dates of pack first If your personnel receive an MRO with an advice code of 2G they must not use the selective method The 2G advice code means that the unit wants the item with the newest date of pack Even when an advice code of 2G is not listed on the MRO your personnel should try to make sure that they issue supplies with enough shelf life left to fit the unit s mission and needs If they issue film batteries or petroleum products they should make sure the items are not near their expiration dates Section III Processing Supplies for Issue PROCESSING MATERIEL RELEASE ORDERS When a unit requests an item that is in storage the storage section receives an MRO from the SCS An 8 6 MRO lists the item requested its NSN quantity the priority of the request the item condition the storage location and the name of the unit requesting the item Your personn
353. through 43 is for a unit the receipt is dedicated for immediate issue to that customer Deliver the D6S card to the SCS and MMC and send the DD Form 1348 1 with the items for the unit If the document number card columns 30 through 43 is for the DSU the receipt is for stockage Enter the location in columns 46 through 50 of the D65 card If no location is shown or if there has been a location change place C in card column 79 DSUs using SARSS will input the receipt document using the keyboard or LOGMARS T If the information is for stockage then a location issue ticket PCN AJH 112 is produced and indicates the recorded storage location of the item received If a DOCKS location is indicated then a location must be assigned using location main tenance process If the receipt is for a unit the receipt is dedicated for immediate issue NOTE The receipt PPEFHHARPEEEEEEEERR PERRERRRRHERERRRERRBERRRRERRBRMBMEBRRERRRREREEPPPRRRREBRPRBIS GUAMTITY EEUU t LI LIN 132d MAINT BN APO NY 34563 RET BATE ETAGE FREIGHT CLASSIFICATION NOMENCLATURE T v ier SELECTED BY DATE em an PACKED ANO DATE E 56770 49 ev7 1 7 CUSE 42 0 3 AA NON vanm te OF 06 x SPARK PLUG LY TOTAL WEIGHT RECEIVED BY AND DATE 1155 90 2 WAREH
354. tion 1 information on the work sheet to update your space control and space assignment data and to compile reports for higher It is important that the information on the work sheet is an accurate measurement of the amount of space you have available and how much you are using Therefore before you can complete the work sheet you will need to conduct a storage space survey Every time the storage layout changes you will need to change the storage space survey work sheet When this happens you should reproduce the storage space survey work sheets locally and change them as needed The number of times per year that you compile this report is determined by your instal lation or depot HQ However you must complete at least one report each quarter Additional infor mation on storage space survey work sheets can be found in DOD 4145 19 R 1 40 000 square feet LOADING PLATFORM Building or Area 2 7 35 Section Date Vaw 200 ft Total Net SQUARE Storage Space 36 540 2247 _ Occupied Net Storage Space 44 765 rd Vacant Net Storage Space 775 reer Percent Occupied 95 Potent al Vacant Space Signature T 10 ft square Figure 5 12 Storage space survey work sheet 5 20 STORAGE SPACE STATUS REPORT You may be required to prepare storage space status reports quarterly monthly or as often as your
355. tion of the change The while in storage Many problems can occur as a result stock records section personnel need to correct their of incorrect identification Figure 8 3 shows a accounting records SHORTCOMING CAUSES RESULTS Incorrect item or quantity Inadequate lighting Imbalance of stock records Duplicate MROs Increase in inventory investiga tion Incorrect item or location identi fication Possible increase in warehouse denials incorrect data on forms labels or placards Incorrect item or quantity possi shipped to the requisitioner Failure to consider unit of issue or unit of measure quantity Possible delay in supply fill Mixed stock and failure to recog nize such Possible waste of assets and pro cessing resources Inadequate training of stock se lection personnel Possible unnecessary transpor tation costs Figure 8 3 Extract from DOD 4145 19 R 1 showing incorrect item or quantity RELOCATING STORED SUPPLIES Your section is responsible for storing different types and sizes of items As storage supervisor you may decide to rearrange these items to make better use of your storage space You may need to relocate supplies because you receive a catalog change notice or a notice of consolidation Rearrange to Save Space When you decide to rearrange to save space you and your personnel should take the followi
356. tional ration issue TOPOL bees cai uel ee Rae 1 13 FM 10 15 Controlling storagespace 5 1 Conveyors 11 3 11 4 Corrosion inhibitors 3 6 Count 10 26 Completing 10 23 10 21 Count 2 11 Covered storage space 5 1 5 18 Credit balance 2 11 Cubic capacity Attainable 5 18 eU RACE VEMM bs is 5 18 e e EM 5 18 Customer DO reconciliation list 1 11 Customer unit notification log 9 2 9 3 Cutoff controls 10 11 Daily process 1 4 Daily stock status report 3 3 Decontaminate clothing and textiles 2 21 Demand 2 1 4 2 1 1 2 1 4 2 2 4 Determining space 5 1 DICs 7 10 jy cepe 7 9 TKG tente 7 9 EKO 7 9 Discrepancies 7 13 7 13 Disposal release order 9 5 9 6 Document control register 2 3 7 5 7
357. to 0 5 0 25 to 5 0 2 5 to 26 0 30 35 8 10 3 4 of 28 FLEX pallets This will yield a total usable storage space of 976 36 cubic feet The aisle has approximately 596 60 unusable cubic feet which must be subtracted from the total usable cubic feet 29 83 feet x 2 5 feet x 8 feet 596 60 unusable aisle cubic feet 1 909 12 cubic feet vehicle 596 60 cubic feet 1 312 52 total usable cubic feet When increasing storage height above the sideboards you must make sure that the height of the storage aids is within safe limits 6 Ton M750 Semitrailer Van This van used for repair parts storage may be used in uploading the combat ASL See Figure 12 6 The M750 van is a unique type of storage facility It has certain design features that enhance its storage capabilities It has foldout sides and integral bins and shelves with 400 cubic feet of storage space The foldout sides form working platforms The user stands on these when placing or removing stock 12 7 FM 10 15 Y am 4 Figure 12 6 The 6 ton 750 semitrailer van with factory issued storage aids 12 8 x APPENDIX LOGISTICS HOT LINES C1 FM 10 15 Telephone numbers for logistics activities and agencies are listed below Both the Defense Switch Network DSN and commercial numbers are listed Defense Logistics Services Center Customer Service Logistics Intelligence file data including st
358. uivalent The most common type you will see at your shipping section is the dry cargo container This container is weatherproof and designed to protect the cargo from water It is ideally suited for shipping items packed in domestic packs and any other commodi ties that can be damaged by water The dry cargo 9 16 container is completely enclosed and must be loaded and unloaded by hand or forklift truck Breakbulk Semitrailers These semitrailers vary from 30 to 40 feet in length and from 22 to 40 tons in weight capacity Check the data plate on the trailer for speci fications prior to loading The breakbulk semitrailers have varying styles of side bracing and corner posts A semitrailer is designed to carry high density and oddly shaped cargo The canvas cover that normally comes with the trailer can provide protection from water as long as the height of the load does not exceed the top of the side racks by more than 12 inches Railcars Refer to DOD 4145 19 R 1 for detailed descrip tions and loading guidelines for railcars PREPARATION FOR LOADING It is the joint responsibility of the shipper and the carrier to ensure safety of the cargo equip ment and personnel during loading while in transit and on arrival at the destination You or someone you designate must inspect the cargo See Table 9 2 for a checklist This paragraph describes some other factors you must consider Importance of Proper Loading The delivery of
359. upings You should make sure that MHE can get to the items Quantity Know the quantity of the items you need to store This helps you determine the amount and type of space you will need You can get this information from the SCS Estimate the amount of space you will need so that you can keep the entire supply of an item in one place By using one location for each item you make it easier to restock supplies and set up the stock locator system Special Storage Requirements Some items such as lumber ammunition and explosives vehicles hazardous supplies subsis tence petroleum and metal products have special properties You need to be aware of these properties if you are to provide the proper type of storage for these items DOD 4145 19 R 1 Chapter 5 describes these items and explains the special type of storage and handling each item requires Hazardous Material Some materials are dangerous if they are stored with other stock or if storage personnel do not handle them correctly For example explosives poisons and magnetic and corrosive materials require special storage Sensitive and Pilferable Items Some items are medically regulated Others may be subject to theft Store these items where they can be protected Sensitive and pilferable items usually have a high resale value on the illegal market and need to be strictly controlled and stored in an area that can be locked Place restrictions on person
360. use the filter separator Open valve and drain water Leave valve open until fuel appears Inspect controls nozzles tubing connections and mountings for leaks corrosion and damage Check date of last weight test Have extinguisher weight tested if necessary Inspect for cable breaks tight connections and firm mountings Inspect for bulges blisters tears cuts gouges soft spots tightness and leaks Inspect for leaks Check weekly Inspect for sedi ment Check quarterly Inspect for loose or missing parts and tight mountings Check the pressure on the vacuum relief vent Inspect for broken lens and missing or broken levers Check for proper operation FARE components site selection criteria equip ment layout and operational step by step instruc tions Your tasks are listed below Selecta site which is flat or has only a slight slope In sandy desert areas your operations office may have to arrange for engineers to treat the area with a dust suppressant Requisition materials needed to rig the FARE for helicopter external load Refer to Figure 3 2 for a sample list of required rigging materials 3 5 FM 10 15 Plan the FARE layout so that helicopters do not have to land or take off downwind It is very dangerous to try to land or take off when the helicopter tail is to the wind Ensure that helicopters being refueled are at least 80 feet apart The recommended distance is 100 f
361. ust keep your DSU open for business during a cyclic inventory to process any item not involved in the inventory You must also process inventory items if they have PDs 01 02 and 03 Special Inventory special inventory is not a scheduled inventory You conduct a special inventory when you need to 10 5 C1 FM 10 15 count a certain item for a specific reason These reasons are listed in Table 10 4 You must keep your DSU open for normal business during the special inventory to process all requests for items not being inventoried If you receive a request for an item that is being counted hold it until after the inventory is finished Make an exception when the request has a PD of 01 02 or 03 or is an NMCS request You have only 72 hours to conduct a special inventory If you conduct an inventory because of an illegal forced entry into the warehouse the SSA commander will decide which transactions the SSA will process and how long the SSA maybe nonoperational NOTE You must conduct an unscheduled inventory each time you process a total or partial MRD Count only the item in question and compare this count with the quantity listed on the stock record Inventories Under the SARSS 1 I Automated System Although many of the measures taken to prepare and conduct an inventory are standard there is specific procedural guidance for conducting inventories within the SARSS 1 I automated system It is in ADSMs 18 L19 AJH BU
362. work cards in the com pleted survey file until completion of the the next location survey USING PREPRINTED LOCATION SURVEY WORK CARDS If your DSU works under the automated system of 054 the location survey work cards will be printed by machine The stock control or ADP section of your DSU will make a copy of all cards in the original locator deck in location order using DA Form 2000 3 The survey teams will use blank cards to list data for any location that has no preprinted location survey 10 8 card The ADP section will also prepare three com puter printouts when it makes the location survey cards The first printout is in NSN sequence and lists all the survey work cards The second is in location sequence and also lists all the survey work cards The third is a location error list of all errors recorded on the ABF Refer to TM 38 L32 12 Chapter 7 for an explanation of the location error list When you get the location survey work cards and the printouts from the ADP section you must first correct all the errors that are annotated on the location error list Once all errors are corrected and the corrections noted on the printouts that are in NSN and location sequence give one copy of each printout and the survey work cards to the survey supervisor Be sure both of you update and correct your printouts as the survey teams check each location USING SARSS LOCATION SURVEY LISTING If your DSU works under the SARSS automated
363. work requirements Materiel release denial Erroneous quantity stock num ber owner or condition code recorded on receipt actions Figure 8 17 Extract from DOD 4145 19 R 1 8 16 FM 10 15 5 5 320002926891 Fad 0009 A QUANTITY ERES x CO Exe AE paceman nc _ ____ eom LITT Es dar NIS Dir DOC ROUTING Y N T A to eur fur Pu SUPPLEMENTARY BIG COST DETAIL ACCOUNT NUMBER NEQUIETR vg me scia raone rroma aea ser ori DATE ed d Be ener 5 uen P RENE a RECEIVED ecce Nt N84 VO 30551 303 1530038 Lm 26 99092 12 014 2 77 1 EALUTE 30002946891 0000 quantity ouvrir 8 0 3 2 1 WWAL ROUTING LE deu m T ROUTING DOLLARS CENTS OENTIFIE a 3 E rap ouae RENAL 16 SUPPLEMENTARY ITEM DESCRIPTION NtNUNL BO INSSI HOS 1530038 MRO CONVERTED TO MRD DATE POSTED INIT T DATE AVAILABLE 38 TIMA 8003 99092 4u 203M 2 0 Figure 8 18 DA Form 2765 converted to
364. xposure Provide escort controls if necessary PERFORM STORAGE CHECKS AND INSPECTIONS DOD 4145 19 R 1 has special instructions for inspecting items such as lumber which require special handling checks AR 740 3 has more on inspection of shelf life items Your tasks are listed below Perform biweekly quality control inspections of storage buildings holding areas and storage facilities to ensure that supplies are protected from the weather rodents and insects Check on the suitability of each storage site for the items stored there Require a periodic 10 percent check on items subject to rust corrosion fungus or mildew to determine quality and adequacy of preservatives Require routine cyclic inspections to ensure that the first in first out rule is being followed Require special inspections at the request of higher authority on suspect lots quantities or items Require special inspections after hard rains heavy snows high winds or sudden changes in the weather Stress that soldiers check for torn or loose protective canvas and coverings damage from water hail or flying debris and loss of preservatives SPOT CHECK STOCK LOCATIONS When an MRD has occurred you will probably want to spot check from 5 to 10 storage locations to verify the availability of stock in primary or secondary locations Your tasks are listed below Compare the location on the locator file card or the receipt or requisitio
365. y changes Notify unit commanders about any help which units should provide the CEB section at the bath point Arrange for CEB soldiers to have their meals with supported units Review work loads Adjust work loads to meet peak requirements Regulate movement of supported soldiers into the bath facility Submit a consolidated DA Form 4766 R Bath and Clothing Exchange Activity Record to higher HQ Inspect operations periodically DECONTAMINATE CLOTHING AND TEXTILES Laundering is the primary way of removing NBC contamination FM 10 280 describes the different methods FM 10 280 Appendix B lists laundry formulas for each type of contamination Your tasks are listed below Request permission from higher to burn heavily contaminated items Higher HQ sets contamination tolerance levels Downwind vapors can expose soldiers to contamination 2 21 FM 10 15 2 22 RENOVATION SORTING CLOTHING AND CLASSIFICATION REPAIR SHOP AREA FUEL e p Laundry operating supplies are described in FM 10 280 Chapter 1 FM 10 280 Appendix G provides Step by step instructions on how to set up start operate and maintain laundry equipment Four to six soldiers can set up a large general purpose tent in 45 minutes Figure 2 7 Sample layout for laundry and renovation operations DRAINAGE 10 15 LIGHT SET GENERATOR SUPPLY GENERATOR own fuel tank or auxiliary W
366. you determined the number and grades of personnel required You should also list special equipment needed the areas of responsibility for each person on the team the reporting date and place and the schedule for the team members Anoutline for the training of survey and inven tory personnel All personnel involved in a location survey or an inventory need training to perform all counts and complete all records correctly Use the checklist in Table 10 1 page 10 2 to help set up a training program for your personnel Assignment of an inventory voucher number Anexplanation of how to prepare and distribute the survey work cards work card decks and location survey listings 10 1 C1 FM 10 15 An explanation of how to report control and verify the inventory findings An explanation of how to notify customers and other unit personnel of the delayed processing of requests and issues that will occur during a wall to wall inventory If LOGMARS T bin labels are used ensure that damaged or missing labels are replaced prior to con ducting location survey and inventory NOTE You should include the announcement of your DSU closing in the installation daily bulletin to notify all interested units and personnel AR 25 30 governs daily bulletin entries and explains format A sample announcement might read Consolidated Sup ply Warehouse Building 7166 will be closed 12 16 October 19XX for annual inventory Issues wil
367. you should allow supplies to stay in the customer s bin past the eight day time limit is when special arrangements have been made If the unit will not be able to pick up the supplies on time the unit supply officer or NCOIC should contact the chief of the issue shipping section to make special arrange ments to pickup the supplies at a later date Be sure to put a note with the new pickup date in the customer s TIME UNIT NOTIFIED JULIAN DATE NOTIFIED C1 FM 10 15 bin so that the supplies will not be sent back to the storage section by mistake PREPARING CUSTOMER UNIT NOTIFICATION LOG You will need to setup a customer unit notification log to keep track of the calls your soldiers make when they contact units for supply pickup Each time your personnel contact a unit they should enter the call in the notification log The log is your only record that shows the date the unit was contacted and who was notified There is no required form you must use to make the customer unit notification log However the data in Figure 9 1 must be included CHECKING CUSTOMER IDENTIFICATION Your issue shipping section must keep a file of current PBOs and responsible officers for each unit your DSU supports You must also keep a current file of DA Forms 1687 Notice of Delegation of Author ity Receipt for Supplies for each unit This form lists those authorized to pickup supplies for a unit and their signatures When unit representatives c

care of supplies in storage

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents